Light in the Dark

This article was written by Invader39. Please do not add to it without the writer's permission.

Light in the Dark
Story
Setting	Okoto and the Shadow Realm
Date Set	The Reign of Shadows
Media Information
Released	August 2, 2019-February 14, 2020
Written by	Invader39
Timeline
Previous	Lost in the Dark
Concurrent	Lies in the Light

Light in the Dark is a story serial written by Invader39. It is a sequel to his stories Pushing Back the Dark and Lost in the Dark. Unlike previous stories, it is not based on a specific year of the BIONICLE story. The narrative follows immediately after the conclusion of Lost in the Dark and features the Toa as its protagonists while Makuta, the Mask Hoarder serves as its primary antagonist. The Toa must face off against Makuta in a final battle for the fate of Okoto.

It is the third and final installment in The Dark Trilogy.

Story

Prologue: Heroes and Monsters

A long time ago on the mythical island of Okoto, all lived in harmony. It was a place of wonders and beautiful landscapes.

From the island’s elemental forces, Fire, Water, Jungle, Stone, Earth and Ice, two brothers, known as the Mask Makers, created Masks of Power.

Each brother had a special Mask: Makuta owned the Mask of Control, and Ekimu the Mask of Creation.

The brothers provided the Islanders with many Masks, but Ekimu’s were the most treasured. His brother became envious and forged an evil plan.

It was a sacred law that a Mask could never contain the power of more than one Element, otherwise it would become too strong and dangerous.

But Makuta wanted to create the strongest Mask of all time: the Mask of Ultimate Power.

When Makuta put it on, it took control over him, and the island began to shake and crumble. Realizing what his brother had done, Ekimu managed the knock the Mask from Makuta’s face. A shockwave rolled across the land, sending both brothers into an endless sleep.

The Masks were scattered all over the island, waiting for time when someone would come looking for them.

That time did come when Makuta’s spirit, in search of the three Masks of Power, brought havoc to the island. The Protectors were outmatched. Using the Prophecy of Heroes, they summoned six legendary heroes, the Toa, to save them.

But, the six Toa were divided and without purpose. It was not until they found both the Golden Masks of Power and each other, that they discovered, through unity, they had the power to defeat evil.

Together, they reclaimed the City of the Mask Makers from the forces of darkness and awoke Ekimu from his endless sleep. They restored the island and signified a new era for Okoto.

The evil of Makuta still lingered, however, and he attempted to regain the Mask of Control using Umarak the Hunter, a being as old as the island itself. Ekimu discovered his plan and sent the Toa to find the Mask before him.

Equipping the heroes with new armor and weapons, the Mask Maker told the Toa to find the Creatures, embodiments of the elements and the beings who hid the Mask of Control thousands of years ago.

The Toa did find the Creatures, but encountered Umarak along the way and lost the Mask of Control to the Hunter, who in turn attempted to betray Makuta with it. Instead, he was turned into the monstrous Destroyer.

Now under Makuta’s control, Umarak was sent to gather to six fragments of the Mask of Ultimate Power, setting loose beasts from the Shadow Realm to distract the Toa from his true intentions.

However, the heroes triumphed over the creatures, and with the aid of Ekimu, who had become the Toa of Light, went to find the Destroyer.

Using the fragments of the Forbidden Mask, Umarak transformed the Black Crater into a massive volcano, a portal to the Shadow Realm forming at the peak. The seven Toa battled the Destroyer for the fate of Okoto and managed to defeat the titan, but not before he had used the pieces to bridge the gap and open a portal to Realm of Shadow.

Now Makuta has returned to the island of Okoto, and the shadow has fallen.

The Toa can only hope to overcome it.

---

Thousands of years ago.

Sparks flew in all directions as Makuta the Mask Maker brought his hammer down again. With each strike, the metal changed color, from red, to blue, to green, to orange, to purple to white.

“More,” he muttered as he continued pounding. “More!”

A voice came from behind him. “Makuta?”

The Mask Maker stopped his hammering and turned to see his brother Ekimu walking towards him. Makuta twitched slightly as his fellow Mask Maker joined him, looking at the oddly glowing metal on the anvil.

“What is this, brother?” Ekimu asked, examining it.

“A new project I’m pursuing.”

His brother looked at the metal closer. “And what would that be?”

“It’s a surprise, Ekimu.”

The Mask Maker turned to Makuta, looking at him with his blue eyes.

“This is not another one of your dual-elemental Masks, is it?”

Makuta almost smiled. “No, it’s not a dual-elemental Mask.”

“Alright. I need to go to run and errand in the Region of Jungle. I will see you at the Festival of Masks, brother.”

“As will I.”

The two briefly clanked fists before the blue and gold being left the room, leaving Makuta alone. Once he was, he laughed to himself.

“Ignorant fool!” he said before continuing to hammer on his creation.

---

The Temple of Time.

Placing his hand on the carving, the Protector of Fire, Mamuk, watched as it glowed with an orange light before sliding away to reveal a golden Mask of Power. Ekimu walked forward and carefully grabbed the Mask with both hands, lifting it out of the vault.

“What is it, Ekimu?” Owa, the Protector of Water, asked.

“Legend has it that there existed one object that came before our ancestors, older than the Elemental Creatures, older than Okoto, older than our planet, older than the stars themselves. This object was known as the Vahi, the Legendary Mask of Time,” the Mask Maker said, holding up the Mask of Power.

The Protectors were astonished. “How can this be, Ekimu?” Udapo, Protector of Ice, inquired.

“Even I am not sure, but it is also said that this piece is only half of a greater Mask.”

“And where is the other half?” the Protector of Stone, Kerato, raised an eyebrow.

The Mask Maker sighed. “I do not know, Protector.”

“But this Mask,” he said, walking around to a staircase that led up to the platform above them, the Protectors following in his wake. “This Mask can give glimpses into the past and future and into other realms beyond our imagination.”

He reached up and placed his hand on the Mask of Creation, pulling it off and handing it to Epolim, the Protector of Earth. Now taking the Mask of Time in both hands, he raised it up. With a flash of energy, the Vahi magnetically attached itself to the Mask Maker’s face.

“The Mask never shows fantasies. It only shows truth. However, it does not explain what it shows,” Ekimu spoke. “If the appearance of the seven Elemental Creatures in one place is indeed an omen… Let us hope I have the wisdom to comprehend what the Mask reveals.”

Suddenly the Mask began to glow, the Mask Maker shaking a little.

“I forgot how this Mask tingles...” he said. “I can see something… coming into view...”

In his mind he could see flashes of random images. As they began to come into focus, he saw fires blazing, cities destroyed, strange, skull-faced creatures chasing villagers. There was another flash and he saw six differently colored comets falling from the sky. They crashed onto the island before he saw six figures emerge from them.

As he saw them, a single word echoed through his mind.

Toa…

“Toa?” he said aloud.

Suddenly everything went dark before he could see the Protectors standing in front of him. He grabbed the Vahi and pulled it from his face, energy streaking as he did so. He handed it to Mamuk, who took it and brought it back down to the vault.

“What did you see, Ekimu?” Owa asked as the Mask Maker placed the Mask of Creation back on his face.

“Destruction...” he said. “Horrors I could never have imagined. And...”

Udapo raised an eyebrow. “And?”

“Toa.”

The Protectors stared at the Mask Maker.

“Toa? Why? And what was the destruction?” Agarak, the Protector of Jungle asked.

Ekimu began walking down from the platform, followed by his the defenders of Okoto.

“I don’t know, but I feel we need to get to the Festival of Masks.”

---

“People of Okoto,” Makuta the Mask Maker said, addressing the crowd. “Today, you will witness history being made.”

He walked over to a box set upon a table to his left. Placing his hands upon it, he pulled it open and reached inside. Pulling something out, he revealed a golden Mask of Power, a strange shimmer running across its surface.

“With this – the Mask of Ultimate Power – I will be able to control the natural forces of Okoto, such as the climate, the weather and even the land itself.”

Makuta reached and pulled the Legendary Mask of Control from his face and placed the new Mask on. There was a flash of energy as he did so.

“No Okotan will never want for anything. Famine and natural disaster will be a thing of the past.”

The Mask suddenly began to shimmer more and more.

“And I will control it...” he said, his tone becoming distant and detached. “I will control… Control...”

An instant later there was a violent flash of energy when the Mask turned black with red flame billowing from the top. His purple and gold armor became red and black and he grew twice his size. Shaking uncontrollably, energy arched from his body. Villagers screamed as the streets began to crack around them. Above, the towers of the Capital City began to shatter.

“Makuta!” a voice to his right called.

Slowly, he turned to see Ekimu, his brother, standing there with his Hammer of Power in hand.

“Brother, take the Mask off before you destroy everything!” the Mask Maker called.

“No...” Makuta said, drawing his own hammer which became red and black as he did so. “I… I will control… I will control everything...”

Tears formed in his eyes.

“I’m sorry, Makuta.”

Running forth, Ekimu readied his hammer and jumped, swinging it upwards. In a massive flash of light, he struck the Mask of Ultimate Power, and everything went white.

And then it all went black.

Book I: Unity

Chapter 1: The Light Fades

Only in their dreams had they seen this happening. Only in the darkest of night had they felt this kind of dread.

But this was no nightmare.

Standing before the six Toa was a sight they had never hoped to see. Before them was Makuta the Mask Hoarder, brother of Ekimu, and Master of Darkness.

And he was free.

Makuta chuckled. “Did you miss me, brother?”

Ekimu stepped forward. “Brother! I locked in you the Shadow Realm once before and we can do it again.”

The titan looked to the six Toa who were holding their weapons at the ready.

“Oh? These Toa? Foretold in your little ‘Prophecy of Heroes’?”

“You believed in the Prophecy once before too, brother. Long before the Cataclysm.”

“Indeed I did, but I’ve found that it is merely a tool to comfort villagers who feel that it can’t get any worse.”

It was Tahu’s turn to retort. “We’ve defeated every foe you’ve thrown our way, Makuta! And we can defeat you just the same!”

The Mask Hoarder laughed. “Oh, such fire! However, you are very wrong. You cannot defeat me. You will not defeat me. That I will make sure of.”

He leveled his left hand at the Toa, the pieces of the Forbidden Mask still rotating in midair. Makuta’s hand flashed with energy before suddenly the six heroes were lifted into the air, flailing around, desperately trying to get back to the ground.

“I do not like this,” Lewa said.

Makuta smiled before throwing his arm backwards. The Toa were pulled after it, flying directly for the portal. As they approached, it shimmered and what had been beyond the threshold changed dramatically. There was no time to take note of this, however, as they flew through the portal and crashed hard on the ground on the other side.

The dark lord’s hand flashed again and the doorway the shimmered again, the Toa disappearing as they were replaced by dozens of pairs of sickly green eyes.

“Makuta, what have you done?” Ekimu asked, horrified.

“I have finally put an end to unity,” the Mask Hoarder smiled. “And now Okoto will fall down before me without your little heroes to protect them.”

“There is still one hope, brother,” the Mask Maker gripped his hammer and shield.

“Oh?” he chuckled. “You’re going to stop me, Ekimu?”

He smiled behind the Mask of Creation before Agil appeared out of nowhere and flew directly into the Mask Maker. They collided and a flash of light blinded the Mask Hoarder before it faded to reveal Ekimu, Toa of Light, united with the Creature.

“While there’s still breath in my body, I will always stop you,” the Toa said, glowing brightly.

“Then breathe no more, brother.”

“You can end this, Makuta! There does not need to be any more destruction!” Ekimu pleaded with his fellow Mask Maker.

“No! I have lived in your shadow for too long! I will take my rightful place among the gods!” the blades at the end of Makuta’s large weapon began to spin as they glowed with energy.

Ekimu sighed. “You’ve left me no choice then, brother.”

Taking his hammer in both hands, Ekimu charged at Makuta. The titan braced for the attack and blocked his brother’s first strike with his left hand. Makuta brought down his staff on Ekimu, but the Toa blocked it with his shield and swung his hammer at his brother’s knee. The crystal-faced weapon struck hard and caused the giant’s leg to buckle.

Extending the two swords attached to his arm, Makuta swung at his brother, forcing Ekimu to jump out of the way as the blades passed inches from him. The titan thrust his staff forward and a blast of dark energy erupted from the prongs. The Toa quickly brought up his shield as the blast collided with it, sparks flying off into different directions as Ekimu struggled to maintain his footing against the raw force of the attack.

“You can’t win, brother!” Makuta snarled as he increased the power of his assault.

“I’m not letting you take the island willingly!” the Mask Maker yelled over the screeching energy.

“Then you shall fall, Ekimu!” the Mask Hoarder roared.

Increasing the power of the energy smashing against the Toa of Light’s shield once more, it finally became too much for him and he was blasted across the top of the mountain and into one of the surrounding walls. He fell to the ground, too weak to move.

Makuta laughed as he approached his fallen brother, the prongs of his staff spinning fast, glowing with raw energy.

“Even the embodiment of all six Elements cannot stop me,” he mocked. “Surely then I am unstoppable?”

Ekimu struggled to his knees. “You fool. Have you learned nothing in all these millenia? I was never meant to defeat you. The Toa are.”

“Oh? Are they? But how can the Toa defeat me if they’re trapped for eternity in the Shadow Realm?”

Now it was the Mask Maker’s turn to laugh. “You may think they are gone, but the dark can never snuff out the light. They will return, and they will destroy you.”

The shadow of the Mask of Ultimate Power which Makuta bore contorted with rage as he raised his staff and brought it down on his brother. But Ekimu had been ready for this and quickly brought his shield up to block it. Sparks flew off as the two made contact before the Toa readied his hammer and struck the staff away.

Makuta roared as the Mask Maker was lifted off the ground by his golden wings, and twirling the Hammer of Creation in hand, dove at his brother.

“I’m sorry,” Ekimu, Toa of Light said as he swung his weapon at Makuta.

And then they were consumed by a blast of blinding white light.

---

“Narmoto!” Nilkuu yelled, sliding down the ladder. “What’s going on?”

The Protector of Fire looked up at the unnaturally dark sky hovering ominously above them.

“We have to evacuate the City.”

The other four Protectors joined them.

“What’s happening?” Korgot asked as they joined their two brothers.

“Evacuate the City?” Nilkuu repeated. “Why? What’s coming?”

“I don’t know, but with that shockwave and the sky, I have a pretty good guess.”

Vizuna realized. “The Toa failed.”

He sighed. “I think so. And if they failed, it means that Makuta has returned to Okoto, and if Makuta has returned, it’s only a matter of time before he returns here.”

“What about the Toa? And Ekimu?” Izotor asked.

“I… don’t think they’re coming,” Narmoto looked to the Creatures, who were huddled around each other.

“So we just run?” Kivoda stepped forward. “Like a bunch of cowards?”

“It’s the only thing we can do, Kivoda!” Narmoto snapped. “What can we do against Makuta himself? And Umarak? And the Shadow Horde? Sure, we have the Creatures, but the Mask Hoarder has been imprisoned for thousands of years. If he can control all these things from the Shadow Realm, surely he has amassed enough power to kill us all.”

He looked at his fellow Protector’s faces.

“We have to go. Now.”

Kivoda finally conceded. “Alright.”

They looked around saw that the majority of the villagers in the City had surrounded them, wondering what was going on. Narmoto looked to his brothers and sister before turning back to the assembled.

The Protector of Fire cleared his throat. “Darkness has fallen, and I fear that we are all in danger. Makuta has returned to the island and the Toa and Ekimu have most likely fallen. We have to abandon the City before Makuta makes his way here, and trust me, he will.”

Silence followed these words as the crowd looked at each other, fear in their eyes.

Vizuna stepped forward. “We’ll go into the Region of Jungle. There we’ll be well-concealed and have natural resources to nourish us.”

Korgot followed. “Alright, everyone. Let’s get moving.”

After quickly collecting essentials like food and beds and cooking utensils, the Protectors led the population of the City of the Mask Makers, the Elemental Creatures bringing up the rear. As they walked out the city gate and across the bridge, their future appeared as black as the sky overhead.

They walked, abandoning the City they had only just reclaimed and disappearing into vast jungle beyond, into the unknown.

---

“This is bad,” Kopaka paced around. “This is really, really bad.”

“Kopaka, calm down,” Gali tried to ease her brother.

But he was in no mood to do so. “Calm down? Calm down? We are trapped in the Shadow Realm while Makuta is out and free! Ekimu doesn’t stand a chance against him!”

“We can’t lose our heads,” Tahu said. “We have to figure out a way to get back.”

“Maybe if we combined our powers, we could open a portal?” Onua suggested.

Lewa looked at him. “Makuta had thousands of years to do that. Clearly the portal has to be opened from the outside. A door that opens inwards.”

“So what do we do now?” the Toa of Fire asked.

Pohatu finally spoke up. “There’s a city over there. Most likely the Capital City Ekimu spoke of. Maybe we can find something there.”

They looked across the chasm of darkness to another island where a great city stood, glowing in a dark purple light.

“I mean, what else do we have to lose?” Gali looked at her brothers.

“We have our lives left, Gali,” Kopaka said. “We could lose those.”

Tahu put his hand on his brother’s shoulder. “And we have to be willing to lay them down if there’s even a slight chance we can get back to Okoto.”

“Alright,” the Toa of Ice replied.

The group then moved to the edge of the rock they were on and looked out over the darkness to the Capital City.

“So,” Tahu began. “How do we cross it?”

“That’s easy, firespitter,” Pohatu said, walking past them. Reaching his hands out, he closed his eyes before abruptly opening them, looking at his palms.

“What’s wrong, Pohatu?” Gali asked the Toa of Stone.

“I… don’t know,” he replied, rapidly opening and closing his hands, like he was trying to spark them.

“Ekimu always said we drew our powers from the Masks,” the Toa of Earth said. “What if the Masks drew their power from Okoto?”

The Toa of Water stroked her chin. “It’s entirely possible.”

“So what do we do now?” Tahu asked. “We can’t exactly jump across the chasm.”

“Hey guys,” Kopaka said from the edge of the island. “What’s this?”

The group of Toa walked over to their brother and saw that he was pointing to a long set of stone steps, trailing down into the mist below, into darkness.

After a moment, Lewa sighed.

“I guess it’s our only option,” he looked to his brothers and sister. “Unless you guys want to jump the chasm.”

The Toa of Fire sighed. “Let’s go, team.”

And together, the six Elemental Masters of Okoto descended into the darkness, the path ahead of them uncertain.

---

When the shockwave so similar to the one that had rolled across the island thousands of years earlier shook the very land they walked on, the villagers who still lived outside the ancient City of the Mask Makers had retreated inside to the shelter of the homes.

Fear had filled the air and panic was setting in. Nothing would be the same. Makuta had returned. Darkness had fallen.

Arker looked at the dark sky from the window of his hut. Lightning crackled in what was supposed to be a sunny sky.

“Makuta,” he muttered. “It’s happened.”

Behind him the village elder beckoned him over.

“Join us, my son.”

Reluctantly, the Okotan of Ice turned and joined the circle of his fellow Islanders who had gathered around the old one.

“My dear friends. I fear the worst has come about. Makuta, the Master of Darkness, has returned to Okoto. The shadow has fallen and the light has faded.”

If the room hadn’t been so dark already, Arker was sure that statement would have made it even darker.

“But fear not, for we have a hope: the Prophecy of Heroes. It was a beacon of hope to our ancestors, and it can be a beacon of hope to us now. The Toa are here, and they will stop the darkness.”

Usually, words such as these would bring comfort to him, but hope seemed so far away. He couldn’t help shake the feeling that the Toa no longer existed on Okoto, and that they weren’t coming to the rescue.

Suddenly the building around them began to tremble as lightning violently crackled in the dark sky outside, casting a purple glow on them.

“What’s happening?” a child cried as objects fell from shelves and shattered.

Arker, along with several other of the villagers, got up and ran to the window, looking out at the rampant sky. The elder walked over and joined them.

“Mata Nui,” he muttered.

“What does it mean?” one of their number, a female Okotan, asked.

Before the elder could answer, the archeologist looked to her.

“The end. The end of Unity.”

---

Across Okoto, the former minions of Makuta, the Skull Creatures, who had been wandering aimlessly around the island after the fall of the Lord of Skull Spiders and of Kulta the Skull Grinder, looked to the reckless skies, their red eyes blazing.

Loud and clear, a voice echoed within their hollow minds, a voice filled with glee and pride, filled with an overwhelming tone of victory.

“Come, my servants. Come to me, for we have won the battle, and now I shall take my rightful place among the gods. Go to the City of the Mask Makers, come and claim the prize you have fought for!”

Slowly, the once wandering Skull Spiders, Skull Warriors and Skull Scorpios all across the island of Okoto turned toward the new capital of Okoto, marching forth to where their master had directed them, marching to where he would be waiting.

---

Underneath the Forge of the Mask Makers, Kulta the Skull Grinder and the Skull Basher stood in their cells, listening to the silence of the city above after hearing the Makuta’s message.

“So he really has returned, Skull Grinder?” the brute asked from his cell.

Kulta nodded his affirmation. “Indeed.”

Skull Basher looked to his commander. “What do we do?”

“The only thing we can do: wait.”

“Makuta will not be pleased that we failed, you know,” the Skull Basher said.

Skull Grinder looked down. “He is our master. We must respect that.”

“And if he kills us?”

He sighed. “Then nothing will change. We’ve been dead for a long time anyway.”

---

“Where are we going, Narmoto?” Nilkuu asked his brother.

“Vizuna is leading the way. He knows this Region better than any of us,” the Protector of Fire replied.

“But what will we do when we get there?” the Protector of Stone came to his brother’s side.

Narmoto looked to Nilkuu. “The only thing we can do now: hide.”

“And what about the Toa?” Kivoda asked. “I know you said they aren’t coming, but what do you think has happened to them?”

“There was an old legend, a very old legend that says that when the darkness falls, the light of Okoto will be snuffed out,” Narmoto replied.

Kivoda’s eyes widened. “You don’t think that’s happened, Narmoto?”

“Look around you, brother,” the Protector of Fire gestured to the group of refugees they were leading and the dark sky hovering above them.

“The light has dimmed,” Korgot said.

Narmoto nodded. “Yes, and I’m afraid the Toa are gone, and we’re on our own.”

“So we’re going to run like cowards?” Kivoda asked, echoing what he had said in the city. “How is that right?”

The Protector of Fire stopped, the group they were leading stopping as well. He looked into his brother’s eyes.

“Kivoda, I know you have a strong sense of duty, but a soldier must know when the battle is lost. We would never stand a chance against Makuta and his forces. The Toa have already most likely fallen before him. All we can do now is keep the villagers safe and survive.”

The elder of the Region of Water sighed. “I suppose you’re right, Narmoto.”

He nodded and turned to the group. “Come on, everyone. Let’s keep going.”

Together, they pressed on into the jungle, their destination unknown only to the Protector of Jungle. After a few hours the villagers could barely keep on, all of them downcast as they grew weaker and weaker.

Suddenly Vizuna stopped and held up his fist, signaling for them to stop.

“We’re here.”

They looked ahead of them and saw a large temple backed against a cliff-face in ruins, various pillars had crashed down in front of the opening. The Protector then went off towards it, the others looking at each other before following, the refugees after them. The Elemental Creatures turned and surveyed the perimeter, ready for an attack.

As the group crossed the threshold into a large circular chamber, they saw that the walls were covered in ancient runes, much like those that littered the island of Okoto. On the other side of the chamber they saw another doorway leading presumably into the cliff beyond.

Vizuna took the lead through the doorway, the others following in his wake. Coming through, they arrived in a massive stone room, dozens of feet wide and dozens of feet long.

Activating his elemental fire abilities, Narmoto sent a ball of fire along the walls of the cavernous space, igniting several torches that lined them, casting them in an orange glow. The light revealed several large statues in the center of the room.

Drawing closer, they saw that it depicted six tall beings, adorned in regal armor and holding weapons which appeared to be very familiar to them. The six statues wore legendary Masks of Power that the Protectors knew well.

“Are these... the Toa?” Nilkuu asked, brushing off the base in search of a description.

“They look like them,” Izotor replied. “But they’re different.”

“Ah ha!” the Protector of Stone exclaimed as he brushed off several old runes.

Korgot leaned in. “What does it say, brother?”

“It says that these are the ‘Destined Elemental Masters, heroes of Okoto’.”

Kivoda frowned. “Is that referring to the Toa as they were when they first came to Okoto? Because they were destined.”

“That may be it, but something’s not right,” Nilkuu stood back up.

“Wait a minute,” Narmoto said, approaching the statues.

Vizuna titled his head. “What is it, brother?”

“Look at them. They resemble the Toa when they first came to the island, but they’re different. Their weapons are similar, yes, but they appear to be different, and their armor is more complex.”

“So what are you saying, Narmoto?” Korgot inquired.

The Protector of Fire turned back towards them, a smile across his face and his blue eyes alight.

“I’m saying that these are not the Toa of the past. I’m saying these are the Toa of the future. The Toa are coming back to save us and stop the dark.”

“So there is hope?” the Protector of Water asked.

“There is always hope. We just have to believe in it.”

---

In the Shadow Realm, several shapes moved in the dark.

None of them had ever seen the light of the day, only the shadows from which they were born. Doomed to forever roam the dark dimension, these creatures were fierce and horrifying creations, enough to even push the Toa over the edge.

A villager from what had once been the Capital City walked through the shadows underneath the island the city rested on. His dull eyes were fixed straight ahead as they moved through the dark, his shoulders slouched and his feet dragging across the ground.

None of the villagers that resided in the city could remember how they got there. They only knew the darkness, and that Makuta was master over them.

Occasionally, he did have flashes of a life, a brighter, happier life, which he knew could not have come from the Shadow Realm. But he didn’t dare think about them, or could. The darkness had infected them all, made them forget who they were, made them forget everything except the dark.

He came to a stop when he heard something crash behind him. Slowly, he turned to see what had happened.

Squinting his already very dull eyes, he peered into the darkness when suddenly a spear came flying from the shadows. It struck him in the chest and sent him flying into a large rock behind him, pinning him there.

Eyes going in and out of focus, he watched as a large python-figure slithered out of the darkness, the blazing red eyes in its skull staring into his own dull eyes.

As it approached, two arms came from its sides and with its left grabbed hold of the spear, quickly pulling it from the Okotan’s body. He slid to the ground, too weak to move as the creature looked down at him.

Suddenly he felt something happening inside of him, like everything that was left was being drained out of him. He watched as purple energy came from his chest and fed into the creature’s spear, which glowed the same way.

A moment later the trail ended and his fell onto his shoulder, his eyes going dark as the Okotan died. Of course, he had died thousands of years ago when he and the entire Capital City had fallen into the Shadow Realm during the Battle of the Mask Makers.

Satisfied, the creature slithered off back into the shadows, ready for another victim to come its way.

Chapter 2: One Door Closes

“Well I can’t say I’m not disappointed, Ekimu,” Makuta taunted as his brother laid on the ground. “I thought you’d put up more of a fight.”

The Mask Maker looked up at the titan. “I don’t want to harm you, brother.”

He laughed. “Then you’re a few thousand years too late.”

“Please, Makuta! End this madness now!”

“NO!” he yelled. “I’ve waited too long for this day! I will not stop!”

Suddenly a blast of dark energy struck the Mask Maker, launching him into the air. Crashing to the ground in a flash of light, Ekimu and Agil separated, both sprawling on the rock floor.

Weakly, the Mask Maker got up, looking over at the Creature of Light, who lay motionless on the black ground. He then cast his eyes to his brother.

“Look what you’ve become, Makuta,” Ekimu got to his knees. “Look what your lust for power has changed you into!”

“Yes,” the titan smiled. “Look what I have turned into.”

He gestured to the portal where the dozens of green eyes began moving, coming closer.

Ekimu’s eyes widened. “No, Makuta! You can’t let them into our world! You can’t let them onto Okoto!”

“Oh, but I am.”

“You don’t understand what you’re doing! That much darkness will throw the island out of balance! Everything will change, and not for the better!”

The Mask Hoarder laughed again. “It will be for the better because you will lose your grip on the island! The Okotans will finally be free!”

“You imprisoned me in the Shadow Realm, Makuta, and I saw your idea of ‘freedom’. You will not impose that on this land.”

Suddenly Ekimu grabbed his hammer and shield off the ground and ran forward. Spinning the Hammer of Creation in his hand, he pointed at his brother and unleashed a barrage of projectiles. Makuta held his hand up to block it, but by the time he did, his brother was already charging forward, shield spinning.

Thrusting his staff forward, a blast of dark energy shot from the spinning prongs. Ekimu skidded to a halt and held his shield up just as the blast struck, purple sparks flying in all directions as it smashed into the spinning shield.

Makuta ceased his attack and charged at his brother, the pieces to the Mask of Ultimate Power left rotating in midair, and his three-pronged weapon swung at him. The Mask Maker slid underneath his brother’s weapon, striking the titan in the leg with his shield. The Mask Hoarder roared in rage and threw his other arm at his brother, which had two blades mounted on his wrist.

Ekimu moved out of the way and unleashed another blast of energy, pushing Makuta back. The former Mask Maker looked at his brother with boiling hatred in his eyes.

“You fool! Do you not understand that I am now a god? Give up!”

“I will never give up, brother! Not while there is still light!”

He was about to charge at him again when the Mask Maker was blasted from behind. He crashed to the ground before looking behind himself to see Umarak on his knees with his hand outstretched, energy glowing around it.

The titan laughed.

“Even in weakness my minions still fight for me!”

An instant later a cage of energy surrounded Ekimu, trapping him. Lifting off the ground, he came face to face with his brother.

“Makuta… please...” Ekimu looked through the crackling bars of his prison.

“No,” he said, looking to the portal. “It’s too late.”

A moment later the portal flashed as the Elemental Beasts, Skull Warriors and shadowy villagers marched out of the purple ring of energy, surrounding them. Makuta laughed with glee.

“Finally,” he smiled. “My army.”

Umarak struggled to get up, moving towards the titan.

“My master...” the Hunter said weakly. “I have done all you have asked. Do I not get my reward?”

The Mask Hoarder looked at him.

“Yes, my Hunter. You do.”

Makuta held up his hand, which held a Mask of Power identical to the Mask of Shadows, only orange and gray.

Umarak took it at once and slammed it on his face. An instant later he was covered in energy as his armor became orange and gray, just like the Mask. He pulled his bow from his back, which shone with the same colors.

“Thank you, my master,” he looked to Makuta.

The titan looked over his army. “Now, we go and take what is rightfully ours! Now we take back the City of the Mask Makers!”

Ekimu could only watch as Agil was placed into an energy cage as well before Makuta strode forward, followed by his army and the two prisons, which floated after him. The Mask Hoarder held out his hand towards the portal, which flashed with energy before the door shimmered, rippling to show the City Gate.

Smiling again, he walked into the portal, followed by his army.

---

“I don’t like this place,” Gali said, holding her spear tightly.

“None of us do, sister,” Lewa replied, checking their flank.

Tahu held his ball of fire in front of him, which was barely illuminating the way. “We just need to get the city. I bet we can find a way out there.”

“And if we don’t?” Gali asked.

The Toa of Fire didn’t answer.

“Then we don’t get out,” Pohatu answered grimly.

Gali stopped in her tracks, forcing the other Toa to do the same. “The people of Okoto need us! We have to get out of this cursed realm otherwise we’ve failed our duty!”

“We don’t want to fail our duty, sister,” Lewa said. “But look where we are.”

They looked around through the fog, an eerie light illuminating it from the unknown. Gali looked down at the ground, obviously discouraged.

“So,” the Toa of Jungle put his hand on her shoulder. “Let’s get out of here.”

She looked up at him and smiled before they began walking again through the fog. The light from Tahu’s flame barely penetrated the darkness of the place, and even their weapons were dim in this strange dimension. How were they going to get out? They didn’t really know. Their only hope was to find the portal that Makuta had used, but even then they weren’t sure if they could activate it.

“How far do you think it is until we reach the other side?” Onua asked.

“I mean,” Kopaka looked at his fellow Toa. “Aren’t you the Master of Earth? Couldn’t you tell for us?”

The giant shook his head. “While you are right, that is only true on the other side. Here I am just as powerless to manipulate the elements of this world as any of you.”

“Then we go on,” Tahu said. “Until we reach the end of the road.”

Nodding, the six Toa traversed further into the shadows. After a while, they heard something move in the darkness. Readying their weapons, they covered their flanks, watching and waiting.

Suddenly in front of Pohatu a figure moved in the fog.

He thrust his spear forward. “Show yourself!”

An instant later a small figure emerged from the dark. To their surprise, the being was an Okotan. But something was off about this one. Their armor was black and their eyes glowed dimly. Another thing was that they shuffled lazily through the fog, and didn’t even seem to acknowledge the Toa’s presence.

The group looked at each other as the villager walked between them like they weren’t even there.

“Are you okay?” Gali asked, reaching out her hand.

She grabbed the Okotan’s shoulder, and there was a blast of light when they made contact. When the light faded, the villager’s armor had changed to green and he was suddenly alert, looking around frantically at them.

“Who? What? How?” he gasped, spinning around.

“Calm down,” the Toa of Water said. “You’re safe now!”

Finally, he got hold of himself, breathing steadily now.

“Are you… the Toa?”

“Yes, we are,” Lewa replied.

He rubbed his head. “What happened? Where are we?”

Onua raised an eyebrow. “What is the last thing you remember?”

“I remember watching Makuta present the Mask he had made,” he explained. “The one that could control nature itself.”

“The Mask of Ultimate Power,” Pohatu said grimly.

The villager nodded. “That’s the one. The next thing I remember is him putting it on and Ekimu running at him, and then everything went white. And then it went black.”

“You don’t remember anything since that moment?” Gali asked.

“No. The next thing I remember is you grabbing my shoulder,” the Okotan answered.

Tahu was shocked. “The Battle of the Mask Makers was thousands of years ago.”

His eyes widened. “What? You mean all my friends and family are dead?”

“I’m sorry, but yes,” the Master of Water said sadly.

The Okotan looked down, tears in his eyes. “I never even got to say goodbye.”

She was about to say something when suddenly the villager was grabbed from behind and pulled into the shadows by an unseen force. He screamed as he disappeared into the dark before going silent. The Toa tensed, their weapons glowing dimly.

Outside their field of vision they heard something slithering, a strange metal scrapping echoing into their audio receptors.

An instant later a two-pronged spear flew from the darkness directly at them. With expert skill the six Toa dodged the weapon and watched as it buried itself into the rock face behind them.

Something slithered forward, and they saw a large python creature coming at them. Its cobra silhouette glistened in the glow of their weapons. The creature’s mouth opened as it snarled, exposing layers of sharp teeth. They swung their tools forward as it weaved between them. It went straight for its spear and pulled it from the stone.

It turned around, the blades of its weapon glowing a dark purple.

“What in Mata Nui’s name-?” Kopaka said when it charged at them.

The next thing the six knew was that they were all struck in the stomach and were now knocked to the ground. Then they had to roll out of the way as the serpent brought the spear down on them, evidently attempting to impale them.

It screeched as it brought its blade down again. Tahu managed to bring his own blades up and blocked the attack, pushing it away. This took the creature off-balance, and the moment’s distraction gave the Toa just enough time to get back on their feet and surround the beast.

Wildly swinging, the creature attempted to strike the six, but its attacks were blocked by the heroes’ weapons and the next thing it knew was being struck from all sides by the Elemental Masters, screaming as its armor was punctured and energy seeped out.

The Toa continued their attack, and with one last spine-chilling scream, the beast exploded into a blast of energy, pushing the six warriors backwards.

After the light dissipated, the heroes of Okoto caught their breath.

“What was that?” Lewa asked.

“I don’t know,” Gali replied. “But it killed that villager.”

To their left they heard more slithering before several eyes glowed dimly in the dark. Slowly, more than a dozen more of the strange python creatures emerged from the fog, weapons at the ready.

“Run!” Tahu yelled as the beasts began to throw their spears at the group.

Turning, the six Toa ran deeper into the darkness as the creatures slithered after them.

---

“Alright,” Kivoda said. “Now that we have shelter, what do we do?”

“I don’t know,” Narmoto replied.

“What are we going do about food?” Izotor inquired.

Vizuna chuckled. “Oh, that’s an easy one, brother. We’re in the jungle.”

Korgot nodded. “That’s a good point.”

“So we’ll just live here forever?” the Protector of Water asked. “That doesn’t seem like a good plan.”

“Well, Kivoda,” the guardian of the Fire Region seemed to be losing his patience. “You can go take on Makuta yourself.”

“That’s not what I’m saying and you know it,” he snapped back.

“Calm down,” Nilkuu said. “We can’t afford to be divided now. We’re the last hope Okoto has now.”

The Protector of the forest slammed his fist on the table. “Well said! The Toa and Ekimu’s destinies fall upon us now.”

“But how can we possibly hope to defeat Makuta?” Kivoda asked. “We could barely handle the Skull Spiders before the Toa arrived. Makuta will obliterate us!”

“We need to keep him from gaining any more power than he already has,” the Protector of Stone replied.

“And what would that be? He’s probably already taken the City. What else is there to gain except the entire island itself?” the blue Protector spread his arms wide.

“The Mask of Time,” Korgot suddenly said, a look of realization on her face.

Nilkuu nodded. “Exactly.”

“The Temple of Time is not far from here,” Narmoto stood up.

“And good thing too,” the Protector of Jungle followed. “Otherwise Makuta would surely take the Mask before us.”

“It’s settled, then?” Nilkuu asked. “We should get moving.”

“Indeed,” their leader said. “And the Creatures can defend the Okotans.”

Vizuna smiled. “Then what are we waiting for?”

---

“How long it has been since I walked these streets!” Makuta said as he and his forces walked through the City of the Mask Makers, Ekimu and Agil trailing behind him in their energy cages.

The Mask Maker saw as they were carried down the road that the Okotans had evacuated, and were hopefully long gone, far from the reach of his brother. Wherever they were, he hoped that they were at least safe, and hidden. Because they were going to need as much shelter as they could get.

Makuta picked up on this. “I see that my people have fled. No matter, they were cowards anyway.”

“What has happened to you, brother?” Ekimu asked through the crackling bars of his prison. “What has the Mask of Ultimate Power done to you?”

“It has opened my eyes, brother,” the Mask Hoarder replied.

“Opened your eyes to what? What could it possibly have shown you that you thought was good?”

His brother looked at him. “It has shown me how wrong you are. How wrong you’ve always been.”

“I know I’ve never been perfect, and I’ve made more mistakes than I can count, but this is madness! You have to stop before it’s too late!”

“Unfortunately for you, it is already too late.”

They reached the stairs to the Forge of the Mask Makers, and ascending them, stopped before the two statues on either side of the door. The statues of Ekimu and Makuta.

“These used to mean something, Makuta!” Ekimu said as the Mask Hoarder stared at the carvings. “Please remember that!”

“I remember living in your shadow,” he replied darkly, rage boiling in his blazing red eyes. “But from this day forth, you shall all be living in mine!”

A bolt of dark energy shot from the titan’s three-pronged staff and struck the statue of Ekimu. The stone figure exploded into a million pieces, falling all around them. The Mask Maker watched as the bust of his Mask of Creation rolled to a stop at Makuta’ feet. Raising his foot, the titan smashed the head into nothing but dust.

“You’re fortunate that I haven’t done that to you yet,” he said over his shoulder.

Continuing onwards, they entered the forge, their shadows stretching across the stone floor. Makuta looked around the place, a look of distaste on his face.

“Ah, you’ve redecorated,” the Mask Hoarder observed. “I don’t like it.”

Ascending the spiral staircase to the forge above, the majority of the Shadow Horde stayed outside, leaving only Makuta, Ekimu, Agil, Umarak, and a few of the Beasts to enter the Mask Maker’s forge. The titan walked towards the massive burning furnace in the middle of the room.

With the pieces of the Mask of Ultimate Power twirling around his fingers, he threw his hand forward. The six golden pieces flew into the flaming pit. As they entered the fire, they began to glow brightly. Clenching his fist, the fragments rearranged themselves in the familiar shape of the Forbidden Mask. It had been thousands of years since Ekimu saw it, and it still brought dread to him.

“No, Makuta!” Ekimu yelled before there was a flash of energy as the pieces merged together.

The light fading, the Mask Maker watched in horror as his brother took the Mask of Ultimate Power out of the fire. Holding it in his hand, he dropped his staff and grabbed the Mask on his face, which itself resembled the Forbidden Mask, and pulled it off and threw it to the ground. When it hit the floor it disappeared into nothing but mist, like it had never existed at all.

“At long last...” the Mask Hoarder said, lifting the golden Mask of Power to his face.

With another flash of light, Makuta shook as his form glowed, the Mask of Ultimate Power radiating with raw power. Looking around, his eyes blazed brightly.

“Finally,” he spun around. “The Mask is mine once again.”

“You have no idea what you’ve done,” Ekimu said grimly.

Makuta smiled darkly when the floor shook under their feet. Scraps of metal and crystals fell to the ground and shattered. All of them were thrown off balance, as if the quake was more than just the Forge shaking. Slowly, the tremor subsided, and everything came to a standstill.

The Mask Maker looked at his brother. “That was the entire island, Makuta. Using that Mask is going to tear Okoto apart, just as it did thousands of years ago.”

But the titan waved him off. “I was unprepared then. I’ve had millenia to get ready for this.”

“That Mask is too powerful for anyone to control. You have to stop before everything falls apart!”

“No!” the mad titan snapped. “I have waited far too long for this day to have you trample over it!”

“Please, brother! Listen to reason!”

Makuta turned towards him. “Then you’ll have to find some for me.”

Walking past his brother, the titan came over to a wall where the six Golden Masks of Power were resting on display, gleaming in the flickering light of the flame.

“Ah,” he said. “The six Masks you made and hid for the Toa to help them defeat my forces.”

“I was only doing what was shown to me,” Ekimu replied. “I was only following what had already been set long before Okoto was even formed.”

The Mask Hoarder reached out and grabbed Tahu’s Golden Mask of Fire, examining it. Casting a sideways glance at his brother, a smile spread across the Mask of Ultimate Power. In a swift motion, seemingly impossible due to his hulking stature, he threw the Mask into the flames.

“No!” the Mask Maker yelled as his creation began to melt in the fire.

Makuta laughed viciously. “Now you know how it feels to have your work cast aside like it is nothing! Now you know what it is like for something you’ve poured your heart and soul into to be thrown away!”

Ekimu watched in horror as his brother outstretched his hand, and with a flash of purple energy from his finger tips, the Masks of Power glowed with a similar light before flying off the wall and into the flames. The gold dripped away into furnace, running like water. It ran from their eye sockets, like tears pouring down their faces.

“You...” his voice shook with rage. “You have no idea what you’ve done!”

“He has every idea what he’s done, old man!” Umarak spat, the orange in his armor glowing.

“Simmer,” the titan said to his servant. “Of course, he’s right,” he looked at Ekimu, smiling.

Makuta began to walk across the forge, his forces and his prisoners trailing once again behind him. They descended the spiral staircase and came out onto the platform outside the Forge of the Mask Makers, overlooking the city.

“Here, my kingdom will spread to all the reaches of Okoto, and all will be my people!” he proclaimed to the Beasts, Skull Creatures, and villagers that were gathered below, roaring in their native tongues.

Ekimu his brother watched from behind, his blue eyes blazing.

---

“What do you think is happening, Kulta?” the Skull Basher asked as both Skull Raiders looked towards the ceiling.

The Skull Grinder’s eyes narrowed.

“The only thing it could be,” he replied. “Makuta has arrived.”

“What are we going to do?” Skull Basher asked, a slight undertone of concern in his voice.

Kulta sighed. “We’ll have to wait. He’ll find us eventually.”

“And then what?”

“If I’ve learned anything about the Mask Hoarder over the past several thousand years; it’s that he is ruthless and untrustworthy,” he looked across at his subordinate. “He will either free us, and we continue in his service, or he will kill us.”

This concerned the brute. “Should we fight?”

“I suspect that Makuta is at the height of his power. There is no fighting him.”

“So we’re just going to sit here and wait for him to kill us?”

The Skull Grinder’s eyes blazed as he glared at his lieutenant. “Do you have a better plan, Skull Basher?”

“Yes, I do,” he retorted. “I say we fight for our lives!”

“There is going down as a coward and there is going down as an idiot,” Kulta snapped. “You are being an idiot.”

The brute was about to reply when they heard the door to the dungeons opening above them, a light spilling down the spiral staircase. They readied themselves as they heard footsteps descending towards them.

A moment later, a dark figure emerged, light shining through his orange crystalline armor. He regarded them, his bow at the ready.

Chapter 3: We All Fall Down

Where they were running, they had no idea.

The six Toa had managed to lose the pythons that had been chasing them, but they were still running, trying to put as much distance between them and those creatures. Of course, they couldn’t possibly know where their current trajectory would lead them, but all they cared about at the moment was surviving.

After a while, with their lungs aching and legs screaming in exhaustion, they came to a stop, breathing deeply. Checking the area around them, they decided they were, at least for the moment, safe.

Kopaka was the first to speak. “Okay, I have a few questions.”

“Which of us doesn’t,” Tahu panted.

“At least give us one of them,” Gali leaned against a rock.

The Toa of Ice managed to regain his breath.“Well, one of the many questions I have is: what were those things?”

“The Shadow Horde was only one of the creatures we’ve encountered from this Realm,” Pohatu said. “It stands to reason that there’ll be more, and that they’d be more sinister.”

“Speaking of which,” Lewa readied his weapons. “We’ve got a problem.”

They looked to where his gaze fell and their expressions became as shocked as his. Above them hung several cocoons, all filled and unmoving. Their shock increased as they realized that these were identical to the ones spun by the Lord of Skull Spiders.

“What in Mata Nui’s-?” Tahu began to say when the words seemingly got caught in his mouth.

Descending from the darkness above were creatures they had never thought to see again. Of course, they had never imagined to see more than one. Crawling towards them were about half a dozen spider-like beasts identical to the Lord of Skull Spiders himself.

“How is this possible?” the Toa of Ice exclaimed, holding his weapons tightly.

“We can worry about that after we keep them from killing us!” the Toa of Stone charged forward, his spear ahead of him.

The five other Toa followed suit, running behind their brother as they ran at the six vicious creatures. Pohatu was the first to meet one and was quickly forced back as the beast fired balls of web from its mouth. Dodging the projectiles, the Toa sprung at the animal. He brought his crystal blade down on its head but was quickly struck by one of its claws, falling to the side.

To his left Kopaka swung his ice blade inwards at the skull creature he was fighting. The beast blocked it with one of its many claws and the Toa of Ice was forced to move out of the way as it swung at him itself, nearly shearing his armor with its razor sharp leg. He managed to block another strike with the shield built onto his gun, but he was also knocked away.

“They’re too strong!” Gali yelled, blocking one of the beasts’ claws. “We need our elements!”

Backing together, the six Toa watched as the skull creatures surrounded them, their jaws gnashing and eyes blazing. They growled as they closed in on the Toa.

“So,” Lewa said, holding his weapons ready. “We’ve got no elements, no powers, and there are six of the Lord of Skull Spiders. This will be fun.”

---

Kulta the Skull Grinder and the Skull Basher were led out of the dungeons under the Forge of the Mask Maker by Umarak the Hunter. While the leader of the Skull Creatures had never personally met the fabled Hunter of the Elemental Creatures, he had been sure that his armor was green and black, not this orange and gunmetal that reflected that of Makuta’s.

Something was obviously terribly, terribly wrong.

They ascended the staircase before coming outside to a platform where Makuta stood with three beings, the Elemental Beasts. Suspended in the air were Ekimu the Mask Maker and Agil, the Creature of Light, both confined in cages of pure energy.

Overlooking the City, Kulta saw that the streets were lined with these Elemental Beasts as well as his own forces, both Skull Spiders and Skull Warriors.

He looked to his master.

“Makuta,” he bowed. “I see you have been freed from your prison.”

The titan regarded him with blazing red eyes. “Yes. And with no thanks to you.”

“Forgive me, my lord,” the Skull Grinder said. “I underestimated the power of the Toa.”

“That you did,” he replied.

“If you could only give me another chance, I promise I won’t let you down-.”

But the Mask Hoarder cut across him. “No, I don’t think so.”

Stepping towards them, Makuta wielded his spear, the flame-shaped prongs glowing brightly as they spun. The mad titan laughed darkly.

“Is this the way for a warrior to be dealt with?” Kulta said, getting desperate. “Especially one who has served you faithfully?”

He stopped his advance.

“You know, you’re right,” Makuta replied, reaching to the chain that hung around his torso. It held several Masks of Power, including his Skull Mask.

Unhooking the mask from the chain, he tossed it to the Skull Grinder.

“Then you will fight for your life, warrior,” the Mask Hoarder said.

Grabbing the Skull Mask from the ground, Kulta slammed it onto his face. Dark energy covered his form as his strength and power returned to him. Standing up, he looked up at the hulking form of Makuta. Energy crackled in his hand as he clenched his fist. The titan suddenly threw down the Skull Grinder’s Mask Stealer Staff as well.

“So you will have chance,” he smiled.

The commander of the Skull Creatures and leader of the Skull Raiders chuckled darkly. “You may have your Forbidden Mask of Ultimate Power once more, Mask Hoarder, but I am still leagues more powerful than you ever could be!”

At this exclamation Makuta let out a hollow laugh. “Is that what you really think? That you are above even I?”

The blades on the titan’s arm snapped forward while the prongs on his staff spun wildly again.

“Then let us put it to the test.”

He thrust his staff forward, a blast of raw elemental energy streaking from the end. Barely managing to jump out of the way, Kulta leveled his own staff at the Mask Hoarder and unleashed a blast of dark energy at him. Makuta deflected it with his bare hand and swung his massive weapon at the skeletal figure.

The Skull Grinder was forced to dive out of the way as the three-pronged spear struck the ground behind him. He spun around, as fast as his brittle bones could take him, and pointed his Mask Stealer Staff at the mad titan. Energy sparked within the blades when suddenly he was struck by a gust of wind before the attack was followed by a blast of fire.

Kulta stumbled backwards and nearly lost his footing. Looking up, he barely had time to bring his weapon up to block as Makuta brought his staff down on him, the glowing prongs spinning violently close to his Mask of Power.

“Face it, Skull Grinder!” the Mask Hoarder smiled, his eyes glowing brightly. “You cannot possibly defeat me! I am more powerful than you could ever fathom!”

Roaring, the skeletal warrior forced his weapon upwards, a flash of energy appearing as he managed to break free of his grip and spun around, striking Makuta in the back of the leg. His knee buckled as he yelled in surprise. Taking advantage of this, Kulta unleashed a blast of dark power at the titan’s back, forcing him forward.

The Mask Hoarder stumbled forward and fell on his knee, the incredible weight of his armor holding him down as he struggled to get back up.

Seizing his window of opportunity, the Skull Grinder charged forward, energy crackling in the prongs of his Mask Stealer Staff, an expression of glee on his Skull Mask of Power.

Approaching the titan, he raised his staff, and readied for the finishing blow-.

In an instant Makuta spun around, his spinning staff streaking with energy as it came upwards. Kulta could only watch as a broad smile, a smile of victory, spread across the Mask of Ultimate Power. Then he realized that it was all over.

A second later the blazing weapon struck the leader of the Skull Raiders, and in a flash of light, his skeletal form shattered into a million pieces, falling all around them.

“NO!” the Skull Basher roared in the restraint of the Shadow Beasts.

Standing, Makuta turned towards the lieutenant. He smiled as he outstretched his hand towards the now loose Skull Mask of Power. Flashing with light, the silver Mask flew into the Mask Hoarder’s hand and he examined it, his eyes still glowing.

“A worthy servant,” his voice boomed. “He served me faithfully. The Skull Grinder even got his hands on the Mask of Creation. But, alas, as so many of my soldiers have done, he failed in his quest to release me from the Shadow Realm.”

He hooked the Mask of Power back onto the chain around his body. Looking to Skull Basher, he came up to him, staring down at his struggling form.

“Do not fret, my servant,” the Mark Hoarder said. “I do not intend to kill you as well. You could not defy the orders of your commanding officer, even if they were flawed. That is why you shall be rewarded.”

These words took the brute by surprise.

“Rewarded?”

“Indeed,” Makuta nodded. “Someone needs to command the Skull Army,” he gestured to the dozens of Skull Warriors and Skull Spiders in the streets below.

“You are… putting me in command?”

The titan chuckled before unhooking another Mask from the chain: his Bull Mask of Power. Hesitantly, he took hold of it and placed it on his face. Raw energy surged through his form, his eyes blazing. But something else happened, too. He could feel his body growing, his armor changing and stretching.

Looking down at his form, he found that he was now twice his original size, and he could feel that he was now stronger than he had ever been.

“I have, admittedly, made some upgrades to your Mask of Power.”

At that moment there was a piercing pain in his head, like something was boring into his skull, before he felt everything go numb, and his conscious disappeared.

The Skull Basher stood there, unmoving. Makuta smiled.

“My servant,” he said.

At once the brute perked up, staring at the Mask Hoarder with his dull eyes, before they filled with a dark color.

“Excellent,” the titan chuckled. “Go and awaken the rest of the Skull Raiders. You know the way.”

“I obey,” the Skull Basher replied before walking away through the crowds towards the city gate. As we walked several Skull Warriors fell into step behind him.

Ekimu finally found words. “You… corrupted him.”

“Don’t worry, brother,” Makuta turned towards him. “He was practically a blank slate anyway.”

Sadness filled the Mask Maker’s blue eyes. “Who are you?”

He laughed. “I am Makuta, the Master of Darkness, the lord of Okoto!”

---

The only sound they heard in the forest was that of the grass crunching underneath their feet. Traversing through the Region of Jungle, the Protectors walked in an almost unnatural silence. So far they had not encountered any of the Mask Hoarder’s minions. Whether that was a good thing or a bad one they were not sure.

With their weapons at the ready, they continued under the dark sky, shadows surrounding them. It was eerie. None of them had ever experienced anything quite like this. No one had probably experienced anything like this for thousands of years. Probably not since the Battle of the Mask Makers.

“How much farther to the Temple?” Kivoda asked, holding his Torpedo Blaster tightly.

“Not much further,” Vizuna replied, the flames on his Elemental Blaze Bow flickering softly.

“What are we going to do with the Mask of Time once we have it?” Izotor inquired.

“Take it back to the camp, keep it safe for as long as we can,” Narmoto looked back towards him.

Korgot looked at their leader. “Makuta will come for it, you know.”

The Protector of Fire sighed. “I know, sister. But what other option do we have? Everyone else has fallen before his power. Soon enough all peoples of Okoto will be under his rule. We just have to keep fighting, as long as we can.”

Nilkuu stared at him. “Indeed. I feel that this is all we can do as well.”

“So we’re just giving up?” the Protector of Water exclaimed.

“We’re fighting a lost battle, brother,” the Protector of Stone replied for elder from the Region of Fire. “There’s no point anymore. Makuta has won. All we can do is keep him from gaining more power.”

The Protector of Water was about to retort when the Protector of Jungle held out his hand, coming to a stop and signaling them to do the same. He stood with his eyes closed, concentrating. Looking around, they couldn’t see anything around them except the jungle itself.

“Vizuna?” the Protector of Ice asked. “What are you sensing?”

A second later his eyes shot open. “DUCK!”

Having no need to be told twice, the six Protectors dove to the ground, smashing into the dirt before several dozen arrows were released overhead, striking trees and bushes and the ground around them. They struggled to stay out of harm’s way as the razor-sharp projectiles grew closer and closer to them.

“HOLD YOUR FIRE!” a voice suddenly boomed through the chaos.

Moments later the arrows died away and after a few seconds more the Protectors looked up and saw several Islanders of the Region of Jungle emerging from the brush. They had bows in hand and were wide-eyed at the sight of the guardians of Okoto.

“Elemental Protectors!” one exclaimed, emerging. This Okotan wore a Mask of Power carved in reverence of Toa Lewa. He was obviously in charge.

The villager bowed before them, as did the others. “I am Kongu. I am the Captain of the Guard and I am terribly sorry that we fired upon you. We did not know that it was you.”

Getting to their feet and dusting themselves off, Narmoto emerged from his comrades and outstretched his hand to the Islander.

“It is good you are quick to defend your village,” he said. “Although I would suggest you make sure the thing you’re shooting at is hostile.”

He bowed again. “Of course, Protector of Fire.”

“What village are you from?” Vizuna stepped forward.

“Hornfell, sir,” Kongu nodded.

“Ah yes,” the Protector of Jungle replied. “I know of that village. Nice community.”

The Jungle villager scratched his head. “So, what are you doing out here? Where are the other Okotans from the City of the Mask Makers?”

“They’re safe,” the Protector of Fire answered.

“We’re currently traveling to the Temple of Time to retrieve the Legendary Mask of Time before Makuta gets to it,” Izotor said.

His eyes widened. “The Legendary Mask of Time? The very one Ekimu used to see the Prophecy of Heroes?”

Korgot nodded. “Indeed.”

“Do you need any assistance in getting to the Temple of Time?” the Okotan gestured to the villagers behind him.

“No,” Narmoto shook his head. “We can handle this.”

The Islanders bowed again, their elders bowing in return.

Vizuna looked around the assembled. “Now go back to your home and keep it safe. They need you more than us.”

“Yes, Protectors,” Kongu replied.

Looking at each other and the villagers, the six elemental guardians of Okoto turned and left, disappearing again into the forest. Once they were gone, Kongu began to walk in the opposite direction, the rest of his fellow guardsmen following in his wake.

---

The Toa were surrounded, with little to no way out. They had managed to defeat the Lord of Skull Spiders on the bridge to the City of the Mask Makers, but now that there were nine of them closing in on them, the odds didn’t seem to add up in their favor. Regardless, the heroes of Okoto stood their ground, weapons glowing as brightly as they could in the dark.

“What do we do?” Gali asked, holding her spear out. “We haven’t got our powers!”

“There’s only one thing we can do,” Tahu replied, his eyes narrowing. “We fight until the bitter end!”

Lewa looked at him. “You know that’s basically suicide.”

“It’s not like we have a lot of other options, vine-swinger,” Kopaka said, nodding to the Toa of Fire. “I’m with the firespitter.”

“Both of you are dumb,” the Toa of Jungle muttered.

At that moment one of the beasts fired a ball of web from its jaws at the group. Pohatu swiped his spear upwards and caught it in midair, slicing it in half.

This first attack set off a chain reaction and the rest of the creatures began to fire upon them. The heroes attempted to bat away the projectiles, but were quickly overwhelmed. Binding webs covered them, quickly causing them to trip and fall.

Before they could do anything, the beasts crawled over them and began to wrap them in webs. The Toa struggled, but it proved futile. In a few moments they were completely encased in cocoons.

“We’re trapped!” Gali exclaimed.

“I can’t get my weapons free!” Tahu said.

“Don’t struggle! You’ll make it worse!” Pohatu shouted.

“But they’ll kill us!” Kopaka returned.

The Toa of Stone rolled his eyes. “They’ll kill us faster if we struggle!”

“So what? We just lay down and let them eat us?” Lewa groaned.

“They won’t eat us right away,” he said. “That’ll give us time to figure out a plan.”

“How long?” Onua asked, struggling against his restraints.

“Well,” the Toa of Stone said, irritated. “Evidenced by the amount of bodies hanging from the city bridge left by the Lord of Skull Spiders, and the bodies here: pretty long.”

“But there are so many of them!” Tahu shouted. “They’ll surely eat us sooner than that!”

“Then we need to figure out a plan faster,” Pohatu returned.

The Elemental Masters of Okoto were dragged across the rocky ground towards a cave. As they entered they could see several Islander-sized cocoons hanging from above.

“I guess traits cross dimensions,” Lewa remarked quietly.

Crawling up the cave walls, the beasts dragging them with them, turning the heroes upside down. Once they reached the top, the massive creatures strung them from the roof of the cave, just the same as the Okotans. There they dangled, like fruit from a tree. Watching their captors retreat back into the darkness, the Toa were left alone.

“What do we do?” Gali asked, terror flooding her voice.

“Stay calm, sister,” Pohatu said. “We just need to relax-.”

“Relax?” the Toa of Ice’s voice echoed through the shadows. “How in Mata Nui’s name can we relax?”

“Panicking isn’t going to help come up with a plan,” he replied.

Tahu nodded, which made him slightly dizzy. “Pohatu’s right. We can’t figure out how to escape if we’re letting fear consume us.”

“But how are we going to get out of these cocoons?” Kopaka asked. “We can’t exactly use our elemental powers here.”

There was a cold chuckling that came echoing through the dark. They all fell silent as it chilled them to their cores.

“No, you can’t use your elemental powers here,” the voice said, which sounded like metal scrapping against a jagged rock.

“Who’s there?!” the Toa of Fire called out, his voice echoing. “What do you want?”

They chuckled again. “Who I am is not important, Toa.”

“You know who we are?” Onua asked.

“Of course I know who you are!” the voice returned. “How could I not know who the Elemental Toa, the Masters of the Elements, are?”

“Show yourself!” Kopaka shouted.

Another chuckle. “I thought you’d never ask.”

Below, they watched as a green glow came into view in the fog before a skeletal figure whose form glowed green and purple, dark armor covering his being. Two horns protruded from the sides of his glowing green skull as his purple eyes flickered at their dangling forms. In his right hand he carried a large shield with a glowing magenta blade while in his left hand he carried a large broadsword with a similar glow.

“What...” Gali was having a hard time finding words. “What are you?”

“I am a creature of the Pit,” they strode forward. “My master is the jailer. And you are his prisoners.”

“Yeah, no thanks,” Lewa said, looking down at the figure.

“Unfortunately, you have no say in the matter,” they smiled.

At that moment a loud screeching came from the darkness of the cave where several dozen glaring red eyes appeared.

“They, however,” Onua said, smiling. “Do have a say in the matter.”

Over a dozen of the giant skull spiders appeared from the shadows, their mouths twitching and their eyes blazing as they approached the newcomer. He watched as they surrounded him, ready to strike.

He chuckled once again. “Child’s play.”

Roaring again, the beasts began firing balls of web at the stranger. Moving at an impossibly fast speed, he sliced through all their attacks. The threads of their spun fell to the ground, as if they were nothing. At this, they stopped their attack, staring at him.

The warrior smiled.

“My turn.”

His blades glowing brightly, he swung at the many creatures encircling him. They screamed as his razor sharp weapons cut through them. Roaring as their limbs were severed and as they were sliced in two, the massive monsters attempted to get away, but didn’t get far.

Still moving at an incredible speed, he caught up to the retreating beasts and quickly drove his weapons into them, their blazing red eyes fading away.

A moment later he stood still, a broad smile on his transparent, glowing face. He looked up at the six Toa dangling above him, their eyes wide and mouths open.

“Impressed, are you not?” he asked.

“How… did you do that?” Tahu said in awe.

“Call it a gift.”

“Enough,” a new voice echoed through the black.

The warrior turned from the direction the voice had come from, the Toa trying to turn to see themselves.

From the void emerged a tall hooded figure, his armor a dark silver with spots of a sickly green showing through underneath. In his right hand he carried a staff with what appeared to be a large dream catcher as the head, sharp spikes lining the outside. Under the hood, his face was completely obscured in shadow, two burning red eyes looking out from the dark.

Walking up to the other stranger, he looked up at the six heroes hanging from the cave.

“So,” he said, his voice deep and cold. “You are the legendary Toa foretold so long ago.”

He paused a moment.

“I am not impressed.”

“Who are you?” Kopaka asked, the telescopic lens on his Mask of Power extending and retracting.

“My name is Dream Snatcher,” the being replied. “This is Demon Warrior.”

Pohatu spoke up. “What do you want with us?”

“You see, Toa,” the Dream Snatcher began pacing around the dismantled bodies of the skull creatures at his feet. “This is the Pit. It is a prison that existed in the Shadow Realm long before the Capital City came crashing down here. Since the beginning I have been the jailor of this prison. And anyone I come across down here is a prisoner of the Pit.”

Stopping, he looked up at them again.

“Welcome to hell.”

Gripping his weapon, the shape of the dream catcher glowed, and their cocoons glowed also. An instant later they were ripped down from the cave roof and floated down to the jailor, turning right side up as they did so. Now that they were at eye level, Tahu gained his composure again. The Toa of Fire stared at their captor.

“I don’t care who you are. All I care about is getting back to Okoto and returning Makuta to this wasteland.”

Both Dream Snatcher and Demon Warrior laughed.

“That is quite the day dream, Toa,” the hooded figure said. “And, unfortunately for you, I am the Master of Dreams.”

At these words their minds filled with darkness and they fell into unconsciousness.

Chapter 4: No Escape

It had been a long time since he had been here.

He and Kulta the Skull Grinder had left this cave many years ago when Makuta had summoned them for his service. Now he was still under Makuta’s rule, but he was in command of the Skull Raiders and of the Skull Army, and Kulta was dead.

Of course, there was something nagging at him at how quickly he had decided to follow the Mask Hoarder after his leader’s death. Something telling him that this was all wrong. But he shrugged it off. His only devotion was to the new master of Okoto. The only thing that mattered now was serving him without fail.

The Skull Basher and the Skull Warriors following him entered the cave mouth and descended deeper and deeper into the mountain. It was almost completely black as the light faded behind them. That was not a concern, however. He had lived for millennium in these caves, and was adapted to the dark.

After a while of walking, he saw flickering light ahead, which meant that they were there. And sure enough, he was right.

Several skeletal figures jumped out and pointed their blades, spears, and bows at them. The metal glinted in the orange light.

The brute was about to say something when a familiar voice echoed through the cave. “Skull Basher?”

From amongst the Skull Raiders emerged a figure clad in gray armor, his bones glowing red. He wore a Skull Mask just like Kulta and the Skull Warriors’. In both hands he carried twin blasters with long blades connected to them.

“Axato,” the titan said, irritation ringing in his voice.

“Where is Kulta?” the Skull Raider asked, looking amongst the troops.

“The Skull Grinder is dead,” he replied. “I am now in command.”

His eyes widened. “Our leader is dead? How?”

“Makuta punished him for his failure in procuring the Mask of Creation and has appointed me the commander of the Skull Legion.”

“How did the Mask Hoarder kill Kulta? He is still trapped, is he not?”

“No,” Skull Basher shook his head. “He is free, and Okoto is his. The Toa are banished and the Protectors and Creatures have fled.”

“So you are here to bring the rest of the Skull Raiders into the service of Makuta?” Axato raised an eyebrow.

The brute nodded. “Indeed.”

Hesitating a moment, the Skull Raider sighed. “Yes sir.”

“Alert the troops,” Skull Basher said. “We are going to the surface.”

The leader of the Skull Army turned and began to ascend again, the horde of Skull Warriors parting to let him through. Axato watched him leave.

“Makuta shall pay for what he has done,” he muttered. “Makuta and the Skull Basher shall fall for their betrayal!”

---

“How does it feel to be on the bottom of everything, brother?” the titan asked Ekimu as he entered the dungeons below the Forge of the Mask Maker.

The golden and blue figure looked up through the bars. “I don’t know. How does it feel to be on the top of everything?”

Makuta smiled. “Like a grave wrong has been righted.”

“And how does it feel to be in possession of three of the most powerful Masks of Power on Okoto?”

“Good,” the titan said, looking down at the Mask of Creation and the Mask of Control dangling from the chain around his torso.

“You have truly become the Mask Hoarder,” Ekimu replied.

“At least now I am something and you are nothing,” he glared at his brother with his blazing red eyes. “No longer shall I live in your shadow, for I have become shadow, and all of Okoto shall live in it.”

The Mask Maker crawled to the bars of his cell, weakened by the lack of his Mask and the energy field generated by the chamber. He looked out at the titan.

“Brother, please! You have no idea what you are doing! The Mask of Ultimate Power… it’s corrupted you!”

“No!” the Mask Hoarder roared. “No! This Mask has shown me the lies in your light. It is the only truth I have ever known!”

“You cannot possibly believe that to be true, Makuta,” Ekimu said bitterly.

“But it is,” he paced around the dungeon, his brother following him with his blue eyes.

The titan came up to the other cell and looked down to see Agil, the Creature of Light, sitting on the floor and staring at him. His form glowed dimly, his power dampened by the energy surrounding the cell.

“Even the Creature of Light fades in the dark,” the titan chuckled.

“Makuta, if you keep using the Mask of Ultimate Power, it will tear the island apart!” the Mask Maker pleaded. “I can feel it! And I’m sure you can as well!”

Suddenly a blast of energy struck the gold and blue figure, sending him into the wall of his cell.

“I feel freedom! Freedom from you grip!” the mad titan snarled. “Stop speaking to me as if you have the moral high ground! At your core you are just the same as I am.”

“You’re insane,” Ekimu got up off the floor.

“Perhaps,” Makuta replied. “But you are a fool. There is no hope anymore. Your Toa have been banished, the Protectors have fled with the villagers. Give up. I am the sole ruler of Okoto!”

“While there is light, there is hope,” his brother looked through the bars.

He laughed. “Unfortunately for you, the light has been lost in the dark.”

Turning on his heel, the Mask Hoarder left the dungeon, his huge footfalls echoing as he ascended the spiral staircase and out of sight, the door closing behind him. After he was gone, Ekimu turned to Agil.

“Have you felt anything?” he asked the Creature. The golden hawk looked at him with its blue eyes.

Ekimu sighed. “Hopefully the Protectors have figured out what to do.”

---

They pressed onwards through the jungle, their destination an unknown distance ahead of them. While they had all traveled there to summon the Toa, which now seemed an eternity ago, they were foreigners in this land. Only Vizuna knew where it lay, and he would only say that they were getting closer.

Reaching a wall of trees, the Protector of Jungle stopped, his brothers and sister stopping accordingly.

“We’re here.”

A wave of excitement rushing over them, the six Protectors broke through the wall, coming out into a large, sloping field. On top of one of these rested an ancient building, nearly as old as Okotan civilization itself.

The Temple of Time.

Walking towards the structure, the elders of Okoto awed at its appearance. The temple resembled a large metronome, a massive pendulum swinging to and fro through the center of it, a ticking heard with each stroke. Glowing blue lines shone all over the outer walls. The Okotan symbols engraved on it did the same.

Ascending the steps, the Protectors hurriedly made their way to the entrance. Reaching the door, Vizuna pressed his hand on a circle on the center of the barrier, various runes circling the outside of the disk. On contact, the runes glowed green before the door slid upwards, blue light from within bathing the Protectors.

Quickly making their way inside, the six rushed underneath the large platform where they had recited the Prophecy of Heroes. The platform was supported by six staircases that led up to it and a narrow pillar shaded underneath.

Approaching it, the Protectors gathered around a carving of a Mask of Power. Placing his hand on it, Narmoto channeled some of his elemental energy through his palm which ignited the engraving in an orange glow before it slid away to reveal a hidden compartment. Inside sat the glowing object of their journey.

The Vahi, the Legendary Mask of Time.

Slowly, the Protector of Fire reached his hands into the small chamber and picked up the ancient Mask of Power. Pulling it back out, he held it as the other Protectors awed at it.

“Come,” Korgot said. “We have to get out of here.”

“Wait,” Kivoda stopped. Everyone turned to look at him.

“What?” the Protector of Stone asked.

The elder of the Region of Water looked at his comrades. “I just had an idea. We summoned the Toa originally with the Mask of Time? Couldn’t we do it again?”

“Kivoda, we don’t even know what happened to them,” Vizuna replied.

“I know,” he said. “But it wouldn’t hurt, would it? To preform the Prophecy of Heroes again?”

“Maybe, but-,” the Protector of Jungle began when he was suddenly cut off. The doors creaked when they were blasted down.

The dust clearing, the Protectors readied their weapons as six Skull Warriors and six Elemental Beasts stood at the entrance, their eyes blazing.

“This is a problem,” Izotor held his saw shield in front of him.

Aiming their weapons at them, the twelve minions of Makuta surrounded the six elders of Okoto, who in turn aimed their weapons at them. They seemed to be particularly interested in Narmoto, who was still holding the Mask of Time.

“So, what’s the plan?” Nilkuu asked.

---

His footsteps echoing, the Skull Basher entered the chamber. A colossal figure stood staring at the flames of the Great Forge, a flickering shadow cast across the stone floor. On the farthest wall several Masks of Power were mounted, among them Kulta’s Skull Mask, Makuta’s Mask of Control and Ekimu’s Mask of Creation.

“My lord,” the brute bowed.

Turning towards him, Makuta looked at his servant, the flickering light dancing across the gold surface of the Mask of Ultimate Power.

“What is it?”

“I do not intend to disturb you, my master,” the Skull Basher said. “But a squad of Skull Warriors and Elemental Beasts have found the six Protectors in the Temple of Time.”

“The Temple of Time? Why would they be there-,” the Mask Hoarder suddenly stopped as he realized. “Of course. They’re trying to keep the Legendary Mask of Time from me.”

The leader of the Skull Creatures looked up at the titan. “My forces have them detained. What do you want me to do?”

“Come with me,” Makuta said, stepping away from the forge and walking over to his subordinate. “We are going to pay the elders a visit.”

Outstretching his hand towards a wall, a shimmering portal suddenly appeared, a staircase on the other side. Walking towards it, the Master of Darkness disappeared through the rift and was quickly followed by Skull Basher. After he stepped through, the fissure closed.

---

“What do we do?” Korgot whispered, her Star Drill glowing.

“I’ll tell you what we’ll do,” a voice boomed from outside the Temple.

Turning towards the door, the Protectors’ heartlights nearly stopped as a massive figure emerged through the doorway. He was as twice as tall as the Toa, and his armor glowed orange with tinges of purple. In his right hand was a large three-pronged staff and on his left wrist were two large blades. On his face was the Forbidden Mask of Ultimate Power.

Entering the Temple of Time was Makuta, the Mask Hoarder.

Behind him to his left was the figure they recognized as Skull Basher, but he had changed drastically since they had last seen him. He was now as tall, if not taller, than the Skull Grinder and appeared to glow darkly.

“So,” the Master of Darkness chuckled as he approached them. “You are the elemental Protectors of Okoto. You know, the last time I met any Protectors was thousands of years ago. Your ancestors.”

“And so you are Makuta,” Nilkuu stepped forward, feeling strangely brave. “The Dark Lord.”

“Interesting,” the titan looked at the Protector of Stone. “Your brothers and sister seem to tremble before me, while you have the audacity to speak against me.”

Kivoda joined his brother. “We are not afraid of you.”

“No, we’re not,” the Protector of Earth said.

The titan laughed. “Well, you should be very, very afraid of me. I am the one who banished the Toa and defeated the great Ekimu.”

At these words the six glanced at each other before returning their gaze to the massive being in front of them.

“What do you want, Mask Breaker?” Vizuna held his Blaze Bow tightly.

“Do not insult your master!” the Skull Basher spat.

But Makuta waved him off. “Oh, let them have their fun. It does not matter what they think about me. They’ll end up where they’re supposed to be. However, to answer your question, I want that,” he pointed to the golden Mask of Power held by the Protector of Fire.

“No,” Narmoto said defiantly and firmly.

The mad titan didn’t seem surprised by this answer. “No? Well, what can I say? You fire types are always so stubborn.”

In the blink of an eye the Mask Hoarder leveled his hand at the elder of the Region of Fire and unleashed a blast of energy. Before he could react, the bolt struck Narmoto in the chest and sent him flying backwards. The Vahi clattered to floor just as he did.

The other Protectors moved to help their leader, but Makuta stopped them.

“NO!” his voice ripped through the air, forcing the five to stop. “While he may be your leader, I am your master, and you will leave him.”

Seeing no other choice than death, they reluctantly turned back to the titan, leaving Narmoto unconscious on the ground.

A smile spread across Makuta’s face. “There, that’s it.”

Outstretching his hand again, the Legendary Mask of Time was covered in a purple light and lifted off the ground, floating into the Mask Hoarder’s claws.

“Four Legendary Masks of Power are now mine,” he laughed.

“It’s a good thing your name describes you so well,” the Protector of Ice said darkly.

“Oh, my dear elder,” the titan replied. “I am the only one who appreciates their true value.”

The Protector of Earth stepped forward. “And what do you plan to do with all these Masks?”

“Keep them from the hands of those who don’t deserve to possess them. And that would include Ekimu, you, the Okotans, and anyone else who wants them.”

“You have no need to worry. We have all the Masks we need,” Kivoda said confidently.

Laughing again, Makuta looked down at the five. “No, you have too many.”

There was a flash before the Protectors each felt their Masks of Power being tugged from their faces by some unseen force. With a snap, the five elemental Protector Masks, along with Narmoto’s, which had been passed down for generations, flew from their faces and circled around Makuta before attaching themselves to the chain around his torso.

With their energy leaving them instantly, they fell to the ground, almost too weak to hold themselves off the floor. Makuta turned and, with a wave of his hand, opened a swirling portal, the Forge of the Mask Makers on the other side. He held the Mask of Time tightly between his claws as he walked towards it.

“Bring them with us,” he said to his lieutenant. “They’ll spend the rest of their lives with the one they have so blindly followed.”

Disappearing through the rift, Makuta vanished, leaving them with the six Skull Warriors, the six Elemental Beasts, and the Skull Basher.

“You heard the Master of Darkness,” he snarled at his subordinates. “Get them into the dungeons!”

Blankly, the minions of the Mask Hoarder grabbed the Protectors and dragged them across the ground, with them barely conscious. The guardians managed to watch as they were pulled towards the spinning circle of light before everything went black.

---

“Let us out!” Tahu yelled through the bars of his cell.

“No.”

“I am demanding that you let us free!”

“No.”

The Toa of Fire stopped for a beat.

“Please?”

The Dream Snatcher turned towards him, his eyes blazing. “You are now prisoners of the Pit. And prisoners of the Pit you shall be forevermore.”

“But Makuta is free on Okoto!” Gali pleaded. “We have to stop him before he destroys everything!”

“What has Okoto brought except despair for my realm?” he asked. “Okoto brought the Capital City into our realm, which killed thousands of my people where it landed. It brought Makuta, the Mad King, who enslaved this realm to fit his own goals.”

“We are trying to make Makuta pay for what he has done and make sure he can never do them again,” Kopaka said.

“And how will you accomplish that?” his red eyes flashed. “By locking him back in the Shadow Realm so he can rule and enslave this world for eternity? No, I don’t think so.”

The jailor of the Pit began to walk away, leaving each Toa in their individual cells. Onua called after their captor.

“Please! If you don’t let us free, he’ll do the same to Okoto that he did to the Shadow Realm!”

“Not my problem,” Dream Snatcher replied. “As long as he takes his Shadow Horde with him, I couldn’t care less about where he goes.”

His footsteps echoed away into darkness, the Toa left with only themselves. They looked at each other through the bars of their cells.

“So what now?” Lewa asked. “I doubt trying to talk him into releasing us is going to work.”

“Well, we have to do something,” Gali said. “I don’t know how long it’ll be before Makuta has done irreparable damage to Okoto.”

“Agreed, but without our elemental powers and our weapons,” Tahu looked at his hands. “There isn’t much we can do in way of getting out of here.”

Pohatu spoke up. “We can’t just give up. We are the Toa, and we’ll keep on fighting.”

Unusually, the Toa found the Master of Stone pessimistic, and hearing him say something so full of confidence and optimism was a surprising yet welcome surprise.

“No one has ever escaped the Pit,” the voice they recognized as belonging to Demon Warrior rung through the darkness.

The six watched as the glowing skeletal figure emerged, walking between the two lines of cells. He looked at them, his eyes blazing. He chuckled.

“You’re naive to think you have any future other than here in the Shadow Realm.”

“We may be fools,” the Toa of Earth gripped the bars of his prison. “But we are Toa, and it is our duty to do the impossible. It is our duty to keep pushing back the dark.”

“Then, it is unfortunate that you are so lost in the dark.”

“Even the slightest spark of hope can be the brightest light in the dark, demon,” Gali retorted.

Smiling, the warrior chuckled again. “We’ll see.”

They watched as he walked away, the sound of his footsteps disappearing into the dark.

---

“Where are the Protectors?” Harvali asked. “They should have been back by now.”

At the entrance to the structure the Elemental Creatures moved around nervously. An Okotan from the Region of Fire, Jaller, sighed. He was one of the guards of a village in his Region

“I don’t think they’re coming back.”

“What happened to them?” the archeologist turned to her fellow villager. “Why aren’t they coming back?”

“Makuta,” he said grimly.

An elder from the Region of Earth stepped forward.

“I fear that Jaller may be right,” she said. “If Makuta truly lives up to his name, then he is most likely in search of all the most powerful Masks of Power.”

“So the Mask Hoarder has the Mask of Time and the Protectors?” Harvali gasped.

“And most likely Ekimu,” Jaller said.

“But what about the Toa?” Bingzak came into the conversation.

“Wherever they are, they can’t help us,” the Okotan of Fire replied.

Harvali ran a hand through her hair. “Now what? We don’t have the Toa, we don’t have the Protectors and we don’t have Ekimu. All we have is the Creatures, and it’s only a matter of time before Makuta finds us.”

“I mean,” the young villager of Jungle stroked his chin. “The Creatures are the literal embodiments of the elements. I think they would be able to protect us.”

“Yeah, but Makuta is incredibly powerful. If he’s overtaken the Toa, the Protectors, and Ekimu, I don’t know if the Creatures will be able to do anything to stop him,” Jaller crossed his arms.

“What about the Labyrinth of Control?” a new voice joined.

They turned to see an oddly-colored Okotan of Fire they recognized as Takua. He was an adventurer, usually getting himself into trouble.

“The Labyrinth?” Harvali repeated. “What about it?”

“We go to the Labyrinth. From what I know, it’s heavily fortified and the perfect place for us to go,” Takua explained.

“A good strategy,” Jaller stepped forward. “But with Makuta’s forces covering the island, I doubt we would make it that far.”

The adventurer nodded. “I know, but Harvali is right in that they will eventually find us, and while the Creatures will be able to fight for a while, Makuta will prevail and we will all either fall under his rule or die.”

“Do you really expect all these people to be able to cross the channel that separates Okoto from the island the Labyrinth is on?” Harvali gestured to the Okotans spread around the temple. “It’s a death march.”

“I mean, do we really have any other options?” Takua asked.

“Well, so far, both our options end in death, so I’m not really sure what’s the point,” Jaller said.

The Creatures began chirping again, gesturing to the entrance to their hiding place.

“Apparently the Creatures think we should leave,” Takua smirked.

“I hate you,” the Okotan of Fire buried his face in his palm.

---

“I have a task for you.”

The Mask Hoarder paced in front of the Great Forge, his flickering shadow dancing across the floor once again. He stopped and looked at the being standing before him.

“I know that the Protectors escaped with the population of the City of the Mask Makers,” Makuta began. “They have the Elemental Creatures with them, and with the size of their group, they couldn’t have made it far.”

Umarak looked up, a smile on his face.

“What I need you to do is find them, and bring them back to me. Use any means you deem necessary.”

The Hunter smiled. “The Creatures will finally be mine.”

“I want the Creatures, too,” the titan replied.

His face falling, Umarak looked at the ground.

“Do not worry,” Makuta turned to face him. “I have a gift for you to satisfy you for now.”

At that moment, there were footsteps as two Elemental Beasts entered the room. Between them was Agil, Creature of Light, caged in a ball of energy. Umarak’s eyes flashed.

“I’m sure that this will be enough for the time being?”

Another smile broke across the Hunter’s face.

“Oh, yes, my lord,” he said. “That will be enough.”

Agil looked at him with weakened, yet fearful, eyes.

Chapter 5: Prisoners of the Pit

The Shadow Realm was a place of unending darkness.

Not much was known about it. The first revelation of its existence had been when Ekimu had knocked the Mask of Ultimate Power from his brother Makuta’s face thousands of years before. A hole had been ripped in the fabric of reality, and Makuta and the Capital City had been pulled into the Shadow Realm while only Ekimu’s spirit had been drawn in, leaving his body on Okoto.

Only recently had Makuta recognized the breach between the two worlds, finding out when a Shadow Spider that had slipped through a rift found the Golden Mask of Skull Spiders. Then, he used the beast as his vessel, taking over the Skull Spiders that were native to the island and using the Lord of Skull Spiders to contact Kulta, the Skull Grinder.

Then, Umarak had used the Mask of Control and his own Shadow Traps to create small bridges to the Shadow Realm, bringing over the Shadow Horde, which Makuta had fashioned from combining the bodies of ancient warriors with elemental crystals native to the dark dimension.

Now, the Toa were trapped in the Shadow Realm. Thrown through the very portal the Mask Hoarder had escaped from, they were now the ones imprisoned. Trapped forever in what was called ‘the Pit’, they had no hope of escape.

Tahu slammed on the bars, and not for the first time.

“LET US OUT!” he roared into the darkness.

“Hey, firespitter,” Lewa groaned from the cell next to his. “They’re not going to let us out.”

“Well,” he looked at the Toa of Jungle. “What better plan do you have?”

“I don’t know,” he said. “It’s hard to think of a plan with you banging on the cell walls every few minutes.”

“Lewa’s right,” Onua agreed from a few cells down. “That will not get us anywhere fast.”

“But we have to do something!” Tahu said. “Makuta is on Okoto right now, and we can’t do anything about it from this cell. We have to get out!”

Pohatu nodded. “Agreed. But first we have to come up with a plan that’s actually good.”

“There is no escape,” said a somber voice from somewhere across from them.

“Who’s there?!” Kopaka called through the mist.

They chuckled hollowly. “My name is not important. The only thing that is important is that you are holding onto a false hope.”

“What makes you think that we’re holding onto a false hope?” Gali asked. “You have no idea who we are!”

“I know exactly who you are. You are the legendary Toa, foretold in the Prophecy of Heroes.”

The six looked at each other. “Who are you?” Onua inquired again.

“Not anyone anymore. I used to be Makuta’s top lieutenant here in the Shadow Realm. But, after my suggestion to destroy the Mask of Creation went south, he threw me out, banishing me here to the Pit.”

Slowly, the fog cleared and they saw the figure sitting in the cell across the way, his dark form almost blending in with his surroundings if not for the bright blue highlights in his armor. His red eyes blazed behind a Mask not dissimilar to Kopaka’s previous Mask of Power.

“I am Iconox,” he said. “And I am the Master of Power Absorption.”

“’The Master of Power Absorption?’” Lewa looked at him. “Is everyone a master of something here?”

“No. There are just many of us who are gifted with certain abilities,” Iconox replied. “The Shadow Realm was once a civilization of its own, you know.”

“What was the Shadow Realm before the Battle of the Mask Makers?” Gali asked.

He sighed. “There was a city, standing where the Capital City now stands. The Pit was the jail for those who were deemed too dangerous. I was one of the leaders. However, all that changed when the city came from Okoto and crushed it. I, Dream Snatcher, Demon Warrior and a few others were the only ones to survive.”

“And what are those things out there? Killing the Okotans?”

“Those are Soul Grinders. Their powers work similar to mine, but instead they tap life-force, not power,” he explained. “And I heard you encountered the Shadow Spiders.”

“It wasn’t our first dealing with them,” Tahu replied. “There was one on Okoto, known as the Lord of Skull Spiders. We defeated him.”

Iconox laughed. “It took all six of you to defeat one? And here I thought you were supposed to be heroes with god-like power. Well, I guess you did get banished here...”

“Did you say ’god-like’ powers?” Kopaka inquired. “What god-like powers?”

“You mean you really don’t know? You don’t know what you’re capable of yet?” he chuckled.

“I mean,” the Toa of Water began. “I know we’re powerful, but the Elemental Creatures are the god-like ones.”

“And you believe this?” Iconox gaped. “Honestly?”

The Toa looked hesitantly at each other. “Well, yeah,” Lewa shrugged.

“As I see it, the Creatures, and the island, and therefore all of Okoto, pull their power from you six.”

“What?” they all gasped collectively.

“You six really have been led astray,” the mysterious being remarked. “Who taught you, or lack thereof?”

“Ekimu the Mask Maker instructed us in all we needed to know,” Tahu answered.

“Evidently not.”

“Who are you to tell us what is right and what is wrong? We only just met you,” Pohatu said. “For all we know, you could just be another one trying to lead us astray.”

The warrior chuckled. “I could be, and you could simply ignore me. But, if you want to learn of your true abilities, I suggest you listen to me.”

Looking at each other, the Toa of Fire was about to answer when a sharp voice hissed through the darkness.

“Silence.”

Emerging from the shadows was Dream Snatcher, his eyes blazing. He walked between the cells, glaring at his prisoners.

“I know you six think of yourselves as heroes amongst darkness,” he said. “But give up any dream of escaping this place. This is the Pit, and you are prisoners of it.”

“Keeping us here is only going to bring more death and destruction!” Lewa grabbed the bars. “You think Makuta ravaged the Shadow Realm? He’ll do that tenfold on Okoto.”

“Not my problem,” he replied.

“What if Makuta comes back here? What if he comes back with his forces and takes both the Shadow Realm and Okoto? What then?” Gali asked.

“Honestly, I couldn’t care less,” he replied. “Plus, he has spent this place. He has taken anything that it ever had. Now the only thing that remains of what once was the Shadow Realm is the Pit. Makuta would never return here.”

Iconox glared at him. “And neither will I.”

Suddenly the mysterious figure’s cell door blasted off its hinges and flew at the Dream Snatcher. The jailor didn’t have any time to react and was struck with the full force of the metal door. He collapsed under it and laid on the ground, unmoving. A moment later his body disappeared in a cloud of black smoke, as if he had never been there.

The Toa stared at the scene in shock as Iconox walked out of his prison and stood over where the body had rested.

“You… killed him,” Kopaka said, disbelief echoing through his voice.

“Oh, don’t get so wishy-washy about it,” he replied, coming over to their cell doors. Bringing up his clawed hand, he slashed the locks of each of their cells.

Glancing at each other, the six Toa pushed their prison doors open and walked out. They gathered around their liberator.

“What now?” Pohatu asked.

Iconox smiled. “We go to the Capital City and get out of here. Makuta has a portal that I’m sure you can open with your elemental abilities.”

“Great plan,” Lewa looked at something down the way. “But I’m not sure how it’ll translate to actuality.”

They followed his gaze and saw Demon Warrior approaching them, his weapons brandished.

“No one has ever escaped the Pit,” he snarled. “And you will surely not be the first to do so!”

Swinging his blades forward, waves of energy rippled from his glowing weapons. The six Toa and their new ally were forced to jump out of the way as deadly rays of power flew past them. It was all they could do without their powers or their weapons.

Onua was struck with a bolt of energy in the chest, sending him sprawling to the ground. Kopaka quickly followed, joined by Tahu.

The remaining Toa, Pohatu, Gali and Lewa, stood with Iconox as the Demon Warrior readied for another attack.

“Back into your cells!” he roared. “Or you will be dealt a fate worse than the one you were intended to receive in the clutches of the Shadow Spiders!”

“We have a duty,” Pohatu said. “And you’re not going to stand in our way.”

“Funny, because I have a duty, and that’s to stop you,” Demon Warrior replied.

The Toa of Stone smiled. “Well then. I guess this is an interesting situation we have found ourselves in.”

“Not really.”

He thrust his blade forward and a shockwave of energy followed it. It hit the four with all its power and launched them backwards, smashing into the ground. Iconox was the first to recover and charged at the warrior. Readying his weapons to meet him, the guardian swung his blades at the approaching attacker.

The mysterious being flipped over the Demon Warrior’s first attack and barely dodged his second. Finding an opening, he struck the skeletal figure in the ribcage, knocking him off-balance. He tumbled backwards and Iconox took advantage. Kicking forward, he sent the creature falling to the ground. On impact his weapons bounced away.

Moving quickly, he grabbed the sword and, in one swift motion, spun around and swung it downwards. There was a slight crunch as he severed the Demon Warrior’s head from his body.

Having recovered themselves, the Toa looked upon the scene.

“You killed him too,” Lewa said.

“There wasn’t any other way,” the figure looked back at them. “He would’ve just kept coming.”

“There is always another way!” Gali objected.

“Not here,” he shook his head. “Here, we either kill, or be killed ourselves. There are no other options. No place for mercy.”

Tahu stepped up to him. “Then we believe very different things.”

“Maybe I should get rid of you,” Iconox looked around the Toa. “And just escape by myself.”

“I’d like to see you try,” Pohatu unfolded his arms.

“You say that like it’d be a challenge,” his red eyes flashed.

Suddenly the six Toa were tossed to the ground by an unseen force. Pain surged through their bodies as they crashed on the rock floor. He stood above them, glaring at them.

“Just because you’ve defeated enemies in your world doesn’t mean you’re ready to defeat enemies in this world,” he said.

Reaching out his hand, blue energy radiated from his palm. A second later the Toa felt a searing pain as the same energy covered their bodies. They screamed as it felt like their very power was being drained out of them.

“As I told you: I am the Master of Energy Absorption. My ability is to drain beings of their energy, and it in return makes me stronger.”

And as quickly as it appeared, it left, the Toa feeling their power return as they rolled over on the hard ground.

“Your world is much more tame than this place. You say you took on the Shadow Horde in your reality? The Shadow Realm is like facing a thousand of them, and that didn’t go well for you.”

Onua looked up at him. “We didn’t tell you about that.”

Iconox turned to him, and the blazing rage in his eyes faded as he chuckled to himself.

“I guess I do get caught up in character sometimes,” he stroked his chin. “Oh well. That happens from time to time.”

“Who are you?” Lewa said.

“Oh, you know who I am.”

His form shimmered and blurred before the Dream Snatcher appeared in his place. The Toa’s eyes widened. The jailer smiled as he walked above them, twirling his staff.

“What have you done?” Kopaka got to his knees.

“Oh, I like to break in my prisoners on their first day with a little demonstration of what I can do if they don’t stay in line.”

“You can make hallucinations?” Gali asked.

“I did say that I’m the Master of Dreams, didn’t I?”

Tahu stood up. “Just let us go. Or we’ll make you. Just let us walk out of here,” he pointed down the row of cells.

“But the thing is: you’re still in your cells,” Dream Snatcher smiled.

The Toa looked at each other when suddenly everything began to shimmer and blur just as the figure they thought had been Iconox had done. A moment later they were back in their cells, like they had never left. The warden was standing in front of them, smiling.

“Who was Iconox, then?” the Toa of Jungle asked.

“An old inmate of mine,” he answered. “But he didn’t work for Makuta. And I had to kill him after he tried to escape a while ago. I use his form for fun sometimes, though.”

“Please,” the Toa of Water begged through the bars. “You have to let us out. Okoto is in trouble and we’re the only ones who can save it.”

“Like I told you before,” he glared at her. “That is none of my concern. You’ve been banished to the Shadow Realm. There’s no going back.”

Pohatu grabbed the bars of his cell, clenching his fists tightly. “Let us out, or I’ll destroy your little establishment here!”

“You’ll destroy the Pit? I’d like to see you try,” Dream Snatcher laughed before walking away. After he disappeared, Demon Warrior appeared, alive and well, and chuckled at them before following his master.

Alone, the six Toa looked at each other in their individual cells. There was no visible way out of this prison, and if the warden could create realistic illusions in their minds, it would be nearly impossible to escape. They were powerless to save Okoto.

“We have to do something!” Tahu rattled on the wall of the cell. “We need to get out of here!”

“But how? Our powers are useless in the Shadow Realm,” the Toa of Earth groaned. “We’re stuck here. Forever.”

“You’re giving up, Onua?” the Toa of Ice turned to the large Toa. “I thought you were supposed to be the one encouraging everyone to carry on, no matter what.”

“It’s only logic, Kopaka,” he looked up at him. “The odds are stacked against us.”

“So that’s it? You’re done?” the Toa of Fire threw his arms out.

Onua shook his head. “We’re out of options.”

“Lewa?” Gali asked, looking at the Toa of Jungle.

He was sitting on the floor of his cell, legs crossed, forearms out and eyes closed. Sitting completely still, his only movement was his gentle breathing. A moment later the runes on his Golden Jungle Mask of Unity began to glow. Taking in a deep breath, he opened his eyes. Standing, he looked at his hands, they began to glow just as the runes.

“What-?” the other Toa said when he thrust his hands forward. A massive blast of air shot from his hands and knocked the door clean off its frame.

The Toa stared in awe as Lewa stepped out of his prison. He was grinning broadly.

“How did you do that?”

“That vision got me thinking. I realized that if I concentrated my energies I might be able to conjure my elemental powers,” he replied.

“That seems awfully convenient,” Tahu crossed his arms. “How can we be sure we aren’t caught in another dream?”

“Well, we have to try to get out of here to prove that,” the Toa of Jungle said. “What’s the worst that could happen to us?”

Gali shrugged. “He’s got a point.”

“Alright,” the Toa of Fire conceded. “But we have to be very careful and quiet.”

“When have we ever been careful or quiet?” Pohatu muttered.

He cast a sideways glance at him. “Let’s go.”

Lewa came and unlocked the doors from the outside, which didn’t require a key but were operated by a mechanism that couldn’t be reached from inside the cells. The doors swung open and the Toa stepped out into the corridor, looking at the fog and darkness that engulfed them.

“So what now, firespitter?” Kopaka asked as they stepped out of their cells.

A smile crossed his Golden Fire Mask of Unity. “Simple: we get out of here.”

“I’m surprised that needed to be said,” the Toa of Earth chuckled.

“Well, enough saying and more doing,” Lewa turned in the direction the Dream Snatcher had gone. “We’re getting out of this joint.”

“You’ve always wanted to say that, haven’t you,” Gali said.

“Of course.”

“You talk too much,” the Toa of Stone groaned. “Let’s go already.”

Nodding, the six Toa took off into the darkness. Their footsteps pounded and their armor clanked as they broke through the fog, layer by layer. As they passed, indistinguishable figures looked at them from their cells, eyes blazing in the shadows.

After a while they reached a barred fence and skidded to a halt. Walking up to it, the Toa shook it, finding that it was as sturdy as their cells had been. Tahu turned to Lewa.

“Can you blow it down?”

The Master of Jungle smiled. “Now what kind of question is that?”

Taking a step back, he held his hands together, eyes closed. Slowly, a ball of air began to spin between his hands, whistling softly. Then it began to become louder, and the spinning more violent. Opening his eyes, he thrust his hands forward, a powerful gust of air shot from his palms and struck the door, blasting it off its hinges, much like he had done with the cell.

“Great work, brother,” the Toa of Earth slapped him on the back.

“Thanks,” he said. “Don’t do that.”

Entering through the open gate, the six watched their surroundings, ready for any attack. Or, at least they felt that they were. If there was one thing they had learned from being trapped in the Shadow Realm, it was that they couldn’t truly be ready for anything.

Strangely, they didn’t encounter anyone, or anything, for that matter, as they continued towards what they hoped would be the exit. Nonetheless, they kept their guard up. Being ready was all they could do.

“How do we know this isn’t just another hallucination?” Kopaka whispered.

“We don’t,” Pohatu replied.

“That’s comforting,” the Toa of Ice rolled his eyes.

“No. What will be comforting is getting back to Okoto and vanquishing Makuta forever,” the Toa of Stone said.

“Stop,” Tahu hissed, holding out his hand.

The six came to a stop in the middle of the corridor, darkness behind and before them. A second later a figure moved in the shadows before Dream Snatcher emerged, obviously surprised at seeing them.

“How-?” he began before Lewa blasted him with a gust of air.

Skidding backwards, the jailor of the Pit came to a stop, his red eyes shining as he glared at them.

“I don’t know how you got out, but I know for a fact that you’ll be going back in.”

He outstretched his hands before six identical copies of himself shimmered into existence around the Toa. Coming back to back, they faced off against the duplicates. Despite having the same number of fighters, the six were clearly outmatched.

“Wait,” Lewa said. “Aren’t these guys just hallucinations?”

Suddenly one struck him in the chest and he tumbled to the ground.

“Pretty good hallucinations, I guess,” he groaned.

“Face it, Toa,” the Dream Snatcher said. “You can’t win.”

“We’re the ones who decide when we can’t win,” Tahu replied defiantly.

Charging forward, the six Toa took on their six opponents. But, as they quickly found out, the six shadows could do a lot more damage to them than they could. Every time one of them tried to land a blow, it passed right through and were instead knocked to the ground themselves.

“There’s no way to beat them!” Gali yelled before she was thrown into one of the walls of the corridor with a bang.

She was right. As they continued to fight, they realized that they were defeating themselves more than they were defeating their opponents. They would probably end up failing from exhaustion than from their wounds. Already they could feel their energy draining away, and the shadow clones getting the upper hand.

Being thrown into one of the walls, Onua sunk to the ground, his head spinning. He looked up, his vision blurring in and out of focus, at his fellow Toa, who were being overwhelmed by the clones of their captor. How could they beat things they couldn’t touch? They had no power over them.

His eyes drifted over to the Dream Snatcher himself, who stood in deep concentration on the sidelines. He appeared to be taken completely up by controlling his clones and didn’t seem to be able to notice what was happening to his own body.

Flexing his hand, the Toa of Earth closed his eyes and concentrated. A moment later purple energy sparked in his palm. Slowly, it began to circle around his fingers. Opening his blue eyes again, he looked at his hand before turning to their attacker.

Thrusting his arm forward, a stream of dirt flew from his hand and directly at the Dream Snatcher. It flew into his hood struck him directly in his face. His blazing red eyes went dark and he fell backwards, hitting the ground hard.

An instant later the six clones began to shimmer before blinking out of existence entirely. The five Toa, shocked at the suddenly disappearance of their opponents, looked around before seeing the Dream Snatcher on the ground and Onua with his hand outstretched.

“How did you do that?” Kopaka asked.

“I looked on the inside,” he smiled.

“Come on,” Tahu said, looking down the corridor. “We’re close to escaping.”

Recovering themselves, they rushed down the dark hallway. Their footsteps echoed as they charged. They broke through layers of fog, slowly coming closer to their freedom.

“What about our weapons?” Pohatu inquired. “We don’t stand a chance out there without them.”

“But we don’t know where they’re keeping them,” Gali replied.

A few moments later her question was answered. They skidded to a halt as a doorway appeared on their right. Looking in, they found shelves of various weapons, tools, armor, and Masks of Power. Walking between them, they each found their respective weapons. As they were reunited with them, the blades glowed dimly in their hands.

“Now this is what I’m talking about.”

Suddenly an ear-splitting scream echoed down the corridor. Peering out, they saw the glow of the Demon Warrior bleeding through the mist down the hallway.

“Run!” the Toa of Fire hissed.

Without needing to be told twice, the six broke out of the armory and continued down the dark corridor, never looking back.

---

Miles above, in the Capital City, villagers and Elemental Beasts wandered aimlessly through the darkness.

This had been the villagers’ way for the past several thousand years, ever since this great city had been brought to the Shadow Realm. They had lost themselves there, being fully corrupted by the darkness. All of them had become little more than drones, servants to the Mask Hoarder Makuta.

Any sort of personality had been purged from them, all of them a blank slate. Of course, they had the occasional flash of a life much brighter and fuller than the one they lived now, but it meant nothing to them.

Except for today.

They were continuing their daily routine when, all at once, the villagers stopped dead in their tracks, and so did the Elemental Beasts. They collectively turned towards the south, their dull eyes fixed in the same direction.

Standing there, they listened as a single phrase echoed through their void minds.

The Toa are coming.

Chapter 6: The City of the Lost

Eventually they reached another set of gates. Now armed with their weapons, they made quick work of it.

“Stand back,” Onua said, raising his hammer.

Running forward, the giant Toa of Earth swung his weapon downwards and struck the barrier. It knocked the gate clean off its hinges and it clattered to the ground. There was a cloud of dust that filled the air as they stepped out of the prison. Despite the atmosphere being no different outside than inside, they breathed in their freedom.

They were quickly reminded of their task as they heard the enraged screaming of the Demon Warrior from the shadows behind them. Nodding to each other, they charged into the dark, the Pit disappearing behind them.

The familiar fog and darkness engulfed them again, but this didn’t matter. All that mattered was finding a way out of this forsaken place and returning to Okoto. The only logical place to go to try this was the Capital City, which glowed dimly in the shadows above them.

After they had put a significant amount of distance between them and the Demon Warrior, they came to a stop. Sitting on rocks, they caught their breath. Their lungs burned and legs ached. The six Toa had been running nonstop since they broke out of their prison, and they felt they couldn’t give anymore.

“How are we going to get up into the city?” Lewa asked, looking up.

“Normally I would suggest launching ourselves up,” Pohatu said. “But even if we can tap into our powers, I doubt they’d be strong enough to do that.”

“There has to be another way up,” Onua stood up. “Like a staircase or something.”

“That would be incredibly convenient,” the Toa of Stone muttered.

“Well, we’ve got to think of something,” Gali said. “We have to find our way back home.”

Tahu got off his rock. “Yeah, but we have absolutely no idea how to navigate the Shadow Realm.”

Suddenly a new voice joined the conversation. “If you need someone to guide you, I’d be happy to help.”

They turned to see an Okotan standing there, adorned in the armor of the Protector of Jungle. Their eyes widened.

“Vizuna?” Tahu gasped.

He shook his head. “I’m afraid I don’t know who that is. My name is Agarak, and I am the Protector of the Region of Jungle.”

“Agarak? You were one of the Protectors from the Great Cataclysm,” Gali said.

“’Great Cataclysm’? What are you talking about?” he asked, confused.

“When Ekimu knocked the Mask of Ultimate Power from Makuta’s face. Surely you know this? You were there,” Kopaka stepped forward.

“I remember that, but I do not remember this Great Cataclysm that you speak of. I have not seen Okoto since I got here.”

The six Toa looked at each other. They had absolutely no idea what was happening or why this ancient Protector was here.

“Now,” Agarak said. “Who are you six?”

“We are the Toa,” Tahu answered.

Gasping, the villager’s eyes widened. “The Toa? The ones Ekimu spoke of when he donned the Mask of Time?”

They nodded.

“If you are the Toa… hang on a minute...” the Protector held his head. “Ekimu spoke of destruction. Is that what this Great Cataclysm was? The destruction?”

“Yes, yes it was,” Gali replied.

“What… what was it like? Is my wife safe? My son?”

They looked at each other again. “I...” Gali was at a loss for words. “Don’t know. It was thousands of years ago...”

“Thousands of years?” Agarak fell against a rock. “I’ve been in here for thousands of years?”

“I’m afraid so,” Onua said.

“My wife… my child… everyone I loved… they’ve been dust for millennia...”

The Toa had fallen silent. “I’m...” Gali looked down. “So sorry.”

“What… what happened?”

Onua took a deep breath. “When Ekimu knocked the Mask from Makuta’s face, it tore itself apart and created a massive shockwave that rolled across the island. It ripped a hole in the fabric of reality, sending Makuta and Ekimu’s spirit to this place. The two other great Masks were lost in the blast. The Masks of Creation and Control were scattered across the island.

“Okoto was changed, too. The skies became dark, and the island became unbalanced. After the cataclysm, the six Protectors found that the entire Capital City was gone, and so was Makuta. They found Ekimu lying in the crater, cast into an endless sleep. But, he whispered the Prophecy of Heroes to them, which eventually brought us here.”

“Makuta was here, and so was the Capital City. And I don’t remember any of the aftermath of the cataclysm. I only remember waking up in this place, in the streets of the Capital City. I tried to shepherd the villagers, but they were corrupted by the darkness, and I was forced to flee the city,” Agarak replied.

“I don’t know how this is possible,” Kopaka said. “I know for a fact that you survived the blast, but you say you’ve been here for thousands of years; that you were dragged in with the city.”

“Whoever you think survived the blast wasn’t me,” the Protector turned to him. “I’ve been in this place ever since the Festival of Masks, I have no recollection of the aftermath you speak of.”

There was silence between them.

“Anyway, if you need to get to the Capital City, I know the way,” he said finally.

Looking at each other, the six Toa nodded and turned back to the Protector.

“Lead the way,” Tahu said.

---

Despite his several previous attempts yielding him no fruit, the Protector of Water continued his assault on the cell door.

“Let us out!” he yelled, striking the door with his foot.

“Kivoda,” Korgot said from the adjacent cell. “That won’t work. If it did, Kulta and the Skull Basher would’ve broken out a long time ago.”

“We have to do something!” he turned to her. “Makuta has the four most powerful Masks on the island and the villagers are sitting ducks!”

“There’s nothing we can do right now,” Izotor replied. “These cells were built to last.”

“He’s right, though,” Nilkuu said. “Makuta’s most likely going to be after the villagers that escaped. And the ones still out there in the Regions.”

“Well, in our current situation, there is nothing we can do,” Narmoto looked at the floor of his cell. “Hopefully they can evacuate before he arrives.”

Vizuna stood up and walked over to his cell door. “In any case, I’m sick of being stuck in this prison. We’re getting out of here. Now.”

Suddenly a voice hissed from the shadows. “No. You won’t.”

Their heads shot in the direction of the voice and watched as the form of Umarak emerged from the darkness. His armor glowed orange as he surveyed the Protectors.

“Umarak the Hunter!” the Protector of Stone exclaimed.

“What has Makuta done to you?” the Protector of Earth asked, observing his form.

“He has set me free,” the Hunter replied. “I am no longer bound to this world and it’s desires. Only to the transcendent things.”

The Protector of Water frowned. “Let me guess; by ‘the transcendent things’, you mean Makuta and his desires.”

“Precisely.”

“Last I checked,” the Protector of Jungle said. “Makuta and his desires are of this world.”

“No longer,” he replied. “The winds of destiny have shifted.”

“What do you want, Umarak?” Narmoto demanded.

“I want you to tell me where the Creatures are,” Umarak replied. “I know you left them with the villagers you evacuated from the city, and I want to know where they are.”

“So you can drain them of their elemental power?” Izotor raised an eyebrow. “No, I don’t think we’ll do that.”

“You will!” he hissed.

“With the Toa and Ekimu gone, they’re our last hope on Okoto. We’re not going to give them up to you,” Vizuna looked the Hunter in the eyes.

Umarak stepped away from the bars. “I will make you tell me. One way or another.”

“Torture?” Kivoda asked.

“Something like that.”

“We won’t talk, no matter how much torture you bring,” Korgot stood up.

“Are you sure?” he smiled. “I can be quite persuasive.”

“No thanks,” Narmoto crossed his arms. “Now you can either get on with it, or you can leave.”

Suddenly the room got darker. “How about a little incentive?” a deep voice boomed.

The Protectors watched as the massive figure of Makuta emerged from the shadows. In one hand he held his staff, while in the other, he held Ekimu the Mask Maker by the neck.

“Ekimu!” the six rushed to the bars of their cells.

He looked at them, pain glinting in his eyes. Lifting him up, Makuta tossed the golden figure to the floor, where he clattered to a stop. Weakly, he pushed himself off the ground. Without his Mask of Creation – or his replacement, for that matter – most of his energy had been drained.

“Look at your leader,” the titan laughed. “Look at your messiah. He’s no stronger than you. He’s no more powerful that you. Look at him now.”

They looked at the fallen Mask Maker, who was barely strong enough to hold himself off the ground.

“Now,” Makuta smiled. “Look at your true god.”

“You’re no god,” Vizuna spat. “You’re a tyrant.”

“And he wasn’t?” he gestured to his brother. “You and your ancestors worshiped him. You prayed to him. And yet, he was no more despicable than I.”

“Ekimu is more noble than you in every way imaginable!” Kivoda protested. “You’re a monster!”

The Mask Maker looked sadly at his Protectors.

“That’s… not entirely true.”

Silence fell in the room. The elders were stunned. Seeing that his brother wasn’t jumping to explain, Makuta laughed.

“He admits it yet doesn’t care to elaborate. Typical.”

He still laid silent. Irritated, the titan struck him with his staff. The Mask Maker slammed to the ground. Makuta’s eyes blazed behind the Mask of Ultimate Power.

“Tell them, Ekimu! Tell them!”

Glaring at him, he sighed before pushing himself to his knees. Ekimu looked at the Protectors, who were looking back at him with confused gazes. He sighed again before opening his mouth.

“Back in the golden age of Okoto, Makuta and I had a law to never make Masks with the power of more than one element. It was a sacred pact between us,” he glanced at the titan before continuing.

“You know that Makuta broke this law and forged his dual-elemental Masks, which ultimately led to the birth of the Mask of Ultimate Power – the strongest Mask of all time.”

“Yes, and he did it because he was jealous of you,” Izotor replied.

“But do you know why he was jealous of me?” Ekimu asked.

“He was envious of your ability to craft Masks, and how the Islanders praised you for it,” Korgot answered.

The titan roared with laughter again. “Just like the stories you tell the children when you tuck them in at night! ‘Oh, how Makuta was so envious of his brother that he forged the Forbidden Mask!’”

“While that is true,” the Mask Maker took a deep breath. “I fear that I am guilty of the same charge.”

In unison, the six gasped in shock as they each took a step back in the cells.

“What?!” they said, eyes wide.

Ekimu sighed once again. “Yes. Makuta became envious of me… not just because the Okotans treasured my Masks, but because I had broken the sacred law before he had.”

“You mean...” Nilkuu began. “That you created a Mask with more than one element?”

He nodded. “Indeed. I tried to create Masks that were stronger than the plain ones, trying to give more power to my people, just as Makuta had done.”

“Did you succeed?” Izotor asked.

“Yes, I did. The Mask of Weather – a combination of Water, Air and Ice.”

“And…?” Makuta growled.

“...And the Mask of Light and Shadow.”

The Protectors were in shock. Everything they had believed about Ekimu and Makuta was tainted, corrupted. What was true and what was a falsity? What could they rely on?

Korgot was the first to speak. “How… how could you?”

“I was young and ambitious when I crafted them. I wanted to be known amongst Okoto as the greatest Mask Maker of all time. It was foolish. Childish, even,” Ekimu replied.

“What did you do with them?” Narmoto asked.

“At first, I kept them in my chamber. I wasn’t ready to reveal them to anyone. But, as time went on, I found that they were unstable. Unnatural storms brewed above the city; night and day were tinged with strange lights and strange darkness.

“I realized that it must be my Masks. My forbidden Masks. Therefore I destroyed them. Threw them into my furnace. They melted away, as if they had never been.”

He saw that the Protectors were hurt beyond measure, betrayed, and heart-broken. Thousands of years of belief had been torn down in a few moments. Everything they had been taught was untrue.

“There are no words to describe my regret,” the Mask Maker said. “If I could go back and change my decisions, I would. But, the damage has been done, and there’s no way I can expect you to forgive me.”

Silence hung before Makuta chuckled again.

“So there you have it,” he boomed, a look of glee splashed across the Mask of Ultimate Power. “Your god is no more than a liar, a cheater, and a hypocrite.”

The six were silent, looking at the ground. Ekimu did the same, tears running from his eyes.

“Now that that’s done, I’ll leave you alone to chat,” he said. Outstretching his hand, energy flashed around his brother before he flew into an open cell, the door closing as he landed.

Laughing madly, a portal opened in midair, the titan walking through it. Umarak following, a smug look on his face before he disappeared as well. The portal swirled for a moment before ceasing as well.

Silence fell again.

---

The being who claimed to be Agarak, ancient Protector of Jungle, had led the Toa to a staircase hidden in the side of the island that the Capital City rested on. With their elemental abilities restored, Tahu had created a ball of fire to light their way through the dark as they ascended.

“Do you know what’s up there, Agarak?” Gali inquired.

“Villagers, Skull Warriors, the Shadow Horde,” he answered, climbing over a broken step.

“How are there Skull Warriors in the Shadow Realm?” Kopaka asked. “I mean, they were Skull Raiders in our world, right?”

“I don’t know where they came from,” the Protector replied. “All I know is that when Makuta discovered a storeroom of elemental crystals, he began to use the Skull Warriors as test subjects for his new army.”

“The Shadow Horde?” Onua said.

He nodded. “Yes. The crystals mutated them into those… things. Then Makuta created Masks for them that rendered them under his control.”

“A whole army for him to control,” Tahu looked up.

“And that probably means he took them to Okoto,” Pohatu said grimly.

Lewa sighed. “Yet another reason to get back to the other side and out of this Mata Nui forsaken place.”

“Hey,” Agarak looked back at the Toa. “When you go back to Okoto, can I come with you?”

Stopping, the six looked at each other uneasily. Since they weren’t sure exactly what this being was, or how he came into existence, they didn’t know if they should bring him back to the island, or if they could at all. Would it be the right thing to do?

“We’ll discuss it when we get out of this mess,” Tahu replied.

“Not like we have a choice,” Lewa said. “We’re here.”

Reaching the top of the stairs, they came out at the very outskirts of the Capital City. Crawling from the small opening in the ground, the seven looked up at the looming city before them. From what they could tell, it was massive; it was easily twice the size of the City of the Mask Makers.

But, like the rest of this dimension, it was shrouded in darkness, with purple highlights flowing through every structure. Above, the tops of the tallest buildings had broken off and were floating in midair, suspended by an unseen force.

“It’s glorious,” Gali awed.

“Yeah, except for the fact that it’s literally the most ominous thing I’ve ever seen,” Kopaka groaned.

Tahu turned to his teammates. “We need to get to Makuta’s lair. Maybe we can open our own portal.”

Agarak smiled. “Good thing I know where that is, then.”

Without another world, the Protector of Jungle rushed off towards the city. The Toa, looking at each other, rushed off after him.

They followed him into one of the alleyways leading into the Capital City. Their armor and weapons clanked softly as they made their way through. Passing through streets, they saw the shadow villagers wandering aimlessly through, barely taking notice of them. Their dead eyes were fixed directly ahead, marching onwards forever.

Making their way deeper into the city, they had to be more cautious. Coming to a halt at the opening of another street, Agarak signaled for them to hide. Taking as much cover as they could, they watched as a squad of three, each of the three variations, Elemental Beasts marched through the street ahead.

Once they had passed, the Protector signaled for them to keep going. They rushed from their hiding spot and crossed the street to the next alleyway. Coming again to a halt, they looked out into the next street.

They watched as several dark villagers wandered aimlessly through the street. Shuffling their feet, they merely stared at the ground with their dead eyes. It was depressing to see so many doomed to wander the darkness for eternity.

All of a sudden, the villagers stopped in their tracks, and slowly turned towards them, their eyes fixed. The seven gasped and began to back up. Turning around, they were met with six Elemental Beasts, two of each type. They growled as they brandished their weapons, acid green eyes blazing.

“We seem to have a bit of a problem here,” Lewa said, readying his blades.

“No matter,” Tahu replied. “We’ve destroyed dozens of these guys on Okoto, and I doubt they’ll be able to reconstitute here.”

“Although I imagine they’re a lot more solid here,” Onua remarked.

Pohatu smiled. “Solid is my whole world.”

Swinging his blade forward, the Toa of Stone struck one of the Quake Beasts. As theorized, it did not shatter it like the ones that had crossed over to Okoto. Instead, it stumbled backwards at the blow, crying in pain. The others roared at them, glowing with energy.

“This is gonna be fun,” Lewa chuckled, his swords glowing with raw elemental energy, radiating through the dark.

“Lewa, when we get back to the island,” Kopaka said, readying his weapons. “We’re going to have to have a serious discussion about your idea of fun.”

“Fight now, talk later,” Gali demanded.

“Great idea,” Lewa nodded.

The beasts roared as they stepped into the alleyway. Readying their weapons, the six Toa charged at the members of the Shadow Horde.

---

Axato turned as Skull Basher approached him in the alleyway in the City of the Mask Makers.

Somewhat reluctantly, the former bowed. “What is it, my leader?”

“Makuta wants us to secure the Regions,” the Skull Basher replied. “I need you to organize our forces.”

“With all due respect, Skull Basher,” Axato began. “Why are we serving Makuta? He and Ekimu drove us into those caves when we invaded this land.”

“Do not question my authority,” the titan warned, his voice deepening. “I will not accept any insubordination. Makuta is our savior, and we will gladly serve him.”

“But why? What has he ever done for us-?”

He was cut off as Skull Basher brought up one of his ax blades and using it to slam the warrior against the wall by the throat. The Skull Raider gagged as it pressed against his spine.

“You will do what I command, Axato. I know you were a close ally of Kulta, but personally, I have never respected you. But now, I am in command, and you will obey me.”

Glaring into his eyes, he nodded. “Yes, my leader.”

Looking at him for moment, Skull Basher let him go, Axato falling forward slightly, rubbing his throat. The titan grunted, before walking away, leaving his subordinate staring after him.

Walking out from the alleyway, he pondered what had happened. Why were they serving that tyrant? He was responsible for their eternal entrapment in those caves. And, from what he had heard, Makuta had killed Kulta and given the leadership over to Skull Basher. Why were they now praising him as a savior?

Looking up from the ground, he saw the Mask Maker’s Forge burning brightly in the night. Gripping his weapons, he strode towards the forge. As he did, he passed several Elemental Beasts, Skull Warriors and corrupted villagers. They took no notice of him, going about their business. Not that that was a problem. Where he was going, he would need to not be noticed.

Coming to the foot of the steps, he glared at the looming structure. He was going to confront Makuta for the death of his leader.

Taking a deep breath, he began to ascend the stairs. He reached the door, and with confidence, stepped inside.

The entry was cast in a purple glow as unnaturally colored torches flickered on the walls. The atmosphere was foreboding, almost barring him from entering. Several Skull Warriors stood sentry around the room, staring ahead. Despite this, he pressed on. He approached the spiral staircase which led up to the actual forge.

As he did, one of the Skull Warriors turned and looked at him, but resumed staring ahead. He supposed they viewed him as a superior, and didn’t see him as a threat. Yet, anyway.

Climbing the spiral staircase, his footsteps echoed his ascent. His grip on his twin Guillotine Blasters tightened as he arrived on the second floor. The forge was lit, flickering with the same purple light as the torches downstairs. Various Masks of Power, both forged by Ekimu and Makuta, were mounted to the walls. He noticed that the Protector Masks were among them.

Across the room stood a massive figure, shrouded in darkness and staring at the wall. His giant shadow flickered in front of him, causing his form to appear to shimmer. Slowly, the being turned around, his red eyes blazing.

“I’ve been expecting you, Axato.”

The Skull Raider cut to the chase. “I want answers, Makuta. Answers about our involvement in your army.”

Walking towards the warrior, a smile spread across the Mask of Ultimate Power.

“Alright,” he said. “What do you want to know?”

Behind the titan’s back, he readied his three-pronged staff, the blades beginning to glow.

Chapter 7: The Way Back Home

Tahu skidded to a halt on the street after the beasts blasted him backwards. Looking up, he saw a Lava Beast charging for him. Raising his blades, he blocked the beast as it brought its clawed down on him. Activating his blades, he cut the beast’s arm clean off. It roared in rage before he slashed through its torso, killing it.

“Good to know that these things are completely indestructible!” he yelled to his fellow Toa.

“They’re still a handful, though!” Lewa called back, stabbing a Storm Beast in the mouth.

The six continued to fight off the converging forces. Elemental energy streaked in every direction, illuminating the dark corners of the Capital City. The beasts were far more ferocious in this realm than on Okoto, and much more difficult to beat.

Down the street, over a dozen more Elemental Beasts were coming towards them. As she knocked down a Quake Beast, Gali turned to see the approaching threat.

“We’ve got more incoming!” she said, charging up her spear.

“Then we’ll give them everything we’ve got!” Tahu yelled.

Onua shook his head. “We don’t have time for this. We have to get to Makuta’s portal!”

“He’s right,” Pohatu nodded. “We’ve got to go. Now.”

Looking at the approaching threat and then back at his comrades, the Toa of Fire nodded.

“Alright. To Makuta’s portal!” he yelled as they retreated down the street.

Behind them, the dozen Elemental Beasts roared their rage before they ran after them. As they charged, the Toa looked back over their shoulders at the approaching horde.

“Ain’t this fun?” Lewa quipped.

“Lewa, this is not the time for quipping,” Kopaka groaned.

“This is totally the time for quipping,” the Toa of Jungle chuckled.

Pohatu rolled his eyes. “Just keep moving!”

And so they ran faster.

---

“What do we do, Ekimu?” Nilkuu asked, leaning against the bars. “How do we get out?”

The Mask Maker stared at the ground. “You mean, ‘how do you get out’.”

“We’re all getting out, Ekimu,” Korgot said. “We’re not leaving you behind.”

“You should. Especially since you know who I am and what I’ve done. And no,” he added as he saw Vizuna open his mouth. “Do not give me the stories of how I’ve helped Okoto, or how I’m the greatest Mask Maker to ever walk the island.”

“But you have,” Izotor said. “You’ve done so much for the Okotans.”

He sighed. “I am just as deceitful as my brother. You curse him for creating the Mask of Ultimate Power even though I’m the one who did it first. That is an injustice, my Protectors. One that I intend to pay for.”

Kivoda shook his head. “Makuta has only done us harm.”

“Then you are hypocrites.”

“You’ve guided us through the dark,” Narmoto said. “That mad titan is the one who cast us into the shadows.”

“Only because I let him,” Ekimu retorted. “No matter how you phrase it, or paint me up, you’ll never hide the fact that the light is only brightest when it’s in the dark.”

The Protector of Jungle stroked his chin. “So how do we get out of here?”

“Well, we’re certainly not bashing our way out,” the Protector of Water replied. “I tested that theory myself.”

“These cells were designed to hold titans like Skull Grinder and Skull Basher. If they didn’t get out, we’re definitely not.”

“But there has to be a way,” Narmoto turned to Ekimu. “Is there a secret way to get out?”

“No. These are the strongest cells in all of Okoto. There’s not way out,” the Mask Maker replied glumly.

“Please, Ekimu,” Korgot said. “We forgive you. We don’t care what you’ve done. All we care about is getting out and protecting our people.”

“There is no escape,” Ekimu said darkly.

---

“I want to know why you killed Kulta,” Axato said. “I want to know how you manipulated Skull Basher into taking command of your army.”

“It is true I killed Kulta,” Makuta nodded. “But it was merely in self-defense. You see, he attacked me after I let him out of prison.”

“Why would he attack you?”

He shrugged. “I wouldn’t know. I figure being separated from his Mask of Power for so long damaged his mind.”

“But why is Skull Basher your lieutenant now? Wouldn’t he have done the same?”

“Perhaps he had come to his senses, and saw my power, and didn’t want to share a fate with his commander.”

“Well,” Axato looked down. “I’m not going to follow you.”

The Mask Hoarder raised an eyebrow. “Oh really?”

“Yes,” he said. “Not only did you kill Kulta, my friend, but you helped your brother put us into those caves all those years ago.”

Before he could stop himself, the titan let out a thundering laugh. “My brother did that. You can’t possibly be serious? Well, I suppose you are just another trooper.”

“I’m no trooper,” he said, breathing heavily. “I’m a warrior.”

Roaring with rage, Axato thrust his arms forward. His twin Guillotine Blasters blazed into life, firing rays of pure energy towards the Mask Hoarder. The suddenness had taken Makuta by surprised, his body taking the full force of the attack. He stumbled backwards towards the burning forge.

However, he quickly overcame his temporary imbalance and swung around, raising his staff. The three prongs glowed brightly as they began to spin rapidly. A split second later, a beam of raw, roaring power was unleashed from the blades, the room shaking as it traveled through the air. The warrior flipped out of the way before firing another barrage of attacks at the titan.

Once more, Makuta was caught in the blasts, using his left arm to block the attack. A moment later he thrust his pronged weapon forward, another beam of elemental energy trailing from the prongs. Eyes glowing, Axato brought up his blades, forming a shield just as the blast hit. He skidded backwards as he was pushed by the raw force of the power.

The titan smiled before he saw that Axato’s weapons were beginning to glow brighter than even the energy striking them itself. Pulling his staff away, he watched as the warrior seemingly struggled to hold onto his supercharged weapons. A grin appeared behind his Skull Mask before he forcefully pulled his weapons apart.

Makuta was knocked completely off his feet as a massive shockwave rippled from Axato. The tremor knocked everything in the room over and sent cracks cascading through the floor, walls, and ceiling. Masks of Power, including the Masks the Protectors wore, the Masks of Creation and Control, and the legendary Mask of Time, clattered to the ground.

The titan was the last to hit the floor. When he did, the floor shook again. Several cracks spread around him before the floor gave way. He fell through to the level below, crashing through the floor again into the dungeons.

Axato looked down before seeing several Skull Warriors and Elemental Beasts looking up at him. They roared before jumping up towards him through the hole.

---

None of them had expected the powerful tremor that had rocked their cages. None of them had also expected the form of Makuta the Mask Hoarder to fall through the ceiling into the dungeons. And yet, here he lay, dust billowing up like fog in the room. Getting to their feet, the Protectors noticed that something was very different about their confinement.

When he landed, Makuta had smashed the front of Korgot, Nilkuu and Izotor’s cells. This had ripped their doors clean off, presenting them with a way out.

“Huh,” Kivoda put his hands on his hips as he watched his comrades climb out. “I guess destiny does exist.”

“Hurry up,” Vizuna said. “We probably don’t have a lot of time until we get some company.”

Walking over to one of the walls of the room, which had their weapons mounted to it, Korgot pulled down her Star Drill and came over to the Protector of Fire’s cage. Swinging the weapon down down, she cut clean through the padlock.

After she had done this to all of them, they stepped out of their prisons. All except for Ekimu, who continued to sit on the floor against the wall.

“Come on, Ekimu,” Narmoto urged. “We don’t much time.”

“Then go,” he replied. “You don’t need me.”

“But we do,” Izotor said. “We can’t win without you.”

“No.”

On the ground, Makuta stirred slightly.

“Please!” Korgot’s voice became desperate. “We need you!”

“You’ve put too much faith in me. Of course, it’s not your fault. Your ancestors revered me as a saint, and they taught you to do the same. You don’t know anything else,” he looked up at them. “It’s time for you to find your own path.”

The titan stirred again, and the Protectors cast nervous glances at each other.

“Go! Now!” the Mask Maker snapped, pointing towards the spiral stairwell.

The Protector of Fire sighed. “We’ll come back for you.”

“Don’t bother,” he said, standing up and approaching them. “Just get yourselves, and the legendary Masks of Power, as far from Makuta as you can.”

The two stared off from a moment, before Narmoto nodded.

“Alright.”

Looking at the Okotan they had looked up to and admired for centuries one last time, the six Protectors of Okoto turned and walked over to the wall where their tools were mounted. Reclaiming them, they nodded to each other before ascending the spiral staircase.

---

As they came up, they found that it was complete chaos. Looking around the carnage, they saw a lone Skull Raider taking on roughly a dozen Skull Warriors and Elemental Beasts. Blasts of energy whizzed to and fro, singeing the walls and floors.

Seeing that the guards were distracted, they made their way to upper level, where Ekimu’s Forge burned darkly. Everything had been knocked to the ground, most likely as a result of the tremor they had experienced before Makuta came crashing through the ceiling of the dungeon.

They spotted their six Elemental Masks of Power on the floor on the far side of the room, glittering in the flickering purple light. Running over to them, they quickly retrieved them and reattached them to their faces. Each felt a surge of power as they did so. They felt as if a part of themselves that had been lost was now returned.

A few feet away lay the Mask of Creation, Mask of Control, and the legendary Mask of Time.

“Quick!” Narmoto directed. “The Masks.”

Wasting no time, Kivoda seized the Mask of Creation, Korgot seized the Mask of Control, and Izotor took the Vahi.

He clapped his hands together. “Let’s get out of here.”

Rushing back towards the stairs, they quickly descended. As they did, a Skull Warrior saw them and turned to aim its weapon at them. Energy crackled at the tip of its bow. The Protectors were too fast, however, and Nilkuu and Vizuna unleashed twin blasts of energy on it, blasting it to pieces.

But this caught the attention of several of the other Skull Warriors and Elemental Beasts. As one, they turned on them, their forms glowing sickly.

“That did not go as planned,” the Protector of Stone remarked.

“Not at all,” the Protector of Jungle replied.

Raising their weapons, they readied to defend themselves against Makuta’s forces. The beasts roared when suddenly they were struck from behind by a barrage of energy blasts. Together they crashed to the floor, dead.

Looking at their apparent savior, they saw the Skull Raider standing them, he blasters glowing red. His eyes flashed as he observed the six Protectors. He then observed the three legendary Masks of Power they were carrying.

“Where do you think you’re going with those?” he growled.

Narmoto stepped forward. “We have no quarrel with you, Skull Raider.”

“But I have a quarrel with you,” he replied. “Your ancestors helped drive us into those caves thousands of years ago.”

“We are sorry about that,” the Protector nodded. “I cannot speak for the past, but I can speak for the future.”

“So can I,” he grinned. “And I know you’re not in it.”

He charged his weapons again, and the Protectors did the same. The warrior was about to unleash his power when he was suddenly struck in the head by a glowing object. It knocked his Mask off as he fell to the floor, rendering him completely unconscious.

The weapon that had struck him clattered to the ground, and they saw that it was Ekimu’s Hammer of Power. Looking towards the staircase, they saw the Mask Maker standing there, looking at them.

“Ekimu!” Kivoda exclaimed.

“I thought you wanted us to leave you behind?” Vizuna cocked his head.

He nodded. “I did. But then I realized a way that we can get the Toa back.”

Their eyes widened as he said this. “What?” they said in unison.

“I’ll explain later,” he replied. “But right now we have to get out of here. Give me my Mask,” he said to the Protector of Water.

Kivoda quickly handed the Mask of Creation to the Mask Maker. Raising it to his face, there was a flash of light and surge of energy. The runes on the Mask glittered in the purple light.

“Much better,” Ekimu said.

He looked at the Protectors.

“Come on. We have to move.”

---

They continued across the Capital City, never stopping. Of course, this had begun to take its toll on the seven, particularly the Protector of Jungle.

“How much… farther...” Tahu panted as they ran. “Until… we get to… Makuta’s tower?”

“Not… long...” Agarak gasped.

A moment later, they came into an abandoned district of the city. Realizing that their legs would give out if they kept on like this, they decided to rest here for a few minutes. Collapsing on the ground or against walls, they caught their breath.

“Well...” Gali said. “That was fun.”

“Yeah,” Lewa slid down to the floor. “Let’s not do it again.”

“The Elemental Beasts are definitely more aggressive here,” Kopaka remarked.

“I suppose they’re in their element here,” Onua replied. “And these are their actual bodies, as opposed to the ones we fought on Okoto.”

“Which means getting into Makuta’s tower is going to be quite difficult,” Pohatu crossed his arms. “Because they’ll be guarding that the most.”

“Then we’ll need our all energy to break through,” Tahu said. “We need to get in there so we can return to Okoto.”

“Agreed,” the other Toa resounded.

Agarak got to his feet. “Then let’s get moving again. We don’t want to be here for long.”

Regathering themselves, the seven crept out of their hiding place, and continued their journey through the Capital City. In the distance, they heard the roars and grunts of the Elemental Beasts, obviously still searching for them.

“How did those things know we were coming?” the Toa of Ice inquired.

“They are attracted to light, like insects to a flame,” Agarak replied. “And you six come from a realm of light. You’re bathed in that light energy. You are, quite literally, lights in the dark.”

“Great,” he muttered.

“We just have to get to the tower,” the Toa of Fire said. “Once we get there, we can return to Okoto and leave this forsaken place behind.”

Journeying out, they continued their trek across the Capital City. Down streets, they caught glimpses of Elemental Beasts, corrupted villagers, and what appeared to be Skull Warriors controlled by Skull Spiders.

“Where did the Skull Spiders come from?” Kopaka asked.

Agarak merely shrugged. “They serve at Makuta’s will. That’s all I know.”

“I’ve been wondering,” the Toa of Sotne began. “If Makuta had all this elemental power, why didn’t he just make another Mask of Ultimate Power?”

“He couldn’t. He didn’t have the resources in the City of the Mask Makers. Plus the dark energy of this realm kept interfering with his attempts. Only the pure forms of the elements can open the rift.”

“So the Forbidden Mask could do that?” Gali inquired.

“Yes,” Agarak nodded. “And you six.”

The Toa stopped. “We can open the rift?” Kopaka gasped.

“Of course you can!” the Protector said. “I thought that would be obvious! What were you expecting to find in Makuta’s tower?”

“We just thought-,” the Toa of Ice began when he was cut off by the sound of laughter.

Looking around, they saw two figures emerging from the darkness. As they approached, they recognized the figures.

“Hello again,” Dream Snatcher’s eyes flashed.

“Did you miss us?” Demon Warrior chuckled.

“You!” Tahu ignited his swords.

“Yes, us,” the jailor replied. “Glad you were able to deduce that so easily.”

“What do you want?” Lewa pointed one of his blades at them.

“I don’t care who you think you are, or what duty you have to fulfill,” Dream Snatcher said. “You’re our prisoners, and you’re coming back to the Pit.”

The Toa of Fire stepped forward. “You’re going to have to make us. There’s no way we’re going back there.”

He sighed. “I figured you’d say that.”

At once, a dozen of those cobra-like creatures emerged from the darkness outlining the circle they stood in, their forms glowing with orange energy. Together, they surrounded the Toa, pointing their spears at the group. They in turn leveled their weapons at them as they circled the heroes. Agarak pulled out a small sword from his pack.

“How can you control these things?” Gali exclaimed, her spear igniting in the dark.

“We share a common enemy,” his eyes flashed. “Of course, they are going to want compensation for their troubles.”

Pohatu raised an eyebrow. “Compensation?”

“Yes. I’m going to have to give three of you over to them to be… drained. And your little Okotan friend there is just a bonus.”

“No,” Tahu said firmly. “We’re getting out of here, and there’s nothing you can do.”

Their opponents let out loud chuckles. “How naive can you six get? You’re not on Okoto anymore. Face it: light doesn’t win. Darkness does.”

The creatures seemed to like this remark, roaring loudly at it. They inched closer to the seven, apparently ready to drain them of their life force.

“As long as there is light, we will win,” Onua gripped his hammer.

“That’s why I’m here, Toa,” Dream Snatcher’s eyes glinted. “To put the light out.”

---

“Quickly!” the Mask Maker urged again as they entered the chamber.

They had always thought of this particularly chamber as some kind of storage room. It was above the forge and just below the roof. Several crates, ancient objects and old Masks of Power were strewn around it, most of them having been untouched since the Golden Age of the Mask Makers.

As they crossed it, they saw that Ekimu was heading towards the opposite wall, where a familiar portrait was carved into the stone. It was the same carving that had been present on the tomb of Ekimu. Why was it here?

“Ekimu, where are we going?” Nilkuu inquired.

“When the City of the Mask Makers was founded thousands of years ago by the Mask Maker before me,” the elder said as they arrived at the carving. “They built this forge on top of the Temple of Light; one of the temples dedicated to the Elemental Creatures. But also a temple to the Toa.

“Now, these temples were erected along with the Temple of Time,” he waved his hand in front of the carving. At once, it split down the middle and slid away, revealing that it had in fact been a doorway. As they parted, the six Protectors were blinded by an intense glow coming from between the doors.

Eventually, their eyes adjusted to the intense light, and they saw the inside of the chamber. The walls were lined with beautiful light blue crystals, which were giving off a pure-white light.

“Are those…?” Korgot trailed off.

“Yes,” Ekimu nodded. “Elemental Light crystals.”

“Why don’t you use these in the creation of your Masks?” Izotor asked.

“These crystals are more sacred than the others. They can only be used to very special Masks,” he replied. “My Mask of Creation used one of these.”

Below, they heard the growls of Elemental Beasts and corrupted villagers.

“But now is not the time for a history lesson,” he turned towards the chamber, holding the Mask of Time in his hands. “Right now, it’s time to get out of here.”

“And how are we going to do that?” Vizuna asked.

“If my theory is correct,” Ekimu said, slowly approaching the light. “I’m hoping that holding the Mask of Time inside another temple will generate enough energy open a portal to the Temple of Time.”

“That’s insane,” Kivoda remarked.

“The nine great temples of Okoto are linked, and was done so by the Elemental Creatures. They can transport themselves back and forth between them. While we ourselves don’t possess this power, I’m hoping the Mask of Time can,” he explained. “Now, if this works...”

He crossed over the threshold, his body covered in pure light. The Vahi gleamed in the glow, shining like the moon. For a moment, nothing happened, when suddenly energy began to spark in the chamber. Looking back at the Protectors, Ekimu’s tone became urgent.

“Come! Join me! We only have one shot at this!”

As one, the six joined the Mask Maker in the bright chamber. Energy flickered around them when suddenly their was a burst of light, and they saw nothing but white all around them. It was as if they were caught in a snowstorm; they could barely see their own hands.

A second later they were in the Temple of Time. The Vahi was glowing brightly before the light faded. They looked around, amazed.

“Yes!” Ekimu exclaimed. “It worked!”

“It really worked,” Narmoto muttered in disbelief.

“Alright,” the Mask Maker said. “We don’t have much time until Makuta awakens and finds us. We need to move quickly.”

“What are we doing?” Nilkuu cocked his head.

“My second theory is that we can use the Mask of Time to summon the Toa back to Okoto from the Shadow Realm,” Ekimu said.

“Is that even possible?” Izotor replied.

“When Makuta reforged the Mask of Ultimate Power, he massively unbalanced Okoto’s energy. I believe that the energy is offset enough for us to preform the Prophecy of Heroes again.”

The six looked at each other, uncertainty flooding their gazes. The Mask Maker saw this and nodded.

“I know. It’s a large gamble,” he said. “But we have to take it. We don’t have many other options. The Toa won’t survive the Shadow Realm.”

Narmoto looked at him. “Alright. Let’s do it.”

Together, they ascended the six flights of stairs to the platform in the middle of the Temple. Ekimu walked to the center of it and placed the Mask of Time on the glass orb in the floor. Walking over to the side, he nodded to the Protectors. They returned it and exchanged nods with each other.

Outstretching their hands, which then flickered with raw elemental energy. A moment later beams of colorful light shot from them and struck the Mask. It glowed with light as energy swirled in the glass orb below it. They then spoke in unison.

“When times are dark and all hope seems lost, the Protectors must unite, one from each tribe. Evoke the power of past and future, and look to the skies for an answer. When the stars align, six comets will bring timeless heroes to the claim the Masks of Power and find the Mask Maker.

United, the elements hold the power to defeat evil. United, but not one.”

The energy swirling in the glass orb intensified, glowing brighter than the sun. Ekimu shielded his eyes as the light spun faster than a tornado. A second later the Mask of Time exploded with energy, a massive beam of pure, raw power blasting from it in the sky. The dark clouds that had been hanging over the night sky were vaporized, the light revealing the glorious heavens above.

Inside the temple, everything was flooded with white.

---

“Face it, Toa,” Dream Snatcher said. “You’re not going to escape the Shadow Realm.”

The creatures slithered around them still, their spears at the ready. In the distance, the sounds of the approaching horde of beasts got closer. Time was running out.

“We’re not surrendering,” Tahu replied, anger in his voice. “We are the Toa!”

“I don’t care who you are,” he shook his head. “To me, you are prisoners of the Pit. And prisoners of the Pit you shall remain.”

Raising their weapons, the creatures seemed ready to throw them at the Toa. They flickered faintly with energy once more. The six ignited their blades.

A moment later, however, something changed. Light began flickering around the group, before their bodies did the same. They each began glowing their respective colors, like a flame had been lit inside them. They looked around in confusion, and so did their opponents. Agarak, who was in the midst of the Toa, looked on in awe.

Then, their forms began to shimmer, like they were blurring out of existence. The creatures, not wanting their prey to get away, threw their weapons at the shifting bodies of the Toa. But, they passed straight through the group, and instead struck the creatures on the other side, and vice-versa. They roared in pain as they drained the energy out of each other.

Dream Snatcher was about to raise his staff when there was a blinding blast of light. He cried in agony at the intensity of the light. A second later it was gone, and looking around he saw that the Toa were too.

---

High above the island of Okoto, all was quiet when a ball of swirling color suddenly burst into existence. It glowed brightly, like a star in the night. It sat there for a few moments, shimmering with raw power.

Then, it exploded. Six streaks, each a different color, fell from where the orb had been. They descended towards the island below. They fell, like they had several months prior, when the Toa had first arrived.

And they were coming again.

Book II: Duty

Chapter 8: The Return

“Did it work?” Nilkuu blinked as the glare faded.

Ekimu strode over to the Mask of Time, which had been glowing brightly a moment ago, and picked it up. It had gone cold, but still appeared more vibrant than it had before. He turned back towards the Protectors.

“I think it has,” he replied.

“So,” Kivoda said. “What do we do now?”

“We have to get the Mask of Time to safety,” Ekimu looked at the Vahi. “And ourselves.”

“And we have to ensure the safety of the villagers we evacuated from the City,” Vizuna added. “We have to find them.”

“Indeed,” the Mask Maker nodded. “We must get moving.”

Leaving the Temple of Time behind, they came out into the field surrounding the structure. They were bathed in the blue glow as they looked up to the stars that the beam of energy had revealed from behind the dark clouds.

Korgot awed. “I thought I’d never be able to see the stars again.”

They were going to keep moving when something flickering the night sky caught their attention. It was like a star that had suddenly appeared from nowhere, burning brightly. Then, as quickly as it appeared, it exploded in a brilliant flash of light. It was as bright as the sun, forcing them to cover their eyes. Looking back towards the orb, they saw that it was gone, and six streaks of color were falling towards them instead.

“Mata Nui,” Kivoda muttered.

“The Toa!” Nilkuu pointed to the sky, his eyes glowing brightly. “They return!”

---

The titan pushed himself off the stone floor. His head swam as he looked around the dungeon. His vision blurred in and out of focus. As his ears stopped ringing, he saw that something was very wrong.

“No...” he muttered as he saw that Ekimu and the six Protectors were gone. “No. No. NO!”

Swinging his staff, he blasted apart the remaining cells in the room, making them nothing but pieces of scrap metal. Pure rage was boiling inside of him. Thrusting his hand forward, a blast of fire shot forward and consumed the broken bars. They melted away, covering the floor with molten metal.

As he exhausted his rage, a figure came down the stairs. Turning, he saw that Skull Basher had returned.

“My lord,” he said. “What happened? We found Axato knocked out upstairs surrounded by Skull Warriors.”

“He turned on me,” Makuta growled. “That rat! He wanted command of my army. He wanted to take control. But I must… I will… control.”

His subordinate noticed the cells. “Where are the Protectors and the Mask Maker?”

“Gone. Axato caused me to fall on the cells,” he replied when he had a look of realization. “The Masks. The legendary Masks!”

Rushing upstairs, past Axato, who was being restrained by several Elemental Beasts and Skull Warriors, Makuta and Skull Basher ascended to the Mask Maker’s forge. The two walked around the hole in the floor to the far wall. Arriving, the Skull Raider’s eyes widened as his master’s lit with rage.

“EKIMU!” he roared. “I will find you… and I’ll do what I was unable to do all those years ago… I will destroy you!”

Turning on his heel, he walked back towards the stairs, followed by his lieutenant, descending back down to the main level. Axato, who was now conscious, looked up at the titan as he approached. The Skull Raider’s eyes flickered with anger and disgust. The Mask Hoarder’s did the same.

“Do you know what you’ve done?” Makuta asked, hiding his rage.

“Stood up to a tyrant?”

“No,” he replied. “You have set Ekimu and the Protectors free.”

“That was… not my plan,” Axato said.

“Well, that’s what happened. And they stole the most valuable Masks of Power on Okoto,” he twirled his staff. “And now you will pay for your transgression.”

He raised his weapon, ready to strike. The Skull Raider looked at the ground and closed his eyes. Energy flickered in the prongs of the Mask Hoarder’s staff of power. The titan was about to bring it down when Skull Basher noticed something flickering in the sky outside the windows of the forge.

“Makuta! Wait!” he exclaimed, pointing at the sky. “What’s that?”

Lowering his weapon, he walked over to join his lieutenant. Looking out the window, his eyes widened as he saw six colorful comets falling towards the island from the starry sky above.

“No… it can’t…” the titan muttered.

“What is it, Makuta?” Skull Basher asked.

“Ekimu… he’s used the Mask of Time to summon the Toa back to Okoto from the Shadow Realm.”

“Is that even possible?” his lieutenant gasped.

“Obviously, it is.”

The Mask Hoarder turned back towards Axato, who looked as surprised as the shadow titan.

“Do you see the extent of your mistakes?” he growled. “You have allowed my brother and his followers to escape with the Vahi, which they have now used to summon the Toa once again.”

“That was never my intention,” the Skull Raider replied.

“It does not matter what you intended. That is what your actions have caused.”

Walking away, he raised his hand at the wall. His fingers flickered as the Mask of Ultimate Power glowed with energy. Suddenly a portal appeared on the wall, looking out on a grassy field. Walking forward, he was flanked by two Elemental Beasts. They walked through the rift, emerging on the other side.

The Temple of Time glowed brightly to their right, the massive pendulum swinging back and forth, creating a rhythmic ticking as it swung. Makuta’s blazing eyes scanned the area before looking up to the starry sky. The six comets were still burning in the sky, getting closer to the island.

Across the field, he saw something move. Turning attention to it, he saw the glints of several different colors, and he knew who it had to be.

“Ekimu!” he roared, his voice echoing through the night.

The figures stopped in their tracks, turning around to face the titan. His red eyes met the cool blue eyes of his brother. The two stared off, glaring through their legendary Masks of Power. Then, without warning, the Mask Maker broke the gaze and ran into the jungle, the six Protectors following in his wake.

Raising his staff, a beam of pure energy blasted from between the three prongs. It flew through the air at the group, but they were too fast for it and it instead crashed into a large tree, shattering it into a million pieces. The seven disappeared into the darkness, and Makuta outstretched his hand after them.

“Hunt them down!” he growled to the beasts. “Spare Ekimu and kill the rest!”

Charging forward, the two Elemental Beasts followed the group, crossing the field and into the darkness themselves.

Makuta looked back up at the sky, the comets coming closer…

---

The ground shook as the six comets crashed onto the island of Okoto. One landed in each region, a blast of energy erupting with every strike. Their craters burned brightly in the night, like beacons in the dark.

For several moments, they stood dormant. Then, something began to stir within them. Slowly, a figure emerged from each of the flaming craters. They looked around, obviously confused as to where they were.

As they walked from the glare of their burning craters, their armor glistened in the light. Looking up at the night sky, they knew where they were.

The Toa had returned.

---

She shot up. “Bingzak! Did you feel that?”

He pushed himself off the ground, rubbing his eyes. “Feel what?”

“That tremor...” Harvali looked at the sky, which was no longer dark and cloudy but filled with stars. “It couldn’t be...”

“What?” he asked, obviously confused.

Harvali turned towards him. “The Toa have returned.”

Bingzak gasped loudly. Around them, most of the villagers had been awoken by the tremor or by their chatter.

“What’s going on?” Jaller asked.

“The Toa are back,” Harvali answered.

Like the young villager form the Region of Jungle, the collective gasped. They looked towards the sky, and saw the fading trails of energy left by the comets. Outside the group, the six Elemental Creatures sat facing the direction of the comets. They looked anxious.

“Do you know where the Toa landed?” she asked.

They turned to her and nodded. Her eyes lit up.

“Can... you lead us there?” the archeologist inquired.

They nodded again. She turned to the group of Okotans.

“We have to find the Toa,” she said.

“I thought we were going to the Labyrinth of Control?” a female from the Region of Stone asked.

“That was when the Toa were gone,” Harvali answered. “But now they’ve returned, and we have no reason to run any longer. My friends, we have destiny on our side once more.”

“Do you think it’s safe to journey back?” another villager asked. “Makuta’s monsters are still out there.”

She shook her head. “I don’t know if it’s safe, but it’s our duty to help the Toa.”

Bingzak nodded. “I’ll go with you.”

“And me,” Jaller said.

“Me too,” Takua stood up.

“Count me in,” an Okotan from the Region of Stone stood up.

“What’s your name?” Harvali asked.

“Hewkii,” he replied.

She nodded. “Thank you, brother. Your help will be most appreciated.”

“Hence why I’m giving it,” Hewkii nodded.

The archeologist looked around the collective. “Anyone else want to join us?”

There was the rumble of noise as the villagers looked at each other. None of them seemed particularly keen to step up, for obvious reasons. As Harvali saw this, her shoulders drooped in disappointment. Turning away, she looked towards the glowing stacks of smoke ascending into the starry sky.

“I’ll come,” said a voice behind her.

Turning around, she saw a villager, from the Region of Earth, raising her hand. A smile broke across Harvali’s face at the sight of her volunteering.

“Thank you…?”

“Reua.”

“Thank you, Reua,” Harvali smiled. “Thank you.”

“Do we have enough?” Bingzak asked from her side.

She nodded. “It’ll have to do. We don’t have a lot of time.”

Turning to the mass, she looked over them. “We’re going to find the Toa. You can return to the temple. Stay safe. Stay together. We’ll come for you if we can.”

Another Okotan stood up, one from the Region of Ice. He had a compact bow in hand.

“I’ll keep everyone safe,” he said.

The archeologist smiled before turning to her group. They looked at her and nodded. The Creatures were still gazing at the smoke rising from the crash sites.

“Alright,” Harvali said. “I know we’re not the Toa or the Protectors, but we’re all Okoto’s got if we’re going to save the island. So we’re together on this; to the very end. It’s going to be dangerous, and I don’t know if we’ll succeed, or even be allowed to come back.”

Jaller chuckled. “When do we start?”

---

“The Toa!” Nilkuu exclaimed as they ran. “They’ve returned!”

“Now we just have to find them!” Korgot said.

“Let’s escape with our lives first!” Kivoda ducked under a low branch.

“That sounds good to me!” Vizuna remarked.

Behind them, the Elemental Beasts were still charging after them, their forms glowing sickly as they ran. They roared, their voices echoing through the night. The Protectors knew they couldn’t take them on by themselves. These Elemental Beasts that had arrived with Makuta were… stronger… than the one that had threatened Okoto almost a week prior.

As they ran, one of the beasts, a Storm Beast, thrust its hand forward. A bolt of lightning shot from its claws, striking a tree to Narmoto’s right. The tree exploded as he passed, sending him crashing into his fellow Protectors. They clattered to the ground, dazed by the impact. The beasts quickly caught up and circled around them, flexing their claws.

Ekimu, skidding to a halt, swung around and saw the scene. Twirling his Hammer of Power in hand, he pointed its head at the beasts. A second later, dozens of projectiles of energy shot from the face of the hammer. They hit the creatures, causing them to step back as they were hit suddenly. At once they turned on him, their eyes blazing. The Storm Beast raised its hand again and unleashed another bolt of lightning.

The Mask Maker brought up his shield just as it hit. Lightning arched everywhere as he skidded across the jungle floor, digging his feet in to stop himself. As he did, he looked up. The Elemental Beasts were approaching him now, their forms glowing in the dark of the forest. Readying his staff and shield, he faced off against the creatures of shadow.

Stepping forward, his other adversary, a Lava Beast, sent a wave of fire flying at the Okotan. He jumped out of the way and charged at the beasts. As he approached, they swung at him with their clawed hands. He ducked under them and swung his hammer at the Storm Beast’s leg. The strike made contact and caused the creature’s leg to buckle. Bringing his hammer up again, he struck it in the face, sending it crashing to the ground.

Behind him, the Lava Beast roared before charging. The Mask Maker jumped out of the way as it slashed at him with its blazing claws. Activating his hammer, Ekimu unleashed another barrage of projectiles on it. They hit the beast with full force, knocking it backwards a few paces.

On the sideline, the Protectors were recovering from the blast. Pushing themselves off the ground, they watched as Ekimu battled the Lava Beast. The six were about to rush to help when suddenly the Storm Beast rose from the ground and unleashed a bolt of lightning on them. They jumped out of the way as it flew past them, striking the brush and setting it alight.

“Nilkuu! Vizuna! Korgot!” Narmoto called. “Help Ekimu! We’ll handle this!”

Nodding, the three rushed off to aid the Mask Maker. The Protector of Fire, Kivoda, and Izotor turned to face the Storm Beast. Its eyes blazing, it thrust its clawed hand forward again. But, just as electricity crackled in its claws, the three Protectors unleashed powerful blasts of energy from their elemental cannons. The blasts struck the creature with their full force, sending it crashing backwards through the forest.

As the smoke cleared, they saw it stir slightly. Izotor, reading his sawblade, ran over to it and brought his razor shield down on its face. It shattered the Mask of Power as the beast roared its protests. There was a blast of light before the Storm Beast disappeared in a cloud of glowing dust.

Several paces away, the other four were still battling the Lava Beast. Nilkuu, activating his Sandstone Blaster, unleashed powerful blasts of stone at the beast. Behind it, Vizuna used his Flame Bow to blast it forward before Korgot struck it with a blast of earth. It crashed to the ground, stunned. Ekimu swung his hammer down on its face. There was a blast of energy as the mask shattered, its fragments evaporating as its bearer did the same.

The battle over, the seven stood catching their breath.

“Well that was fun,” Kivoda said finally.

“These are much fiercer than the ones we fought before,” Izotor remarked.

“These come directly from the Shadow Realm,” the Mask Maker replied. “They are not supported by Shadow Traps like the first wave.”

“Which makes our job harder,” Nilkuu groaned.

“Very,” Ekimu nodded.

“Then we should find the Toa before we run into any more of these beasts,” Narmoto suggested.

“And find the villagers before they find them as well,” Korgot added.

“Let’s stop wasting time then, and let’s go!” Vizuna clapped his hands together.

---

The wind blew fiercely. Snow fluttered through the air. The figure struggled to keep his grip as he climbed. Eventually, he came to the top of the ancient pillar.

Kopaka, Toa of Ice, looked out over the Region of Ice. Mountains loomed in the distance. More pillars jutted from the ground across the valley. A large volume of snow was descending from above, blowing past him.

“Okoto...” he said. “My home...”

He wasn’t sure what had happened in the Shadow Realm. The last thing he remembered was being surrounded by the Dream Snatcher and those horrible creatures, and then the next moment he was here, back on Okoto.

How had he gotten back to Okoto? It couldn’t’ve been anything they had done. So what had happened?

Kopaka’s armor was also different. It was sleeker than his previous armor, and consisted of white, blue, and hints of gold. His weapons were similar to previous ones he had had. In his right hand he carried a sword, but it was slimmer than his last one. In his left he carried a shield just like his original one..

The Toa didn’t know why his armor had changed, but he wasn’t complaining. And he didn’t have time to. Makuta was free, and he, and the other Toa, had to return him to his prison in the Shadow Realm.

Separating his shield into his skis, he smiled as he went whizzing down the snow-covered ruin and into the blizzard.

---

Pohatu, Toa of Stone, looked out over the desert from the ruin. All was dark, all was still. The starry sky burned brightly above him.

He hadn’t thought he would ever see Okoto again. He thought their fate was to remain the Shadow Realm for eternity. Instead, he, and he presumed the others, were back on the island.

But how?

That would be a question for Ekimu, assuming he was still alive. Right now, he had to focus on finding the others.

The trails of his brothers and sister’s comets still shone dimly in the night sky. They each converged on a region of the island.

“Just as before...” he muttered.

Looking down at his armor, which was far thicker than his previous, and had several streaks of gold in it, he unhooked his weapons from his thighs. They were a pair of hammers with elemental blasters attached to the heads. As he held them, he noticed they felt… different, than his last weapon. It was almost like these were a part of him.

Readying himself, he jumped from the pillar and landed on the desert floor. Turning towards the City of the Mask Makers, he activated his powers. Sand began to swirl around him before he was picked up into the air by a miniature tornado. Smiling, he propelled it forward, making his way across the dark desert under the starry sky.

---

Lewa, Toa of Jungle, soared through the sky above the Region of Jungle. He chuckled at the sensation. He thought he would never be able to fly again; condemned for eternity to the Shadow Realm. But now he was back, and freer than ever.

Of course, he wasn’t sure what had happened to return him to Okoto. The last thing he remembered before waking up on the island was being surrounded by a bright blinding light. Then he found himself in a crater, his armor and weapons changed. He now had a more robust set of armor, blended with gold and silver. But it wasn’t heavy; it was actually very light.

He also carried a large ax, which was currently strapped to his back. On his arms were two fins, which allowed him to fly.

Dust shot out from under his feet as he landed on a large pillar overlooking an island in the middle of a chasm, a massive tree sprouting from it.. He looked around the area. The starry sky twinkled at him from above.

It was odd being back on Okoto. It felt like decades had passed since he had last set foot on the island. And now here he was, standing on it.

The Toa of Jungle wasn’t exactly sure where he was going. He saw that the other Toa had crashed down in their respective Regions – just as they had originally – and they probably had similar questions. Lewa assumed he should go to the City of the Mask Makers. That was, after all, where Makuta was most likely to have gone.

On the other hand, there were hundreds of villagers scattered across the island, potentially in danger. It was his duty to protect them.

Crouching down, he jumped off the pillar. A second later he shot back up, flying high into the silent night.

---

Onua, Toa of Earth, smashed through another rock wall with his hammer. The explosion echoed down the tunnel he had created for himself. He was surprised with his new weapon. It was much lighter than his previous tools, but was much, much more powerful. He wasn’t sure of its limits. Probably best to go easy when using it. Sinking the island was not something he wanted to be responsible for.

He hadn’t expected to return to Okoto so soon. While he had known that they would eventually return; he didn’t imagine it’d be only a few days after their banishment.

Destiny is on our side, he thought.

The massive Toa continued down the dark tunnel. His footsteps were the only thing that accompanied him. As he walked, he considered many things.

First of all was the fact that his armor had changed from while he was in the Shadow Realm. It was now much bulkier, similar to the armor he had first arrived in. His color scheme remained the same also.

He also considered what he and the others were going to do when they reunited. He knew that they were going to have to fight Makuta, but he didn’t know how well that would go. The shadow titan was incredibly powerful, and had probably found a way to restore the Mask of Ultimate Power. They would need all their strength in order to defeat him.

Approaching another wall, he raised his hammer and swung it forward. There was a loud crashing noise as he smashed clean through it to the other side. As the rubble fell away, he was blinded by a purple glow. As his eyes adjusted, he saw that he had entered a massive cavern. Huge purple crystals jutted from the ground and ceiling, long natural archways stretched across the room, and a massive opening showed the starry sky above. Several ancient pillars were also scattered across the cave.

Launching himself onto one of the ruins, he looked out over the cavern. The sight of it brought a smile to his face.

“It is good to see you again,” he said.

Detaching the head of his hammer and strapping the staff to his back, he split the head in half, creating two large claws. Readying himself, he jumped off the pillar towards one of the archways.

---

Gali, Toa of Water, swam freely through the water. Escaped from the Shadow Realm, she could now roam the Region of Water again.

She had no idea how much she had missed the sea. It was as if a part of herself had been taken away. It was a longing within her. But, now that she was back, it felt as if she were whole again.

As she swam through the waters, she had noticed a few things since her return to the island. First of all was the fact that her armor had drastically changed from her previous set. She had now gold in her armor, in addition to the blue and silver. Her spear had also been returned to a trident, which could once again be split into fins, which were currently strapped to her feet.

Looking up, Gali began to ascend. Breaking the surface, she looked around. The sky was filled with bright shining stars and planets. Around her were several tall plateaus, many with long waterfalls coming from them. She also saw dozens of the ancient pillars jutting from the ground and ascending into the sky.

Calling upon her elemental power, she used the water to launch herself into the air towards one of the ruins. As she traveled through the air, her fins detached from her feet and magnetized to her staff, forming her trident.

Dust shot from under her feet as she landed on the top of the stone structure. Surveying the vast landscape of the Region of Water, she sighed. While she enjoyed being back on Okoto, she knew it wasn’t luck that brought them back. Gali knew that she and the other Toa had a task to do, and it was their destiny to do it.

So, readying herself, she jumped off the ruin and dived back towards the water below.

---

Tahu, Toa of Fire, looked out over the edge of the cliff. Ariver of bubbling lava passed below. Fusing his twin blades together to form his lava board, he took a deep breath, before leaping off the cliff. As he fell towards the stream below, he held his board under his feet. A second later he hit the lava with a splash, before being dragged along by the flow. Taking control, he began to surf down the river.

In addition to the return of his blades and lava board, Tahu’s armor had been radically transformed from the set he had been given by Ekimu. He still retained his red and gold coloring, but the general shape of his plating had become more robust, giving him more covering. It also was much lighter than any of his previous sets, something that he found desirable.

He and the other Toa had returned to Okoto. The six heroes destined to save the island had been summoned back, by he could only assume to be the Protectors, to stop Makuta. Once and for all.

Personally, he felt that this was their second chance. This was their chance to undo the mistakes of the past, and finally complete their destiny.

As he surfed, the Toa of Fire dodged several rocks that jutted from under the lava and were in his path. Looking around, he saw several mountains in the distance, including the outline of the three massive volcanoes of the island. He also saw dozens of ancient ruins and pillars.

Ahead, he saw that the river was about to drop off into a fall. Directly across from it was a particularly large pillar. As he approached the edge, he readied. As soon as he reached it, he jumped. He flew across the gap with expert skill.

Closing in on the pillar, he grabbed his board from under his feet and split it into his blades. Approaching the side of the structure, he slammed his blades into it, securing himself. Looking up towards the top, he began to climb, using his swords to do so.

Eventually, he reached the top. Looking around, he surveyed the Region of Fire. He saw lava shoot up all across the land. Hee looked into the night sky, where the stars and planets shined down on him. Then, he looked towards the west, towards the City of the Mask Makers.

“I hope you’re ready for us, Makuta,” Tahu said. “Because we’re coming for you.”

Chapter 9: Chaos Theory

After he heard their screams, he knew the beasts weren’t coming back.

Passing back through the portal, he returned to the Forge of the Mask Makers. Axato was still kneeling on the ground, held by two Skull Warriors. He looked up at the titan’s arrival.

“This...” Makuta muttered. “This is your fault!” he turned on the Skull Raider.

“My fault?”

“The Protectors have fled with Ekimu and the Mask of Time. The Toa have returned. And everything I’ve worked for could come crashing down!” he roared.

“Maybe,” Axato said. “You shouldn’t try to take over their home.”

“Okoto is my domain! I am Makuta, the Master of All!”

“Just because you declare something, doesn’t make it true,” the skeletal warrior smirked.

A moment later he was struck with the back of the titan’s fist. He was thrown across the room and smashed into the wall. Axato sunk to the floor as Makuta towered over him, his eyes blazing with an uncontrollable rage.

“Ekimu is a fool and a hypocrite! He preaches unity but encourages divide! Why do you think the regions are kept separate, except when they come together in this ‘great’ city? My brother is the one who is destroying Okoto! I am the only one who will defend it!”

Axato pushed himself off the ground, his limbs shaking under his weight. “The Toa will protect the island.”

“They can’t when they’ve been obliterated.”

The Skull Raider chuckled. “You honestly believe you can kill the Toa? They’ve defeated every foe you’ve thrown at them.”

“I control their elements,” he indicated the Mask of Ultimate Power. “There is nothing they can do to stop me.”

“They are the embodiment of the elements. Your Mask is merely an imitation.”

Makuta shook his head. “The Toa are not the embodiment of the elements. The Creatures are, and I’ve already gotten that handled.”

Axato raised an eyebrow. “What do you mean?”

“I mean,” he smiled. “I’ve sent Umarak to find and destroy the six remaining Creatures. Without them, the Toa will be powerless to stop me.”

“And what about the Creature of Light?”

The titan’s smile got broader.

“Let’s just say that Agil won’t be a problem anymore.”

---

The Mask of Control and the Mask of Time clinked softly as they bounced against Ekimu’s armor as they walked. The group of seven were following the green trail of light painted in the sky. Silence hung in the air, except for the crunching of their footsteps.

“What are we going to do once we find the Toa?” Nilkuu asked.

“Return my brother to the Shadow Realm and destroy the Mask of Ultimate Power,” the Mask Maker replied.

“That won’t be an easy fight,” Vizuna said.

“No. It won’t,” Ekimu nodded. “But it has to be done. For the sake of Okoto.”

“But...” Kivoda began slowly. “What if the Toa cannot defeat Makuta? Like they couldn’t before?”

“They didn’t have their Elemental Creatures then,” he said. “That is why we need to find them as well. Only with the Elemental Creatures will the Toa be able to defeat my brother.”

“Will you join the fight as well?” Izotor inquired. “You are the Toa of Light, after all.”

The Mask Maker gave a faint smile.

“Yes. I suppose I will,” he replied, though his tone rang with uncertainty.

The Protectors looked at each other.

“Are you alright, Ekimu?” Narmoto asked.

“Oh yes. I’m fine,” the Mask Maker said hastily. “Why?”

“You just sound,” Korgot looked at him. “Sad.”

He waved her off. “Just tired, is all. Haven’t slept in nearly a week.”

This did not ease their anxieties, however, but they kept their doubts to themselves. Right now, the only thing that mattered was finding the Toa and the Elemental Creatures.

---

The Okotans and the Elemental Creatures made their way through the jungle under the cover of darkness. The Creatures led the way as Harvali and the others followed behind her. Above them the night sky was slowly turning to day. It would be the first sunrise on the island in almost a week.

She smiled. Even though Makuta still controlled the island, and the Protectors and Ekimu were mostly likely either dead or imprisoned, the sight of the multicolored trails of light hanging in the night sky filled her with hope. The Toa, the legendary heroes she had been told about since her birth, and had studied in ancient scrolls, had returned to Okoto, to save them from the dark.

They continued walking. Bingzak came up beside her.

“Do you think the Toa will be able to defeat Makuta?” the young villager asked.

“They’ve vanquished every other foe the Mask Hoarder’s thrown at them,” she replied. “He’ll be no different.”

“But he beat them before. The Protector of Fire said so.”

He was right. The Toa failing was why Makuta had been able to seize control.

Harvali looked at him. “They’ll be stronger this time. They won’t let Makuta defeat them again.”

“They’d better not,” Hewkii said. “Otherwise Makuta will win. For good.”

“Darkness cannot destroy light,” Takua replied. “No more than light can destroy darkness.”

“So how do the Toa win?” Reua asked.

“The Toa can defeat Makuta, but they cannot destroy him. They can only light up the dark. Just as darkness can only dim the light,” the Okotan answered.

“You’re awfully philosophical,” Hewkii remarked.

“I know,” Jaller muttered.

Takua nodded to the Okotan of Stone. “Thank you.”

“Either way,” Harvali said. “We need to gather the Toa.”

---

He knew he was getting close now.

Umarak stalked through the forest, the starry sky beginning to turn to morning above him. His bow in hand, his steps crunched quietly in the grass. The Hunter’s keen eyes scanned the area.

The Hunter knew his destiny was at hand. For thousands of years he had hunted them, and he had failed time and time again. But now, he had never felt so close to completing his goal.

He tensed as he heard movement up ahead. Narrowing his eyes, he saw a group of figures moving between the trees. As he watched, he saw that they were Okotans. Moving closer, but still remaining hidden, he saw six more figures. They were different, animal in their movements. His eyes widened.

The Creatures.

Umarak couldn’t believe it. All six of them were within his grasp. It was almost like they were being delivered to him. Finally, his destiny to capture the Elemental Creatures and drain them of their power would be complete.

He narrowed his eyes. Readying his bow, he moved to strike.

---

They were walking through the forest when suddenly the Creatures stopped, looking around for some invisible thing.

“What’s wrong with them?” Jaller asked when something moved to the right.

A split second later a wave of red energy came rushing at them. With no time to react, they were swept off their feet, being thrown through the air. The Okotans and Creatures crashed to the ground, stunned from the impact.

From the brush, a tall, shadowy figure emerged. A bow in his hands, the Hunter smiled. Scanning the fallen with his acid green eyes, he saw the six Creatures laying in the grass.

He chuckled. “Too easy.”

As he walked amongst them, they stirred slightly but did not rise. Approaching Uxar, he reached down and grabbed the Creature by the neck. Picking it up, he smiled as it dangled in his hand. Weakly, it managed to turn its head to look at him.

“I believe we have some unfinished business. You still owe me your elemental power,” the Hunter said. “Don’t worry. It’ll be painless. Just ask Agil.”

Activating his affinity over shadow, he suspended the Creature in the air as he turned around. Slowly, Uxar began to move towards the Hunter.

“Stop!” said a weak voice to his right.

Turning his head, he saw one of the Okotans standing. He was from the Region of Stone, and, although he was weak, had a compact bow aimed at him. His eyes were narrow and he obviously knew what he was doing.

The Creature stopped moving towards Umarak as the Hunter moved towards the Okotan. The grip on the villager’s bow tightened.

“Stop right there,” Hewkii said, more confidently this time.

“What are you going to do to me, child?” the Hunter laughed. “Do you not know who I am?”

“You’re Umarak, the Hunter,” he replied. “But that doesn’t mean anything to me. To me, you’re just another of Makuta’s goons.”

“Now is that such a bad thing?” Umarak’s grip on his own weapon tightened. “Makuta is our savior.”

Hewkii was unfazed. “I see that you’re already too far gone.”

A second later several projectiles flew from the Okotan’s weapon. They struck the Hunter with expert precision, sending him stumbling backwards. Regaining his footing, Umarak raised his own bow and unleashed powerful blasts of energy. They raced at Hewkii, striking him with deadly force, sending him flying into a tree. He slumped to the ground, unconscious.

“Fool,” he said, turning back to Uxar. “Nobody challenges me and wins.”

Again, the Creature began to move towards the Hunter’s back. Energy began to crackle in the air as he neared.

“Soon,” he grinned. “My destiny will be complete.”

Umarak and Uxar were about to unite when suddenly an incredibly powerful blast of shadow struck the Hunter with brutal force. It launched him through the air and sent him crashing into a tree, destroying it in the process. He smashed to the ground, his glowing armor flickering on impact.

Coughing, he pushed himself up, his arms shaking as he did. The dust clearing, he looked for his attacker. He narrowed his eyes, before suddenly opening them wide as he spotted his assailant. The creature crouched low, its form glowing purple. It looked at him with its bright eyes, peering into him. Shadows rose from it like smoke.

“No...” he muttered. “No… You can’t be here...”

Stepping forward, the beast growled, pawing the ground. The Hunter got to his feet, still unable to believe his eyes. It couldn’t be here; he had made sure of that. But there it was – the Creature of Shadow.

“Ombra,” he muttered. “You can’t be here!”

Growling, the Creature approached him. Instinctively, the Hunter raised his bow, aiming it at the beast. He shook ever so slightly as its eyes flashed. Energy crackled in its jaws, as if it were channeling raw elemental power. Activating his weapon, Umarak unleashed a powerful barrage of projectiles on the creature, submerging it in a bright light. He yelled as he continued his attack, never ceasing.

Suddenly he was hit by a savage attack from behind, being thrown onto his face. Energy flew into the air as his bow bounced away. Rolling over, he looked to see Ombra standing with the six other Elemental Creatures, joined by the Okotans, who had recovered themselves. The Creatures glowed with raw elemental power.

Umarak raised his hand to call on the shadows, but they quickly receded. The Creature of Shadow growled. He looked around.

The Hunter was cornered.

---

The rising sun bathed the Region of Jungle in a beautiful golden glow.

Lewa, Toa of Jungle soared high above the treetops, his armor shining in the light. He smiled. It hadn’t been until the dawn had broken that he had realized how much he had missed the island. Although he had only been in the Shadow Realm a few days, it felt like he had been there an eternity. And he never wanted to leave again. This was his home, and he was here to stay.

Flying through the air, he continued to test out his new wings. They were more powerful than his originals. It felt as if he was truly one with the sky now.

Continuing his flight, something out of the corner of his eye caught his attention. Turning his head, he saw a multicolored blast of energy rise above the trees. Changing his direction, he flew towards where the blast had come from.

Arriving above it, he saw several figures gathered around another who was on the ground. Squinting, he saw that he recognized them.

The Toa deactivated his wings and leaned into a dive. Falling towards the ground, he used his power to soften his landing. Dust flew out from under his feet as he hit the ground, unhooking his ax from his back. Holding it in both hands, he looked around.

At his arrival, everyone was looking at him in surprise. He returned it. Six villagers were standing before him. Umarak the Hunter was clad in orange armor instead of green. And there were seven Elemental Creatures, being led by one he didn’t recognize.

“Toa Lewa!” the Okotans exclaimed.

“Toa,” Umarak sneered.

The Creatures made noises of acknowledgment.

“I’m sorry,” Lewa said. “But can we take it back a few?”

“No,” the Hunter stood up suddenly. As he did, everyone raised their weapons at him. The seven Elemental Creatures unleashed another powerful blast of energy as Lewa unleashed a blast of wind.

Umarak flipped out of the way. Grabbing his bow, he activated his Mask of Shadows, and a second later, faded into the darkness.

Lewa turned to the Okotans and the Creatures.

“What in Mata Nui’s name is going on?”

---

Narmoto stopped. “What was that?”

The seven looked around. They had all heard the noise. Vizuna, crouching down, put his hand on the forest floor. Closing his eyes, he called upon his connection to the jungle. A ring of light appeared around his hand as he concentrated. The Protectors and Ekimu watched in silence. After a moment, he looked up.

“There’re several beings over that way,” he pointed to the west. “They seem almost like… Okotans.”

“Okotans?” Kivoda raised an eyebrow.

“Yeah.”

“Let’s see if they need help,” Korgot said.

Together, the seven readied their weapons and ran through the forest. The sky was golden with the dawn above them. Patches of light streamed through the gaps in the trees. They dodged felled trunks and large holes in the ground.

“We’re getting close!” Vizuna called.

As they approached a wall of hanging vines, the Protector of Jungle took lead of the charge. Coming to a stop, they looked at each other. Nodding, they returned their gaze to the wall. Their weapons ready, the seven burst through the wall and out the other side. But, they found they had no need for their tools.

“Toa Lewa?” the seven gasped before they saw the six Okotans and seven Creatures standing with him.

“Ombra,” Ekimu’s eyes widened. “Creature of Shadow.”

The Mask Maker bowed, which confused the Okotans, Protectors, and the Toa. The Creature bowed in return.

“There are eight Creatures?” Nilkuu asked.

“Yes,” Ekimu stood. “One for each element of Okoto. Ikir is fire. Akida is water. Uxar is jungle. Ketar is stone. Terak is earth. Melum is ice. Agil was light. And Ombra is shadow.”

“Hang on,” Lewa held up his hand. “What do you mean ‘Agil was light’. Is he not still?”

Everyone turned to the Mask Maker. He hung his head and sighed. Izotor tilted his head.

“Where was Agil when we escaped the Forge of the Mask Makers, Ekimu?” he asked.

He said nothing. His hands trembled slightly. Everyone glanced at each other.

“Agil is… gone,” he answered finally.

“...Gone?” Harvali repeated.

“After my brother imprisoned me in the dungeon… he… he…” he trailed off.

Lewa knew what had happened. “He gave Agil to Umarak.”

The Mask Maker gave a half nod. Everyone gasped as the Creatures looked down.

“So there are only seven Elemental Creatures now,” the Toa of Jungle said.

“Yes,” Ekimu replied. “So, even if we defeat my brother; balance will never be truly restored.”

“Can you still transform into the Toa of Light?” Narmoto asked.

“No,” he shook his head. “With Agil gone, I cannot become the Toa of Light.”

“What does that mean for defeating Makuta?” Korgot inquired. “If all seven Toa can’t stand against him…”

“It means we have to assemble the other Toa,” Lewa replied.

“But how?” Kivoda said. “They’re scattered across the island!”

The Creatures started making noise. The assembled turned to them. Ekimu’s eyes widened as he realized what they were trying to communicate.

“Of course!” he exclaimed.

“What?” nearly everyone asked.

The Mask Maker turned to the Toa of Jungle.

“Your Mask!” he pointed to the Golden Mask of Jungle on the Toa’s face. “They believe that you may be able to do communicate with the other Toa using it!”

“How do you know that would work?” Lewa raised an eyebrow.

“The same way I was able to communicate to you and others while I was asleep,” he answered. “I know it will work. You just have to focus.”

Lewa looked at him a moment before nodding. “Alright.”

Closing his eyes, the Toa pressed his middle and index fingers to his temple. He concentrated, trying to reach out to his fellow Toa. As he did, the others stood around him, watching in silence. Personally, Lewa doubted that he could contact the others this way. But, he had faith in Ekimu, and if he believed he could, then he might as well try, even if it were frugal.

After several moments of no results, he was about to give up. Just as he was going to, however, he heard something. He saw images flash before him, images of the different regions of Okoto. Then it was like he was seeing them through the eyes of somebody else. Then he knew.

This was it. He had gotten through.

Pressing his fingers against his temple even more, he tried to send a message.

“My brothers and sister. We must gather. Join me in the Temple of the Creature of Jungle… We do not have much time...”

After that, he opened his eyes and looks around. Everyone was looking at him expectantly. Lewa looked to Ekimu. The Toa nodded.

“Now let’s see if they heard it,” the Mask Maker said.

---

And indeed they did. Across Okoto, as the voice of their fellow Toa faded away, the five Toa turned towards the Region of Jungle.

Granted, they knew it might be a trap from Makuta, sent to lure them to a place where he would destroy them. But, it had sounded like their brother, and if he had an idea on what was happening, they might as well risk it. They were Toa, after all.

So, the heroes took up their weapons and made their way across their respective regions. They didn’t know what lay ahead of them, but they knew that their quest was coming to a close.

---

“Take him to the dungeons. Maybe he’ll get more use of them than the Protectors did,” Makuta said, turning away from the Skull Raider. “And it was where his beloved Kulta spent his last days.”

Axato tried to lunge at the Mask Hoarder, but was pulled away by the two skeletal warriors. He struggled as they dragged him down towards the dungeons.

“You will fall, Makuta!” he yelled.

“Oh, I doubt that,” he said.

He stood there, smiling. He watched Axato as he was dragged into a cell, looking through the hole in the floor. The Skull Raider looked up at him to yell when he was knocked unconscious by one of the Skull Warriors.

Behind him, the shadows shimmered before Umarak emerged from the darkness. Makuta turned at his arrival. There was a smile behind his Mask of Ultimate Power before he began to frown upon seeing that the Hunter looked almost… defeated. He narrowed his eyes.

“What happened,” the titan said, since he already knew what had happened.

“I had them in my grasp,” Umarak began. “The six Creatures and a group of Okotans they were traveling with.”

“How many Okotans?”

“Six,” he replied.

“The whole city was evacuated before my arrival,” Makuta looked at him. “Where were they?”

“I do not know, my lord,” Umarak answered.

“They must be elsewhere,” the titan stroked the tip of his Mask. “Anyway. Continue.”

He nodded. “I disabled them all. They were trapped. But, just as I was about to drain Uxar of his power… something happened.”

The Mask Hoarder narrowed his eyes further. “What?”

“A creature appeared,” the Hunter said slowly. “The Creature of Shadow.”

“WHAT?!” Makuta roared. He grabbed Umarak by the neck and slammed him into a wall.

“WHAT DO YOU MEAN THE CREATURE OF SHADOW WAS THERE?!”

“I mean it was there!” he gasped. “It was there! And then the Toa of Jungle appeared!”

“Nobody has seen Ombra in thousands of years,” Makuta said. “Not since before the Fall. How could it be there?”

“I do not know, my lord!”

He dropped the Hunter and turned away, thinking. Umarak rubbed his neck as he got on his feet again.

“This is not good,” Makuta paced. “If the Creature of Shadow is here… then it means that something cataclysmic is about to happen on the island. That’s what happened the last time it appeared. It means that...”

The titan turned.

“It means my plans need to be accelerated.”

Umarak gulped. “Accelerated?”

The titan nodded. “Indeed. Inform Skull Basher. Time is running out.”

Bowing, the Hunter left the room. With him gone, Makuta turned and started into the purple flames of the Great Furnace. He closed his eyes, thinking.

Ekimu and the Protectors had escaped. The Toa had been released from the Shadow Realm. And now, Ombra, the Creature of Shadow, had reappeared. Everything was stacked against him.

“Everything has been stacked against me all my life,” he muttered to himself.

“That doesn’t mean that it will crush me,” Makuta opened his eyes.

“I will crush them.”

Chapter 10: Tipping Point

The Temple of the Creature of Jungle. Three days later.

Their footsteps echoed as the group entered the temple. Looking around, they stood in awe of the massive tree that spiraled along the walls of the structure towards the ceiling. Sunlight poured in from openings in the roof of leaves, bathing them in a golden light.

“When do you think the other Toa will be here?” Harvali asked.

“Soon, I hope,” Lewa replied. “From what you’ve told me, we don’t have much time.”

“Do not fear, chronicler,” Ekimu said. “They will come. I know they will.”

As if on cue, there was movement from the entrance. Turning, they saw the elemental Toa entering the temple. The five were decorated in the same kind of new armor that Lewa wore. They looked at the assembled group and smiled. The Okotans and Protectors cheered while the Creatures jumped up and down excitedly.

“Brother!” they exclaimed.

Onua came up to Lewa and embraced the Toa of Jungle, picking him a few feet off the ground. He chuckled heartily as Lewa wheezed under the pressure.

“It’s good to see you, brother!” the Toa of Earth exclaimed.

“Good… to see… you too… my big friend…” Lewa wheezed. “Please… Let me go…”

“Oh,” he said, realizing that he was crushing his brother. “Of course. Sorry.”

Loosing his grip, the Toa of Jungle slid out Onua’s embraced, landing on solid ground again. Everyone in the temple chuckled as Lewa massaged his sides. The other Toa came over and joined their brothers, standing together. The Okotans and Creatures gathered around them. Ekimu came up to them and bowed. They returned it.

“It is a true comfort to have you back,” the Mask Maker bowed.

“It is good be back,” Gali replied.

“Ekimu,” Tahu stepped forward. “We are sorry for what happened at the portal. What has happened in our absence?”

Sighing, the Mask Maker related, with the help of the Protectors and Harvali and Bingzak, the entire story of what had happened since Makuta had arrived on Okoto. From Ekimu’s defeat, to his conquering of the City of the Mask Makers, to the reforging of the Mask of Ultimate Power, to the capture of the Protectors and the Mask of Time, to their escape with the help of Axato, to their summoning of them, the confrontation with Umarak, and the arrival of the Creature of Shadow.

“So there are eight Creatures?” Pohatu raised an eyebrow, looking at the panther. “Are we sure there aren’t any more?”

“There are eight elements, Pohatu,” Kopaka said. “It makes sense that there would be eight Creatures to represent them.”

“But we originally thought there were six. And then Agil showed up. And now we’ve got this new one.”

“Ombra hasn’t been seen since I saw them at the Festival of Masks thousands of years ago. He disappeared after my brother’s corruption.”

“If Agil is the Creature of the Toa of Light,” Gali asked. “Does that mean that Ombra is the Creature of the Toa of Shadow?”

Ekimu nodded. “Yes. Makuta – my brother – is the Toa of Shadow.”

“So he was born evil?” Lewa said.

“No,” he shook his head. “No one is born evil, Toa of Jungle. We are born with both good and evil inside us. We just have to choose which one we want to be.”

“But darkness represents evil, right?” Tahu asked.

“Darkness is not inherently evil, just as light is not inherently good. Darkness can be crushing, yes, but it can help you see the light. And light can be blinding, and darkness helps you see. They are two sides of the same coin,” he explained.

“The Toa of Shadow is not evil, then?” Onua inquired.

“The Toa of Shadow is merely the opposite of the Toa of Light. They balance each other out. You cannot have light without darkness.”

“Makuta can become the Toa of Shadow, then?” Kopaka asked.

“Not in his current state, no,” Ekimu replied. “The Mask of Ultimate Power, fueling his greed and reckless desires, has blocked his ability to transform into the Toa of Shadow.”

“At least you can still transform into the Toa of Light,” Tahu said.

Everyone except the five new arrivals exchanged nervous glances. Raising their eyebrows, the five Toa turned to the Mask Maker.

“I…” Ekimu trailed off. “Cannot transform into the Toa of Light.”

“What? Why?” Pohatu asked.

“Because…” his voice trembled. “Because Agil is gone.”

Just then, the Toa noticed that the Creature of Light was indeed not present with the seven other Creatures. They looked around the temple for the hawk-like creature, but could not find it.

“Well,” Kopaka began. “Where is it?”

“Agil is… gone,” Ekimu repeated.

“We have to find it, then!” Tahu said.

Lewa shook his head sadly. Gali, Pohatu, and Onua understood.

“No,” Gali looked at her brother. “Ekimu means that Agil is gone.”

The Toa of Fire looked at her a moment before his eyes widened. “Umarak…” he turned to the Mask Maker.

“Yes,” Ekimu nodded. “Makuta gave Agil to Umarak.”

He stopped for a moment, before adding: “And, to make matters worse; you cannot unite with your Creatures.”

“What?” was the response.

“With Agil gone, the Creatures’ ability to unite is broken. The Time of Unity is over.”

Silence hung in the temple. After a few moments, Tahu spoke up.

“Then we must stop Makuta. Once and for all.”

---

The Skull Basher’s footsteps echoed as he descended the stairwell. Axato looked up as the massive figure entered the dungeon.

“What do you want?” Axato growled.

“You betrayed me,” he said, his eyes blazing. “And you betrayed our savior Makuta.”

“Makuta is not our savior,” the Skull Raider replied. “And you are not my leader. Kulta was. And he’s dead.”

In his rage, Skull Basher slammed his fist against the bars of his cell. His cell rattled upon impact. Standing, Axato came face to face with the brute. Both were glowing with pure hatred.

“I don’t care what that monster promised you, but you will lose. The Toa have returned, and they will defeat you.”

“The Toa were banished to the Shadow Realm,” Skull Basher said. “You’re the reason they’ve returned.”

“Makuta is insane. You cannot trust him-,” Axato spat when he was suddenly grabbed by the throat through the bars and lifted into the air. He choked and gagged as Skull Basher’s grip tightened.

“How dare you!” Skull Basher roared. “How dare you insult the savior of Okoto! He is the only one who can save us from Ekimu’s tyranny!”

Choking, he managed to reply. “You’re a fool.”

A second later Axato was launched across the cell, smashing into the wall. He slumped to the ground, a massive dent above him. His body ached and his head spun as he pushed himself up to look at the brute on the other side of the bars. Even through his blurring vision he could see his blazing red eyes.

“If Makuta didn’t want you alive,” Skull Basher growled. “I would gladly relieve you of your head.”

Turning, the brute marched back up the stairs and out of sight. Getting off the ground, Axato walked to the bars and leaned on them. He had to get out. The other Skull Raiders were being subjected to the rule of that mad titan. He had to escape, and make his stand. Even if it was his last.

---

“Since you seem so confident, Tahu,” Lewa crossed his arms. “What’s the plan?”

He looked to Ekimu. “How fortified is the City of the Mask Makers?”

“As fortified as it can get,” the Mask Maker replied. “Makuta has poured all his power into defending it. The Skull Army and the Shadow Horde completely surround it.”

“If we’re going to defeat Makuta,” the Toa of Fire said. “We have to storm his castle.”

“That’ll be impossible,” Kivoda shook his head.

“Then what do we do?” Kopaka asked. “Because we have to do something.”

“Makuta wants to destroy you six,” the Protector of Fire joined in. “Storming into the City of the Mask Makers will be handing yourselves over to him on a silver platter.”

“Narmoto is right,” Ekimu stepped forward. “Going to the City of the Mask Makers right now would be a mistake.”

Tahu raised an eyebrow. “From where I’m standing, we don’t have a lot of options.”

“The last time you faced my brother, he banished you to the Shadow Realm,” the Mask Maker replied. “This time will be no different. We have to find a way to defeat him before you face him again.”

“We’re the Toa,” Kopaka said. “We’ve stopped all of Makuta’s minions.”

“Except for Umarak,” Pohatu pointed out. “We didn’t stop him.”

“Technically we did,” the Toa of Ice tried to argue.

“If we had stopped him we wouldn’t be in this mess.”

Onua nodded. “He’s got a point.”

“Ssh,” Kopaka hissed.

“No,” Tahu said. “He’s right. We have to have a plan. The fate of Okoto depends on it.”

“Then what do we do?” Gali asked.

Ekimu thought for a moment. He then reached to his back and unhooked the Mask of Time from the chain and held it in his hand.

“Thousands of years ago, I used the Mask of Time to glimpse into the future to try I perceive what the Creatures wanted to tell me,” he glanced at the seven. “Perhaps I can do it again.”

“But the Mask doesn’t explain what it shows, does it?” Nilkuu asked.

“No,” Ekimu shook his head. “But we don’t have many options at this point. I believe it could give us insight into what our next move is.”

“Is it worth the risk, Ekimu?” Korgot said worriedly.

“There’s only one way to find out.”

Gali looked concerned. “Are you sure?”

He nodded. “This is our only option. I have to do this.”

And without another word, the Mask Maker crossed to the center of the temple. Taking a deep breath, he looked to the group. They were looking at him with worry. He chuckled.

“I know what you’re thinking: the last time I wore this Mask, I saw the destruction of Okoto,” he said. “But, this time, I feel, destiny is on our side.”

Slowly, Tahu nodded. Ekimu returned it.

“Then the future awaits,” the Mask Maker said.

Reaching to his face with right hand, he pulled off the Mask of Creation. Looking at the Mask of Time in his left hand, he sighed, before lifting the Vahi to his face. There was a click as the magnetic clamps engaged. It began to glow, vibrating slightly, and he was thrown into darkness.

---

A city burning.

Flashes of color flickered around Ekimu as he fell through the void. Images of a life he knew, and a life he didn’t, passed by. He was falling.

He saw six colors – red, blue, green, amber, purple, white – explode in front of him. They rearranged to form a hexagon, but it was slightly distorted. Then, as quickly as they appeared, they were gone. He was left in shadow.

A split second later his feet hit the ground, splashing as he did. His knees buckled as he landed. Getting up, he looked around. He appeared to be in the Region of Water, standing in shallow water. He realized that he was on the beach; the endless ocean was to his left. Something was different, however. This was not what the Region looked like when he was last here. This looked almost like…

He gasped.

Okoto before the Fall.

There was a splash to his right. Turning, Ekimu saw two figures wading through the water. As he watched, he realized that he recognized them. He and his brother were walking through the shallow water.

“Ugh!” Makuta exclaimed. “I hate this Region!”

“What are you talking about?” he chuckled. “This is the best Region on Okoto. The Region of Jungle is probably a close second.”

“Are you kidding? You can’t walk anywhere here without getting your feet soaked! The Region of Earth is far better.”

“You can’t see anything in the Region of Earth. Everyone lives underground,” he replied.

His brother laughed heartily. “You might not be able to see anything, but I can see perfectly down there!”

“You were born there, after all,” he smiled.

“Call it a bias,” Makuta said.

They continued walking.

“Did you ever think it’d be like this?” his brother asked. “Being a Mask Maker?”

He shook his head. “No. It’s more than I could have imagined.”

“Same,” he nodded. “I had always dreamed of being a Mask Maker, but didn’t expect I’d actually become one.”

“That makes two of us.”

They stopped as they looked over the endless ocean.

“I feel, Makuta, that we can do something truly special as Mask Makers.”

Makuta nodded. “Yes, I believe we can, brother.”

The two looked at each other before shaking hands.

Suddenly they, and the landscape, disappeared, leaving Ekimu alone again in darkness. He looked around the void when he heard a hammering behind him. Turning around, he was back in his forge. He saw himself standing at the furnace. As he watched, he saw his younger self pull something from the flames. His eyes widened when he saw what it was.

The Mask of Light and Shadow.

“My forbidden Mask!” Ekimu exclaimed as he watched the scene.

He watched as he admired it. Suddenly a voice came from the right.

“Ekimu?”

They both turned to see Makuta standing there; wide-eyed. His eyes darted from his brother to the Mask to his brother again.

“What are you doing?!” he exclaimed upon realizing what had happened.

“Brother, I can explain-.”

“You’re creating forbidden Masks of Power!” Makuta roared.

“I am merely experimenting…” he trailed off.

But Makuta was furious. “You and I agreed that it was a sacred law never to combine the powers of more than one element. Yet, here you are, combining the two most powerful elements! What is wrong with you?”

He didn’t respond right away. He merely looked at his brother.

Finally, he found his voice. “I want to be able to protect our people, brother. What if something happens, and we’re not able to defeat them?”

“You’re the Toa of Light. I am the Toa of Shadow,” Makuta said. “We do not need heretical Masks of Power to protect the island.”

“I just… fear that something we cannot handle will come our way.”

“Then we summon the Toa,” he replied. “That is why they left, after all. To aid us if we need them.”

Ekimu stood, watching the scene before it vanished in a wisp of smoke. He was submerged in darkness again. He looked around the void, desperate to see something else. Lights suddenly began to flicker around him again. An image of a city burning flashed in front of him before it disappeared again.

He then saw flashes of Makuta striking something with a hammer. Multicolored sparks flew in all directions from it. He grunted with each swing as he was illuminated in red, blue, green, amber, purple, and white light.

Then, as soon as it had appeared, it vanished. He was once again in darkness when he heard two voices echoing in his ears.

“Makuta…”

“I will control… I will control everything…”

“I’m sorry, brother…”

Then there was suddenly a blinding flash of light, and he felt the ground trembling below him. There were screams and yells, and then there was nothing. He was left alone in the darkness, silence filling the void.

Behind him something moved. Turning around, he saw a massive figure standing there. He widened his eyes as he looked at him and sighed before calling out.

“Brother,” Ekimu said.

---

Makuta was pacing around the forge. He had to make his next move – and soon. His brother and the Toa were coming. He had to be ready. Stopping, he turned to look at the forge. Its purple flames glittered on the surface of his Mask.

He had spent far too long plotting his revenge. For thousands of years he had been trapped in the Shadow Realm, put there by the one he had trusted. Now, Ekimu would pay for what he had done to him all those years ago. And, his mindless followers – the Toa and Protectors – would not be able to stop him.

Something moved to his left. Turning around, he saw that the room was shrouded in darkness. He readied his staff.

Behind him a voice suddenly called out. “Brother.”

He turned to see Ekimu standing there, illuminated by an unseen light. Makuta narrowed his eyes and gripped his weapon tighter.

“Ekimu,” the titan growled. “What is this?”

The Mask Maker looked around. “The Mask of Time must have joined our consciousnesses.”

“You’re using the Mask of Time?” Makuta exclaimed. “Why?!”

“I think we both know the answer to that,” his brother replied.

“You cannot hope to defeat me, Ekimu,” he said. “I am more powerful than I have ever been!”

A faint smile flickered behind the Mask of Creation. “Yet you still act from the shadows, commanding others to do tasks you are too afraid to do yourself. You have all the power in the world, and you are too afraid to use it.”

“It has always been Umarak’s destiny to hunt down the Elemental Creatures and drain them of their power,” he temper was rising.

“So you’ve heard about the incident in the forest?” Ekimu nodded. “Good. Then you know that the stakes have changed.”

“Just because Ombra decided to come out of hiding does not mean you have any chance to stand against me.”

“Ombra was once your companion. Do you not remember that? The Creature of Shadow returning is a sign.”

Makuta narrowed his eyes again. “A sign of what, exactly?”

“That there is still some good in you, brother,” Ekimu said.

“You lost the right to call me brother a long time ago!”

“But I believe that you are not beyond redemption, with all my heart. The Vahi has shown me things, things that show me that you can change. That the darkness that you stand in is not eternal.”

“Shutupshutupshutup,” Makuta muttered, holding his head.

“You will always be my brother, and I will always be yours. We served as Mask Makers together, and we will always be.”

“Shutupshutupshutup,” he said, louder now.

“What?” Ekimu tilted his head.

“I SAID SHUT UP!” the titan roared. His staff crackling with energy, he pointed the spinning prongs at his brother. The Mask Maker’s eyes widened when a split second later a powerful blast of energy flew at him. He was consumed by a blinding white light, before there was nothing.

---

“Ekimu…”

The next thing he knew was that he was lying on the ground. Opening his eyes, he saw that the Toa had gathered around him, along with the Protectors, villagers, and Creatures. The Mask of Time had fallen from his face after he fell. They had replaced it with his Mask of Creation in an attempt to revive him.

Slowly, he pushed himself off the ground. Vizuna and Korgot helped him up.

“What happened?” Izotor asked. “One minute you were standing, and then you fell, like you had been hit.”

“Because I was,” Ekimu rubbed his head.

“Did you see anything?” Tahu inquired.

He looked at him a moment, before shaking his head. “Only indecipherable images and lights.”

“So what do we do now?” Kopaka said.

Ekimu picked the Mask of Time off the stone floor and hooked it back on the chain around his body. He turned back to them, obviously in deep thought. They all looked at him expectantly, holding their breath. He then looked up at them.

“We have to run.”

---

The corner of the room still burned from the powerful blast of energy that Makuta had unleashed on it. He was breathing heavily when Skull Basher rushed into the forge with two Skull Warriors. They looked around, evidently searching for an assailant. Instead, they saw their leader there, obviously distraught.

“My lord!” Skull Basher approached him. “Are you alright-?”

He was suddenly struck by the titan, getting sent across the room and crashing to the floor. The Mask Hoarder’s eyes were blazing brighter than the sun.

“EKIMU CANNOT BE ALLOWED TO LIVE!” he roared. “HE HAS HELD ME DOWN FOR TOO LONG! I MUST RID MYSELF OF HIM. I WILL DESTROY HIM!”

Skull Basher pushed himself off the ground, looking fearfully at his master. He slowly got to his feet, tightening his grip on his weapons.

“My lord, what has happened?”

Makuta looked to his lieutenant. “My brother is coming, and he cannot be allowed to defeat me. His day of reckoning has come.”

“What do you want me to do, my lord?”

“We are going to bring the fight to Ekimu, and we will end his reign of tyranny,” he said. “And the Time of Heroes will end – permanently.”

“I will ready a team,” Skull Basher bowed before leaving the room.

Makuta turned towards one of the windows, looking out over the City of the Mask Makers. The sun was beginning to set, submerging the city in a golden glow. He watched as Skull Warriors, Elemental Beasts, and corrupted villagers walked the streets below, their forms glowing darkly. He then looked up to the horizon, where he could see the Black Volcano blazing.

“I am the only one who can save this island,” he said to himself. “Your era is over, Ekimu. You are no longer needed. I am the one who will restore Okoto to what it is meant to be.”

Leaving the window, he walked across the room, disappearing down the stairs.

Chapter 11: Downfall

“I’m sorry,” Lewa said, “but what do you mean we have to run?”

“Yeah,” Pohatu nodded. “What’s going on?”

“My brother is coming,” Ekimu looked around. “He is paranoid and afraid. He will do anything to destroy us. We have to run.”

“What do you mean? How do you know that?” Onua asked.

“I have had a revelation,” he answered. “We are in danger, and we have to go.”

Gali raised an eyebrow. “What revelation? Did you see something through the Mask of Time?”

He sighed. “I spoke with my brother.”

The collective gasped. They couldn’t believe their ears.

“You saw Makuta?” Tahu exclaimed. “How?”

“The Mask of Time must’ve joined them,” Onua theorized.

“Is that even possible?” Pohatu asked.

“There is so much we don’t know about the Mask of Time,” the Toa of Earth replied. “It could do anything.”

“Our ancestors studied the Mask for centuries,” Vizuna said. “Its history traces back to the origins of Okoto itself. No one knows where it came from, or who forged it. It is only said to tie the past, present, and future together.”

“So you say that Makuta is unstable…” Korgot started, looking at the Mask Maker.

“...Because I saw him,” Ekimu finished.

“If you saw him… and you know he wants to come for us…” Lewa said. “Then we really do have to go.”

“I agree,” the Toa of Stone nodded.

“But where will we go?” Tahu asked. “We can’t just run without knowing where we’re going.”

Ekimu looked up. “We can go to the Labyrinth of Control!”

“What’s in the Labyrinth?” Kopaka inquired.

“Refuge. Until we are strong enough to defeat my brother, we must keep safe.”

“Hiding is not our strong suit,” Pohatu said.

“We have to,” Ekimu replied. “You six are the only hope for Okoto. We have to keep you safe.”

“So we run,” Tahu crossed his arms. “Like cowards?”

“This is our only option,” the Mask Maker affirmed.

“Maybe going to the Labyrinth isn’t such a bad idea anyway,” Gali said optimistically. “There’s so much in there that we haven’t seen! Maybe we could find something to help us defeat Makuta there!”

“Whatever we’re going to do, we should do it soon,” Narmoto readied his blades. “We shouldn’t stay here much longer.”

Tahu sighed. “Let’s go to the Labyrinth.”

---

“What is wrong, my lord?” Umarak asked as Makuta approached him.

“I am through with my brother,” he growled, his eyes flashing. “No longer shall his shadow hang over me! My brother’s time on this island is over!”

The Hunter was bewildered. “I do not understand what you mean, my master.”

He turned to him. “I mean that Ekimu must perish! His reign must be put to an end if mine is to succeed!”

“But how will you find him?”

“If we find the Creatures, we find my brother,” the Mask Hoarder replied.

Umarak looked at him before nodding.

“Yes, my lord.”

---

“How much longer until we get back to the temple, Glonor?” one villager complained.

“Another few days,” the Okotan of Ice replied.

There was a collective groan from the crowd. “How come?” another asked.

“We’re crossing the Region of Jungle – the largest region on Okoto.”

They continued walking, the massive echoing of their footsteps ringing through the jungle. There were murmurs, but nothing distinguishable. Of course, he didn’t care what they had to say. All he cared about was getting them to the temple in one piece. And that was the real task.

Glonor adjusted the compact bow he was carrying in his hands. He had modeled it after the Protector of Jungle’s Elemental Flame Bow. It didn’t channel elemental energy like the Protector’s, but it could hold an incredible amount of ammunition. Additionally, it could fire almost as fast as any of the Protector’s weapons.

There was silence for a while before someone spoke up.

“What if the Toa don’t come to rescue us?” an Okotan from the Region of Jungle said.

Another, from the Region of Earth, laughed. “You really think they’d be able to save us? They fell before Makuta as soon as he returned.”

A split second later, Glonor stopped, the large group of villagers rippling to a stop behind him. He stood there for several moments before turning to face them.

“Just because the Toa may fail to protect us does not mean we get to just lie down and let Makuta win. If the Toa fail to defeat him, it’ll be up to us to stand against him. The Toa do not define your identities. You do. We are people of Okoto, and we are its defenders.”

They all looked at him blankly, unsure of how to respond. Then one, from the Region of Stone, stepped forward.

“Well said,” she smiled. “Well said.”

She walked over to him and stood by his side, looking over the crowd.

“Glonor is right. We do have the power to fight our own battles. We are just as powerful as the Toa. We just have to trust that.”

The villagers looked at each other and nodded. Slowly, applause began to break out amongst them, before they were all clapping. Glonor and the Okotan smiled broadly.

He turned to her. “Thank you,” he said. “What is your name?”

“Cesea,” she held out her fist.

“Nice to meet you, Cesea,” he clanked it.

At that moment, a sinister chuckling began to fill the air around them. At once, Glonor readied his bow, while Cesea produced a blade. Several of the villagers drew weapons of their own. They looked around for the source of the noise, before a tall, dark figure with lines of red light flowing through his body, emerged from the shadows. They all turned on him.

He seemed very reptilian in his build: his long tail swinging behind him and his red eyes blazing behind his scaly Mask. In his clawed hand he carried a long spear with two blades on the top. On his left shoulder appeared to be Toa Tahu’s original Mask.

“Who are you?” Glonor demanded.

A smile appeared across his Mask. “They only call me Mask Snatcher.”

“Who sent you?”

“Oh,” he chuckled. “We came ourselves.”

The Okotan of Ice raised an eyebrow. “We?”

Behind them came a deafening roar. Swinging around, they saw a massive brute, covered in scaly gray and yellow armor, standing there. His long claws dangled near the ground and his horns swept backwards on his head. His red eyes blazed just as brightly as his comrade’s. Several sharp teeth filled his mouth.

There was motion to their right and they saw another figure emerging from the trees. He was clad in all black armor with hints of blue. A cape hung behind him and large spikes protruded from his heavily-armored shoulders. His Mask of Power seemed similar to Toa Kopaka’s, with a telescopic lens glowing red and seemingly scanning them. On his right arm he had a set of claws, and in his left hand he held a strange sort of blade and projectile weapon.

“What do you want from us?” Glonor said, switching his aim between them.

“Just thought we’d help out,” Mask Snatcher chuckled, his spear glowing brightly. “A lot of villagers wandering the Region of Jungle alone.”

The three began to approach the group.

---

The large group walked under the canopy of leaves and branches. Sunlight filtered between them, creating large, warm, patches of light. Ekimu led the way, followed by the Toa, then the Creatures, and the villagers, with the Protectors heading up the rear. They all had their weapons out, ready for any attack that came their way.

Birds flew through the sky overhead, happy to be in the sunlight again. Small animals bounded before them, seemingly not a care in the world.

“It’s beautiful here,” Gali said, looking at the canopy above.

“Of course it’s beautiful,” Lewa replied. “You’re in the jungle!”

She threw him an irritated glance before continuing onward.

“Just a few days ago the island was submerged in darkness,” Korgot smiled. “Now it’s as if it had never happened.”

“Makuta is still out there, of course,” Kopaka responded.

“But with you and the Creatures,” Harvali said. “Now we stand a fighting chance.”

Tahu shook his head. “We hardly stood a chance against him when he didn’t have the Mask of Ultimate Power.”

“You’re the Toa!” Takua exclaimed. “Your power is legendary!”

“Maybe,” Lewa nodded. “But the last time someone fought Makuta with that Mask, a rift was torn in time and space. We can’t do that.”

“If you stopped doubting yourselves,” Ekimu said. “Maybe you could.”

“What is that supposed to mean?”

“I mean you’re not going to be able to unlock your true potential if you continue to doubt yourselves like this,” the Mask Maker replied. “The Mask of Ultimate Power is merely a tool. You have the true power.”

“Didn’t feel that way when he banished us to the Shadow Realm,” Pohatu crossed his arms.

“And that is my fault. I did not help you when you needed it most, and that failure fell upon you,” he said. “I am sorry.”

Silence fell for a few moments before Ekimu spoke again.

“But, that is in the past. The future is before us, and you have the potential to defeat Makuta. You just have to unlock it.”

“Are you telling us that we have to believe?” Kopaka raised an eyebrow.

“Yes. In yourselves,” he replied.

The Toa of Ice chuckled. “Don’t be ridiculous.”

“I’m not,” Ekimu said sternly.

The six glanced at each other.

“How do we do that?” Gali asked.

“I’ll explain once we’re safe in the Labyrinth,” the Mask Maker answered. “There, we can practice.”

“What about the Islanders?” Onua inquired. “How will they be safe from Makuta’s reign? Is it not our job to protect them?”

“It is your job to defeat Makuta, and by doing that, you will protect the Islanders.”

“But what if we’re too late in saving them before Makuta destroys them?” Tahu said slowly.

“Then we will avenge their deaths,” Ekimu replied darkly.

The group fell silent at his words. Uneasily, they continued their march through the forest.

---

“They are still in the jungle, my lord,” Umarak said, opening his eyes. The glow from his mask disappeared.

“Do you know where?” he demanded.

“In the southeast. I do not know exactly where,” the Hunter replied.

His eyes flashed. “There are seven Creatures. You should be able to find them without issue!”

“It’s not that easy!” Umarak shot back. “Just because I can sense their energy does not mean I can track them across the island!”

Makuta turned away, obviously irritated. His servants watched as he paced around the room before returning to the Hunter.

“What would you need to be able to track them across the island?” he asked.

He thought for a moment. “I don’t know. More power, perhaps?”

A smile appeared behind the Mask of Ultimate Power. “Then you shall have it.”

Umarak raised an eyebrow before the titan raised his left hand. His fingers glowed before a ball of dark energy appeared in his palm. The Hunter was about to say something when he suddenly keeled over, crying in pain. His armor began to glow as his body shook violently. Skull Basher’s eyes widened as he watched as Umarak fell to the ground, screaming in agony. Makuta’s smile grew as he watched his servant.

And then, as soon as it started, it stopped. Makuta dropped his arm, and the light faded. Slowly, Umarak pushed himself off the ground, his eyes blazing.

“What,” he looked at the titan. “WAS THAT?!”

“You said you needed more power,” the Mask Hoarder said, still smiling. “I granted your wish.”

“What-?” he began but was cut off.

“Track the Creatures. Now.”

He looked at him a moment before nodding. Turning away, he closed his eyes, and concentrated.

It was different this time. Usually, he could just see glimpses of where the Creatures were. Fragments of what they could see. This however, was something completely different. It was like he was the Creatures. He could not only see what they saw, but he could hear what they heard, and he could sense their thoughts.

Around him, he could see the six Toa and the six Protectors. He could also see several Okotans. In front of them all was Ekimu.

“What do you think is in the Labyrinth?” one of the Okotans, a young villager from the Region of Jungle asked another. She was older, carrying a bag and a strange spear with her. She looked at him.

“I don’t know. All I know is that it’s dangerous if you don’t know what you’re doing.”

“Do you think we’ll be okay?” the boy asked, concerned.

She smiled. “Of course we will.”

Umarak smiled.

Opening his eyes, he looked to his master.

“I have them.”

---

They had been trekking through the forest when Ekimu and the Creatures suddenly came to a stop. The rest of the group stopped behind them. They looked at the eight, confused.

“Uh, Ekimu?” Kopaka said. “Are you alright?”

But he didn’t seem to hear him. He, and the Creatures, were looking around, as if watching for something. The trees rustled as the wind blew. As they stood there, the atmosphere seemed to change. Dark clouds rolled in overhead, extinguishing the sun. A cold front moved upon them, chilling them to the bone.

Ekimu reached to his back and grabbed his hammer and shield. Instinctively, the Toa readied their own weapons.

“What’s happening?” Nilkuu asked.

“I don’t know,” Tahu replied. “But be ready.”

“For what?” Kivoda raised an eyebrow.

Tahu looked grim. “To fight.”

The Protectors’ eyes widened as they glanced at each other before readying their own weapons. The Okotans drew tools as well.

“What’s going on?” Jaller said.

“My brother,” Ekimu muttered. “He’s coming.”

They had all known this, but they had not wanted to hear it. Involuntarily, they tensed, their senses becoming sharper. The weapons of the Okotans and Protectors shook slightly, while the Toa stood firm.

Pohatu stepped forward. “What is our plan?”

The Mask Maker stayed silent, merely staring dead ahead.

“Ekimu!” he said, irritated. “What is the plan?”

Slowly, Ekimu turned towards them. He seemed to be coming back to reality.

“We need to face him,” he answered, his eyes glowing with determination.

“What?!” the group exclaimed.

“He obviously followed us here,” the Mask Maker explained. “If we run, he’ll just track us again. We have to fight.”

“How will we stand a chance against him without the Creatures and understanding our new powers?” Gali said desperately.

“We’ll do the best we can,” Onua put his hand on her shoulder.

“We have to,” Tahu said. “Because this is where it ends.”

Silence hung in the air for a moment before the others nodded. The Protectors did also. The Creatures chirped.

Narmoto turned to the Okotans. “You have to take cover.”

Harvali shook her head. “We’re not doing that.”

“You have to,” the Protector of Fire insisted.

“We can fight,” Hewkii said. “We’re not going to stay on the sidelines.”

“This is not up for discussion!” Izotor hissed.

Vizuna suddenly held up his hand. “Quiet.”

“What is it, brother?” Korgot asked.

“I’m getting something,” he said, closing his eyes.

“Your sensory tails?” Kivoda’s eyes widened. “What can you see?”

The Protector of Jungle stood still for a moment before his eyes shot open. He swung around and aimed his bow to an open patch of land, in the direction of the Labyrinth of Control. The others, following his lead, watched the clearing with their weapons raised.

Several seconds passed with nothing happening. Their eyes were fixed on the opening, waiting for whatever Vizuna had seen. After a minute, a few of them began to grow doubtful. But, just as one of them was about to complain, the wind changed direction, and a distant sound like thunder echoed in their ears.

“Ready,” Ekimu said. “He’s here.”

As soon as the words left his lips, a ball of swirling energy suddenly appeared above the patch. It shimmered as it radiated six different colors. It then began to grow before exploding open into a ring of raw energy. A gust of air flew from it, causing them to step back slightly.

Makuta emerged through the portal first, followed by Skull Basher, Umarak, several Elemental Beasts, Skull Warriors, and Skull Scorpios.

The titan chuckled. “Good to see you all here. Have you been waiting long?”

“Enough is enough, brother,” Ekimu said. “This ends today.”

“Are you sure you want that?” he raised his eyebrow. “It will mean an end to your order. Of course, that’s what I want.”

“The only thing that’s ending today is your reign of shadows,” he replied.

He raised his staff, which flickered with energy as the prongs spun. “Is that so?”

Ekimu’s grip tightened on his weapons. “Yes. It is.”

Makuta smiled. “Then let’s end it.”

Without warning, the titan thrust his weapon forward. A blast of raw energy flew from it.

“DUCK!” Tahu yelled as he and the rest of the group dove out of the way. The blast struck where they had been standing, completely obliterating it. Dirt fell through the air like snow. Pushing themselves up, they quickly unleashed their own blasts of energy at their attackers.

Flexing his fingers, they flashed with purple light before a wall of earth rose in front of Makuta’s forces to meet their attacks. They battered against it, light appearing in the gaps. Seeing this, the Toa, Creatures, and Protectors stopped. Suddenly he thrust his hand forward and the wall blasted apart and came flying at them in chunks.

They were about to duck when Onua, Terak, and Korgot stepped forward. Onua and Korgot’s hands flashed with energy and Terak’s claws glowed. At once the chunks of earth came to a stop in midair. Pushing their hands forward, they reversed and returned to their sender, at the same speed as they had been sent.

The titan, however, simply waved his hand and the blocks of dirt disappeared. He narrowed his eyes at the group.

“Attack.”

At once, his servants charged forward. Raising their weapons, the Toa ran forth, followed by the Elemental Creatures and the Protectors. The beasts roared as they clashed with the heroes. Sparks of energy flew into the air as they fought.

Tahu swung his blades at two Skull Warriors. With remarkable agility, they ducked under them and simultaneously drew and fired their Freeze Bows at the Toa of Fire. The blasts of ice struck him, freezing his armor and sending him falling backwards. Using his power, he melted the ice and got to his feet.

“The Skull Warriors are much more agile now!” he called to his fellow Toa.

And, as the others were finding, all of Makuta’s forces were better equipped than they had been in their previous encounters. Now, they may actually stand a chance against the Toa.

“Yeah,” Lewa said, ducking under the swinging arm of a Quake Beast. “Someone’s given them some lessons!”

He slammed his ax into the ground. The beast looked at him for a moment when thorn-covered vines crawled from the ground and began to consume it. It roared and tried to strike them, but was quickly entwined and fell to the ground, incapacitated.

“With Makuta on our plain,” Onua smashed several Skull Warriors with his hammer. “His dark energy is stronger and is giving them strength!”

Gali unleashed a powerful blast of water at two Lava Beasts, who fired twin jets of lava to meet it. They crashed in midair, steam spreading like fog. She dug her feet into the ground in an attempt to keep herself steady. She pushed harder with her weapon, desperately trying to get the upper hand.

“That is not helping!” she said.

To her left, Kopaka chuckled heartily. “I’m not having a problem!”

He threw his sword through the chest of a Skull Warrior. Swinging around, he raised his shield as a Storm Beast unleashed a bolt of electricity on him. He moved out of the way and fired several blasts of ice at it. It was struck by them, sending it crashing to the ground. Behind him, a Quake Beast brought its spiked hand down on him. He turned and brought up his shield, sparks flying as the two met.

Pohatu dove out of the way of one of the two Skull Scorpio tails that snapped at him. Landing, he readied his hammers as the skeletal creatures skittered towards him. Activating the sandstone blasters attached to the heads of his hammer weapons, he smiled as they began to rotate before powerful blasts of stone came flying from them. They struck the Scorpios, sending them skidding backwards. To his right, two more were approaching.

“I hate Scorpios,” he muttered.

Readying his hammer, Onua was facing off against Skull Basher. The titan twirled his axes as he growled at the Toa of Earth. Holding his ground, he narrowed his eyes. The warrior chuckled.

“I bested you before at the entrance of the Forge of Makuta and I can do it again!” he bellowed.

“’Forge of Makuta’?” Onua raised an eyebrow. “How far gone are you?”

“You’re the one who is too far gone, Toa. You’re irrelevant. The Age of Ekimu is over. The Age of Makuta has come.”

“Not while I’m still alive,” he retorted.

A smile appeared behind his skeletal Mask. “Then let’s put an end to that.”

Surprising for his height and weight, Skull Basher lunged forward at him. Onua brought up his hammer and blocked his twin axes as they came down on him. Sparks flew as they met. Their arms shook as they pushed against one other, trying to get the upper hand.

“You cannot win, Toa!” the leader of the Skull Raiders spat. “Makuta has won! It is over for you!”

He shook his head. “No. It’s not over.”

At once, two elemental blasters unfolded from panels under Onua’s shoulders. They aimed themselves at Skull Basher’s face and began to spin. His eyes widened before he was suddenly struck in the face by a barrage of projectiles. He flew across the length of the clearing and crashed through a tree.

Onua chuckled, looking in surprise at the blasters as their barrels came to a halt. “I guess I win.”

The Protectors were fighting off the Skull Warriors and Elemental Beasts, exhausting not only themselves, but their ammunition.

“I’m almost out!” Kivoda cried as his weapon began to shudder.

“Mine too!” Korgot said, smashing a Skull Warrior in the face with her Star Drill.

“Just keep fighting!” Narmoto slammed one of his flame blades into the chest of a Storm Beast. “As long as you can!”

Obediently, the five Protectors followed their leader as they continued fighting against Makuta’s army. They rushed forth, using their weapons in close-combat against their opponents.

In another part of the battle, Umarak was approaching the seven Elemental Creatures. They growled and hissed as he got closer. He held his bow in hand.

“For the entire history of Okoto,” the Hunter said. “I have hunted you. Now, that hunt is over, and you’re mine.”

They hissed at him in response, taking up defensive positions. Their forms lit up, elemental energy crackling around them. Ombra took the lead, pawing the ground as energy crackled in its mouth. Umarak’s eyes widened before a blast of pure shadow shot from the Creature’s jaw. He jumped out of the way just as it passed by him.

Getting up, he readied his weapon and fired. Multi-elemental blasts flew from it, exploding violently when they hit the ground. The Creatures jumped out of the way and charged at the Hunter. He continued firing at them, and they in return unleashed blasts of energy at him. He attempted to dodge them, but could not, and was struck with the full force of their attacks.

Falling backwards, he called upon his Mask of Shadows and disappeared through a patch of darkness. He immediately reappeared behind them. Using his bow, he created a dozen Shadow Traps of various elements. The Creatures turned as the traps swarmed them.

“You can’t best me that easily,” he chuckled as the Elemental Creatures struggled to fight off his Shadow Traps. “Not me.”

---

All the while, Ekimu and Makuta were facing off in the midst of the battle. Both had their weapons drawn, but neither moved to strike.

“Your reign is over, Ekimu,” the titan growled. “I am the rightful ruler of Okoto.”

“Nobody is the ruler of Okoto, brother,” the Mask Maker replied. “Our people are not to be ruled. They are to be guided and protected.”

“Maybe that is why everything fell apart before,” he pondered. “Because they can’t be trusted with their own destinies.”

“You know that is not true in the slightest,” Ekimu stepped forward. “Everything fell apart because you created that Forbidden Mask.”

Tilting his head back, Makuta let out a roaring laugh. “I was going to help our people. You prevented that, and damned them to thousands of years of suffering.”

“I’m not proud of that day, but you cannot blame me for your betrayal.”

“Yes, in fact, I can. Do you not remember your own Forbidden Mask?”

Ekimu nodded. “What I did was foolish and treacherous. I was young and ambitious. I wanted to improve our island. Yours was born out of jealousy and anger. Perhaps, if you heart had been pure, that day would have turned out differently.”

He looked at his brother. “But, your heart was not.”

“My heart was impure?” Makuta’s eyes flashed. “How dare you!”

“Tell me, brother,” Ekimu said. “Why do you think Ombra has returned?”

The titan glanced to the Creature of Shadow fighting Umarak amongst the other Creatures.

“It is because of an imbalance,” he continued. “An imbalance created by you. Your presence, your giving Agil to Umarak, has created an imbalance. Ombra is here to make it right.”

“The Toa of Shadow is dead,” his voice trembled. “That era is over.”

“No,” Ekimu attached his hammer and shield to his back. “It is your future. Our future.”

The Mask Maker walked towards his brother, placing his weapons on his back again. The titan’s grip on his weapon tightened, but he did not move. Ekimu stopped a few feet before him.

“Please, Makuta,” he said softly. “It doesn’t have to be this way. Let us put our envy and strife aside, and work together. We can restore Okoto to its golden age. We can heal this broken land. But, we need to be together. Together, or not at all.”

He held out his hand. The Mask Hoarder looked down at it, a dozen thoughts going through his head. He thought of everything he and Ekimu had done before the fall; the prosperity of the island and it’s people. They had been brothers. But, that had all changed at the Festival of Masks. That had all changed that fateful day.

The day he had been betrayed.

Makuta let out a deep breath. “No,” he muttered.

“What?” Ekimu’s expression dropped.

“I said no,” the titan said, louder.

Energy flickered around Makuta’s weapon as the three prongs began to rotate. The Mask Maker took a step back. His hands slowly began to reach behind his back for his weapons.

“For too long I have had to live in your shadow,” the Mask Hoarder bellowed, taking a step forward. “Today, I shall rid myself of you, once and for all.”

“Brother, please-,” Ekimu drew his hammer and shield.

“Goodbye, Ekimu,” Makuta said.

A split second later the titan thrust his weapon forward. There was a flash before a powerful, devastating bolt of energy shot forward. It rocketed through the air like lightning at the Mask Maker. He could only bring up his shield as it approached. A fraction of a second later, it hit.

Then there was a massive flash of light. Everyone turned to see it before they were consumed by the blinding white.

Across Okoto, the light shone. Shadows stretched across the ground from it; dark corners were lit. It was as if a star had exploded on the island.

Then it faded.

And there was darkness.

---

Harvali pushed herself off the ground. Her head spun and her ears rang. Looking around, she saw that everyone else was lying on the ground. The Elemental Beasts were nowhere to be seen, and the Skull Creatures had been blown apart by the blast. The Toa, Protectors, Creatures, Umarak, Skull Basher, and Makuta, were all unconscious.

Getting to her feet, she looked around. Bingzak and the others were lying beside her, also knocked out. Quickly, she moved to help them when someone called to her.

“Harvali…”

Turning around, she saw Ekimu lying on the ground a few paces from her. Leaving the others, she ran over to him. She stopped when she saw him.

The blast had obliterated his left side. His armor was covered in burn marks and was disintegrating before her eyes. His hammer lay in fragments a few feet from him. The Mask of Creation was in his remaining hand.

Kneeling beside him, she put her hand on his shoulder. He looked at her with his flickering blue eyes.

“Harvali…” he said again. “My time has come…”

Tears welled up in her eyes. She began sobbed, but he stopped her.

“Do not mourn for me…” Ekimu smiled weakly. “The sun has to set eventually. But, while there may be night, there will be day again.”

With great effort, he lifted the Mask of Creation up and pushed it towards her. Harvali looked at it with confusion.

“Take it,” he said. “Destiny calls to you.”

Looking at him, she took the Mask in hand. When she did, the runes on it glowed blue before turning green, then going out entirely.

“What do you want me to do?” Harvali asked, her voice creaking with sadness.

“You’ll find it when you’re ready, my child,” Ekimu said. “Destiny awaits. Do not fear the night; without the night, there would be no day. Remember that. Remember…”

His eyes flickered for a moment, and leaning his head back, they went out. And then he was gone.

Chapter 12: Changing of the Guard

Thousands of years ago.

Ekimu watched as the Mask Maker lay on his deathbed. The six elemental Protectors and Okotans of various tribes were gathered around. Unmoving, he knew the old man had only moments left. How did he know that? It was like he was… connected with him. But that didn’t make sense. It couldn’t make sense.

A second later the Mask Maker’s eyes flared into life and came to rest on the villager of the Region of Water standing in the doorway to the chamber.

“It’s okay,” he said weakly. “Come.”

Hesitantly, he approached. He could hear the rattling breath of the dying Okotan as he did. Coming to his bedside, the weak figure pushed himself up to speak to him. But, all he could muster was a whisper.

“I have prepared you as much as I can for what happens next,” Barua struggled to say. “My destiny is now yours.”

Raising his hands to his face, he detached his golden Mask and handed it to Ekimu. His hands trembled as the Okotan took it from the Mask Maker. With one last look at his successor, Barua laid back on his bed, and with an arrested breath, he exhaled, and closing his eyes, he was gone. Silence hung in the air as the other Okotans stood silent. An unnatural silence.

After a few moments, the Protectors came over to Ekimu.

“Come,” the Protector of Ice said. “It’s time to go.”

Still feeling uneasy, Ekimu nodded, and was led out of the chamber by the elders. They led him through the Temple of Creation towards the spiral staircase that led to the forge. Ascending, he glimpsed the large fire pit burning in the center of the room before they continued upwards. They came into a large room with hundreds of objects and relics displayed on pedestals.

Stepping off the stairs, they walked between the displays for a while before stopping in front of an ornate carving on the back wall. The Okotan looked in awe at it when he noticed that the golden Mask of Power in his hand was glowing. He held it up to examine it when there was a flash of light behind him.

Turning around, he saw a golden hawk sitting on one of the displays; its form glittering just like the Mask. It looked at him, and he at it. Somehow, he felt connected to this creature.

“Ekimu, of the Region of Water,” the Protector of Fire stepped forth. “You have been chosen by Barua, the Mask Maker, to succeed him as the Toa of Light.”

The villager was shaking as these words were spoken. He knew that this had been coming, but he hadn’t been ready for it. How could he? Barua had said that he was to protect the entire island. The responsibility seemed too great.

Jumping down from its perch, the hawk came to stand at his feet and looked up at him. He, in turn, looked down at it. Its blue eyes seemed to peer into him, and he into it. Suddenly, in his mind, he saw a vision of the carving behind him splitting down the middle and sliding open to reveal a shining light.

A second later the vision was gone, and, inexplicably, he knew what to do. Turning towards the carving, he raised his hand towards it. As he did, his hand began to glow, and so did the carving. Stepping up to it, he placed his hand on it, on the whole picture lit up. This was followed by a line appearing down the middle before the whole thing split open to reveal a chamber full of shining crystals.

He looked back the Protectors, who nodded. He then looked to the creature, who was looking eagerly at him. Smiling, he reached up and pulled off his Mask and replaced it with the golden Mask he had been given. A rush of power flew through him. Reeling, he managed to regain his footing as the rush of power subsided.

Looking up again at the chamber, Ekimu straightened, and without looking back, walked into the light.

---

He was gone.

Harvali sat on the ground next to the fallen Mask Maker, sobbing uncontrollably. Tears dripped from the slits in her Mask of Power. The Mask of Creation lay in the grass a few feet away. She continued to cry, feeling like she could never stop.

Slowly, the others around her began to stir. Pushing himself off the ground, Tahu looked around the clearing. He saw his fellow Toa were also getting up. The Toa of Fire could see the Creatures, Okotans, and Protectors still laying unconscious on the ground. Among them were also the Skull Warriors, Skull Scorpios, Skull Basher, Umarak, and Makuta himself. The Elemental Beasts had evidently been destroyed in the blast.

Getting to their feet, the Toa readied their weapons when they heard crying. Turning, they saw Harvali on the ground, sobbing over a figure clad in gold and blue armor.

Their eyes widened as they realized who it was.

“Ekimu!” the Toa rushed over to them. Her eyes full of tears, Harvali looked up at them before continuing to sob.

The Mask Maker lay there, unmoving. No breath came into or exited his lungs. It was clear as day what had happened, but they didn’t want to believe it. They couldn’t believe it.

“Is he…?” Kopaka trailed off.

The archeologist continued to cry.

“He is,” Pohatu nodded, his voice oddly constrained.

Silence filled the air like water in a stream. Not even the jungle seemed to make a noise at the revelation. Ekimu was dead, and it was as if the entire island was mourning.

Behind them, the Protectors, Okotans, and Creatures got up. They looked around the area before seeing the Toa huddled around some unseen thing. Together, the group got up and made their way over to them.

“What happened?” Kivoda held his head. “What’s going on-.”

He and the others stopped dead in their tracks when they saw the Mask Maker laying lifeless on the ground. A chill flew through them, as if they had all immediately been transported to the Region of Ice.

“No…” Izotor said. “No… This can’t be happening. It can’t.”

Like the Toa, the Protectors and Okotans fell silent. The seven Creatures all bowed their heads in apparent sadness. The silence hung in the air between them for a long time before Lewa managed to muster the courage to speak.

“What… What do we do now?”

“Ekimu’s dead,” Korgot replied. “There’s nothing too do.”

Nilkuu looked at her. “There has to be something-.”

“There isn’t,” she cut him off. “This is the end of the road.”

Tahu turned to her. “No. It’s not.”

Everyone looked at him. Even Harvali managed to stop crying to look up at the Toa.

The Protector of Earth looked at him. “What? What do you mean?”

“This is not the end of the road,” Tahu said. “I will not allow this to be the end.”

“Brother…” Onua began.

“No!” he snapped. “We cannot let Ekimu’s death control us like this! That’s not what he would’ve wanted! We have to press on! There is more at stake than just him; the entire island is at stake. We have a duty to fulfill.”

“But without Ekimu…” Lewa said.

“We will manage. We have to,” Tahu affirmatively said.

To their right, Makuta began to stir, as did his minions. The Protectors drew their weapons.

“Then let’s end it here,” Kivoda raised his Torpedo Blaster.

“We can’t!” Onua exclaimed. “We’ll be slaughtered!”

Korgot swung around to look at him. “What do we do, then?”

Tahu’s eyes flashed. “We run.”

“Run?” she repeated. “Run where?”

“The Region of Earth,” he replied. “We can’t stay here. Makuta is too powerful to take on here and now. We need to regroup. Make a plan for our next attack. We took a heavy loss here. Let us not lose anything more.”

Silence fell again, while Makuta began to move more and more. Narmoto, after a few moments, nodded.

“Let’s go.”

They all looked at him, and together, nodded their affirmation. Quickly, the Protector of Fire reached down and grabbed the Mask of Control and the Mask of Time from Ekimu’s body, as well as grabbing the Mask of Creation. Harvali was still crying when they helped her up and led her away from the body.

Then, moving through the tall bushes, they were gone.

---

Makuta awoke with a start. The last thing he remembered was everything turning white around him. Pushing himself off the ground, he saw that his minions were unconscious, but beginning to stir. He also noticed that the Toa, Okotans, and Creatures were gone.

Getting to his feet, he grabbed his weapon and looked around the clearing for a trace of them, but they were nowhere to be found. Anger billowed up inside him. The three prongs of his weapon began to turn before he fired a blast of elemental energy into the sky, roaring with rage.

A few minutes later he stopped and left his arm drop to his side, the weapon still glowing brightly. The titan was breathing heavily. To his right, Skull Basher was approaching him. He and the others had awoken and had watched their master.

“My lord Makuta?” he asked hesitantly.

The titan turned towards him, his eyes blazing.

“What is it?”

“We found one of them,” Skull Basher said, turning around. Makuta followed his gaze and saw a gold and blue figure lying on the ground.

His eyes widened before he rushed over to the fallen Mask Maker. Stopping a foot away, he looked down at the body.

“Brother…” the words escaped his lips.

“He’s dead,” Umarak began. “We checked. The Mask Maker is no more.”

Glee filled the titan before he realized that the three legendary Masks of Power that Ekimu had had were gone. Looking around, he quickly realized what had happened.

“The Toa,” he said. “They took the Masks of Power.”

“We will find them, my lord,” Skull Basher replied.

“Yes… they must be found…” Makuta trailed off before laughing madly. His minions looked at him with confused looks on their faces.

“Are you okay?” Umarak asked.

He continued to laugh before regaining himself. “Ekimu is dead,” he said. “My brother – one of the few standing in my way – is gone, and gone forever! Victory is mine!”

“You still want us to find the Toa?” Skull Basher inquired.

The titan nodded. “I need the Masks, yes, but without Ekimu – their messiah – they are defenseless. They will be broken. Shattered. It should be easy destroying them. It will be easy destroying them.”

He indicated Umarak, who nodded. He choose a few Skull Warriors and Skull Scorpios before he headed into the forest, where several bushes had evidently been pushed through. Skull Basher moved to follow when the titan stopped him.

“No. You will return to the City with me.”

“But, my lord-,” he tried to argue.

“My word is final,” Makuta’s eyes flashed.

Skull Basher looked at him. “Yes, my lord.”

Makuta turned watched the group go before activating the Mask of Ultimate Power. A portal appeared to his left and, with Skull Basher and his remaining forces joining him, stepped through the rift.

---

“Who are you?” Glonor demanded as he aimed his bow at the newcomer.

The scaly newcomer looked at him with his blazing red eyes, but did not speak. Mask Snatcher looked at him before chuckling.

“Oh yes,” he said. “This is Rock Crusher. He doesn’t speak.”

Rock Crusher growled.

“He does growl, though,” he added.

The caped arrival continued to silently scan them with his telescopic lens before opening his mouth to speak.

“I am Morvarid,” the figure’s filtered voice rang in their ears. “Do not try to flee.”

“What do you want from us?” Cesea pointed her blades at them.

“Like I said,” Mask Snatcher smiled, his rusting teeth exposed. “To help.”

“Well,” Glonor’s grip on his bow tightened. “You’re totally doing a good job of giving the impression that you’re not a threat.”

“Thank you.”

The Okotan rolled his eyes. “That was sarcasm.”

Mask Snatcher chuckled. “I know.”

“We don’t want, or need, your help,” Cesea said.

“You don’t have that option, Okotan,” Morvarid replied, raising his weapon. A ball of blue energy suddenly appeared between the prongs, flickering slightly.

“This is really an ‘all or nothing’ kind of scenario here,” Mask Snatcher explained, readying his own weapon.

Glonor’s look became defiant. “Well, I’m going to go with nothing.”

In the blink of an eye, he fired his weapon several times. Each blast struck one of the three figures, ice growing on their armor. They tried to move forward at the Okotans, but found that their joints were frozen in place.

Moments later, he ceased his attack, and looked at his handiwork. The three struggled to free themselves, but found that they couldn’t. Rock Crusher roared his dismay while the other two tried to reason with the Okotans.

“You really don’t want to do this,” Mask Snatcher said. “This will not end in your favor.”

“Let us go before this gets worse for you,” Morvarid growled.

“I don’t respond well to threats,” Glonor replied. “So I recommend that it is in your best interests’ to shut up.”

“Foolish peasant!” the caped figure snapped before Mask Snatcher cut across him.

“You have five seconds to set us free, or we’re going destroy you all instead of taking you.”

“’Take us’? What do you mean?” Cesea asked.

“Five,” Mask Snatcher began to count.

“Tell me what you mean,” the Okotan insisted.

“Four,” he continued.

She became irritated. “Tell me what you mean!”

He disregarded her. “Three.”

Rock Crusher growled before the ice around his body began to crack. Morvarid followed too as his own casing fractured. Steam began to rise from Mask Snatcher’s prison as he continued to count down.

“Glonor,” Cesea said as the dozens of Okotans began to back up.

“Two,” Mask Snatcher smiled.

“Yeah?” he said distantly, holding his weapon up.

“One.”

“RUN!” Cesea yelled to the caravan.

Ice exploded off the three warriors as they lunged at Glonor. Activating his weapon, he unleashed dozens of ice projectiles at them. Behind him, the large crowd of Okotans turned and ran from the scene. Cesea, and a few others, stayed behind and went to help Glonor. He was overwhelmed as the three pushed their way through his attacks.

Coming to his aid, the four Okotans swung their weapons at the legs of the three beings. Not expecting the attack, their knees buckled as they were struck, disabling them for a moment. That moment was long enough, however, for Glonor to blast each of them in the face with his weapon. This caused them to fall backwards and hit the ground, hard.

“Go!” Glonor called as he and the others turned to run when they were suddenly struck by a blast of energy. They flew into the dirt, the shock rippling through their bodies.

Managing the strength to roll over, Glonor looked up and saw the three standing over them.

“Nice try,” Mask Snatcher smiled. “But we’re not done with you yet.”

---

Their footsteps crunched as the group made their way through the forest. They felt empty inside. Ekimu, their leader, their mentor, their friend, was dead. He had died at his own brother’s hand, and there had been nothing they could have done about it.

There is always something that could be done, a voice echoed in the Toa of Fire’s head.

No. You did all you could, another, softer voice said.

He needed help! the first one cried. You should’ve been by his side!

You were surrounded. There was nothing to be done. Makuta had too much power on his side.

Ekimu died because of you! the harsh voice snapped.

You can’t save everyone.

Shaking his head, Tahu looked up at the sky. It had darkened significantly. This was odd, as he knew for a fact that it was only midday. It seemed that the sun itself was darker; not just a haze or cloud. Everything was growing darker.

The others noticed it, too.

“What’s wrong with the sky?” Bingzak asked.

They all stopped and looked up at the sky.

“It’s nearly noon,” Kopaka said. “How can it be dark out already?”

“Ekimu,” Vizuna replied. “Ekimu and Agil. They represented light, and now they’re gone, and so the light is also.”

“Is that possible?” Tahu asked.

The Protector of Jungle nodded. “Entirely.”

“We are truly dead, then,” Korgot muttered, lowering her head.

Nilkuu looked at her. “What? You can’t mean that, sister.”

“I do,” she replied. “Ekimu was our leader, and now he’s dead. I said it before and I’ll say it again: we’re done. All we can do now is run from Makuta, and I don’t even know how long we can do that. I mean, even the sky is dying! Everything is ending.”

“Stop this!” Tahu snapped. “You are letting your emotions get the best of you! You are letting them dilute our true purpose!”

“And what is that?” Korgot asked.

“To save Okoto,” the Toa of Fire answered. “Ekimu was not our purpose. He was never supposed to be. Our purpose, and his also, was to defend and save Okoto; to push back the dark. Our destiny does, and should not, rest in the hands of Ekimu. It rests in all of us. We are the only thing standing between the villagers and the dark.

“Indeed, we have suffered a great loss. Our mentor and friend has died, but that should not define us. His life and death are not the beginning and end of our story. Our story is still going. We have experienced suffering, yes, but we will rise up again, because we are the defenders of Okoto.”

Silence fell after he finished speaking. They were stunned. Tahu had always seemed to be the hothead of the Toa, only worried about his own glory. But now, he had changed. He spoke with remarkable wisdom and courage. He had grown much in the past year, and frankly, they were impressed.

“Wow,” Lewa said. “I was not expecting that.”

“Nor was I,” added Onua.

“I honestly didn’t think you had it in you,” Kopaka looked shocked.

“Good job, brother,” Gali replied.

“Well done,” Pohatu crossed his arms and smiled.

The Protectors and Okotans were speechless. Slowly, Korgot nodded.

“Okay,” she said, obviously unable to come up with a counter-argument. “Okay,” she repeated, nodding.

“Now,” the Toa of Fire began, internally pleased with himself. “I don’t want to hear any more complaining. We still have a journey ahead of us, and I don’t want to hear any more complaining. Let’s just get to the Region of Earth so we can plan our next move.”

They nodded, and Kopaka smiled. “Lead the way, firespitter.”

He returned the smile, and turning around, began his march deeper into the forest. The others followed. As they walked, Harvali, clutching the Mask of Creation, watched the ground.

---

After night had truly fallen, they had set up camp under a particularly large tree in the Region of Jungle. The night seemed strangely darker than Harvali remembered, but she realized that this was probably also a consequence of Ekimu’s death.

It had taken her a long time to fall asleep. She laid on the ground for probably three hours before managing to drift off to sleep, watching the stars twinkling dimly in the black sky. But, she did sleep.

At least, for a little while.

She was standing in an infinite abyss of white. Looking down, she saw that shallow water was pooled around her feet. Hesitantly, she took a step forward. Her foot splashed in the water and echoed through the void.

“Hello?” Harvali called.

There was no reply. For a moment, she stayed where she was. Then, her curiosity got the better of her. So, she continued to walk forward. Her footsteps continued continued to splash in the water and echo in her ears. But, the further she walked, the same everything stayed. Nothing changed. Everything was solid white.

Stopping, she looked around. There was nothing here. What was this?

“Hello, Harvali.”

The voice came from behind her. Swinging around, she couldn’t believe her eyes.

“Welcome,” Ekimu said, smiling at her.

“Ekimu?” she gasped.

He nodded. “Yes. It’s me.”

She couldn’t believe her eyes. “How are you here?”

The Mask Maker stepped towards her. “Because our destinies our intertwined.”

“’Intertwined?’ What do you mean?”

“I mean,” he said. “That you’re going to be the next Toa of Light.”

“What?” Harvali was dumbfounded.

“Destiny has called you, my daughter, to succeed me as the Toa of Light and defender of Okoto. It is a sacred honor, and one that I can only entrust to you.”

“Why me?”

Ekimu smiled. “Because. I can see it in your eyes.”

She stayed quiet for a moment. “What am I supposed to do?”

“You are to inherit my power.”

“How?”

“I don’t know. But I know that it is your duty, and your destiny, to become the Toa of Light, to face my brother, and to save the island.”

Then, before her eyes, he began to fade away, his form dissolving into the white.

“Wait!” she cried, but he was gone.

---

The Okotan woke with a start.

Pushing herself off the ground, she was breathing heavily. Had it just been a dream? That was the only logical conclusion. But, she felt that it wasn’t just a dream.

After a moment, she noticed a faint green light glistening from under her bag. Slowly, she reached for it. Pulling her bag up, her eyes widened. The runes on the Mask of Creation were shining with a green glow.

Lewa, who had been on watch, noticed that Harvali awake.

“Are you okay, Harvali?” he asked, before he noticed the light also.

He quickly made his way over.

“What is that?” Lewa said.

She continued to stare at it. “Destiny,” she said, quietly.

Chapter 13: The Only Light in the Darkness

“Tahu!” Lewa shook his brother as he lay on the ground. “Wake up!”

The Toa of Fire stirred. “What is it?” he said sleepily.

“Come on! Get up!” the Toa of Jungle kicked him.

Quickly, Tahu got to his feet, fire burning in his eyes. “What was that for-?”

He stopped when he noticed that the others were also awake. But, he saw that they were not looking at him. Instead, they were gathered around some unseen thing. He could see a green light pulsating from between the gaps in the crowd. As he approached, they turned towards him. Stepping away, they revealed what was casting the glow. Tahu stopped in his tracks when he saw it.

Harvali was standing there with the Mask of Creation in her hands, its runes shining with green light. She looked up at the Toa as he gaped at the sight.

“What… what’s happening?” he asked.

“I don’t know,” the archeologist said. “But it happened after a dream I had.”

“A dream?”

Kopaka turned to answer. “She says she saw Ekimu.”

“You saw Ekimu?” Tahu asked her.

She nodded. “It sounds crazy, but I know what I saw.”

“What happened in the dream?” the Toa of Fire said. “Did he say anything?”

“He appeared to me in a white void,” Harvali recounted. “He told me that I was to succeed him as the Toa of Light, and that it was my destiny to defeat Makuta.”

Tahu was shocked. “How could this happen?”

“It is possible that Ekimu’s spirit is communicating to her from another plain, using the Mask of Creation as a bridge,” Onua answered.

“Can that happen?” Tahu raised an eyebrow.

“It can,” Gali nodded.. “We saw this when we first entered the City of the Mask Makers, remember? Ekimu contacted us from the Shadow Realm using our Masks of Power. Wherever his spirit is, he must be contacting Harvali the same way.”

“It wouldn’t be the strangest thing we’ve seen,” Pohatu crossed his arms.

“So what does this dream – or vision – mean?” Tahu asked.

“Well, obviously, it means that Harvali needs to become the Toa of Light,” Kopaka replied.

“And how does she do that?”

The Toa of Ice shook his head. “We don’t know yet.”

“Why wouldn’t Ekimu give you instructions?” Tahu turned back to Harvali.

“I wish I knew.”

Bingzak spoke up. “I thought Ekimu was the only Toa of Light.”

“Legend has it that the Toa of Light is a legendary defender of Okoto,” Izotor said. “It never said he was the only one.”

“We need to find out more about the Toa of Light,” Kivoda joined the conversation. “But how?”

Lewa chuckled. “Too bad there isn’t a convenient book about this stuff.”

Narmoto was stroking his chin before looking up. “Actually, there might be.”

Everyone turned to the Protector of Fire.

“What?” Korgot asked.

“There’s an old sage who lives in the Region of Fire. Glaruu. A bit strange, and possibly a little mad, but if anyone has answers, it’s her.”

“Do you know where she lives?” Kopaka inquired.

The Protector smiled. “I wouldn’t be telling you if I didn’t.”

Tahu nodded, and picking up his blades, turned to the group. “Then that’s where we go. We don’t have any time to lose, so let’s get moving!”

Packing up their things, the group was ready to move a few moments later. They gathered around Tahu. In turn, the Toa of Fire turned to Narmoto.

“Lead the way, Protector,” he said.

“Yes sir,” the elder nodded.

---

The three stood over them. Their demeanor had changed from pandering to hostile. Their red eyes blazed as they looked down on them.

“Now,” Mask Snatcher growled. “We tried to be reasonable, but you’ve left us no choice.”

“And what is that?” Glonor’s arms wobbled as he pushed himself off the ground.

“Well,” the reptilian being said. “I will take your Masks of Power. I love to collect them,” he indicated the few Masks that adorned his armor. “Then, Morvarid will relieve you of your souls, and Crusher will destroy your bodies. He does ever so love that.”

The beast seemed to chuckle.

“Oh yeah? And what were you going to do if we complied?” Cesea asked.

“The same thing, but gradually,” he replied. “Graciously.”

She rolled her eyes. “Thanks.”

“But now you have forced our hand,” Mask Snatcher said darkly. “And now you shall pay.”

“No, we won’t,” Glonor replied before springing upwards. He moved to grab his weapon when he was suddenly blasted back to the ground. Morvarid stood with his weapon aimed at the Okotan.

Mask Snatcher chuckled. “Nice try. But no.”

Reaching down, he wrapped his claws around Glonor’s Mask. The creature began to pull, and the Okotan felt the magnetic clamps of the Mask giving way. He began to cry in pain when suddenly Mask Snatcher was struck with a blast of energy. He flew backwards and smashed into a tree.

Shocked, Rock Crusher and Morvarid looked to each other before looking to where the blast came from. Where it had come from was shrouded in darkness.

Morvarid raised his weapon to fire when he was suddenly hit by another burst of energy. He followed Mask Snatcher as he crashed to the ground, unconscious.

Crusher, roaring with rage, stepped forward towards where the blasts had come from when he was also struck by a blast of power. He stumbled backwards, but it did not take him down. His roars became ear-splitting as he continued forward when he was hit by three more blasts of energy. He stopped for a moment, before he too fell to the ground.

Confused, the Okotans got to their feet and looked into the dark when several dots of light appear. A moment later many dozens of villagers appeared from the shadows, wielding weapons. They were the Okotans from the City.

Glonor was at a loss for words. “What are you doing here?”

The lead Okotan, one from the Region of Water, chuckled. “Well, we thought you’d need some help,” he said.

“We told you to run?” Cesea replied.

“You did,” he nodded. “But I made a different call.”

Glonor looked back at the three unconscious beings lying in the shrapnel of the dead tree. “I think you just saved our lives.”

“Then it’s a good thing we came back.”

Gathering their dropped weapons, they group regathered. With a last look at the fallen creatures, Glonor nodded.

“Time to go.”

And so, they began heading back towards the temple, leaving their attackers behind.

---

Three days later.

They had been traveling for days, but they had finally reached the Region of Fire, towards the place where Narmoto said Glaruu lived. Ancient ruins lay strewn about, relics and echoes of a long-forgotten past. Dark clouds stirred in the sky above them, flashes of lightning shining and cracks of thunder rumbling. Smoke rose from the top of volcanoes.

Hopping over thin streams of lava, they continued on, traveling towards their destination. Occasionally, the ground would shake, but they kept on.

After a while, Narmoto stopped, and they followed.

“We’re here.”

They were surrounded by a forest of ancient ruins. Directly ahead of them, there was a small hut built in the center of ruins, smoke billowing from the top. In front of the door, a red figure sat, watching them with blue eyes. A three-pronged staff was laid against the hut a foot from her. She inclined her head, indicating that she saw them. Narmoto raised his hand in response before walking forward.

“Glaruu,” he said as he approached the Okotan.

She nodded. “Protector of Fire. I’ve been expecting you.”

“Have you now?” Narmoto looked skeptical.

“Destiny always calls, my child,” Glaruu replied.

Gali stepped forward. “So you know why we’re here, then?”

“No,” she shook her head and chuckled. “Destiny is not that talkative.”

“It’s me,” Harvali said. “I’m why we’re here.”

“And why are you so important, my dear?” the sage turned to the Okotan.

Reaching into her bag, Harvali produced the Mask of Creation. Its runes shown brightly, illuminating them all in a green light. Glaruu’s eyes widened at the sight of it. Standing up, she approached the Mask in awe. Harvali watched her as she ran her fingers over the runes. The light then faded.

“Why are you here?” she looked at the archeologist.

“Ekimu is dead, and he told me that I am to be the next Toa of Light,” she replied.

“We want to know more about the Toa of Light, sage,” Tahu said.

Quickly, she turned and went inside her hut before reemerging with several scrolls moments later. Sitting down again, she strew them across the ground, looking through them. They all gathered around, clearly engrossed by what she was doing.

After a while of searching, she eventually stopped.

“There it is,” she said, finally, holding up a scroll. “I’ve found it.”

“Found what?” Kopaka asked.

“The Toa of Light,” Glaruu replied.

Opening the scroll, she began to read. “’Long ago, in the time before time, an entity of light, wielding untold power descended from the heavens to the island of Okoto. The entity saw the native islanders, and took favor on them. The entity, having compassion, decided to give up immortality and stay with the people.

“’Merging its soul with one of the natives, they became the first Mask Maker, and the first Toa of Light. Together, they led the islanders, and defended them from many great dangers and perils. But, the body of the islander was mortal, and could not sustain through the years. So, they chose a successor; someone to take up the mantle of the Toa of Light.

“’This began the cycle of the Toa of Light. Every time a Toa of Light dies, their power is passed onto another of a different element. This has gone on for thousands of years, with Ekimu of the Region of Water being the current Toa of Light.’”

Closing the scroll, she set it down beside the others.

“But what does it mean, Glaruu?” Onua asked.

“It means that Ekimu has chosen Harvali as the next recipient of the power.”

“How does he choose?” Lewa inquired.

“Well, first, the recipient has to be from the next Region in the cycle,” the sage replied.

“What ‘cycle’?”

She sighed. “The elemental cycle. The first Toa of Light was from the Region of Fire. The second was from the Region of Earth. The third from the Region of Stone. The fourth from the Region of Ice. And obviously, Ekimu was from the Region of Water.”

“But why me?” Harvali asked.

“You’re from the Region of Jungle. You’re next, and the one after you will restart the cycle.”

“Yes, but why me?”

Glaruu shrugged. “I don’t know. He liked you? You were there? If he was dying, and only had moments, he may have just given it to the closest candidate in the area.”

“So I was chosen out of convenience?”

“Quite possibly.”

Harvali looked down for a moment in thought before lifting her head again. “How do I get rid of it?”

The sage cocked her head. “What?”

“How do I get rid of it. The power. I don’t want it. I can’t take it.”

“My dear,” Glaruu said, looking at her with her blue eyes. “There is no ‘getting rid of it’. You were chosen, and now it is your duty – your destiny – to become the Toa of Light.”

“Can’t I have a choice?” her voice cracked.

“No one has a choice in their destiny, you should know. Do you think Ekimu wanted the power? Did any of them? Do you think the Toa and Protectors,” she indicated the defenders, “want their destiny? They have to risk their lives to fight against the forces of darkness and absolute evil. Would they really want that for themselves?”

Before she could speak, Glaruu answered for the archaeologist. “The answer is no. No one wants that. But they do it anyway, because it is their duty. And just as they do, you must do your duty as well. You cannot subvert your destiny.”

“How will I know what to do, then?” Harvali said angrily. “It’s not like Ekimu can teach me what to do.”

“Ekimu spoke to you through a vision?” the sage asked.

“Yeah.”

“I don’t think that was just a random occurrence. He told you what you needed to know at that moment. Chances are, he’ll tell you what you need to know when you need it.”

“We can’t leave it to chance like that,” Tahu interjected.

She chuckled again. “Do you think you have a choice? Destiny is calling, and you must accept it.”

“I need more proof than that. More assurance,” Harvali said. “If I am to risk my life, I have to be absolutely sure I am the one who is supposed to become the Toa of Light.”

Glaruu looked at her nodded. “Put it on.”

Harvali was confused. “Put what on?”

“The Mask of Creation,” she pointed at the golden Mask. “Put it on.”

Looking at the Toa of Protectors, she lifted up the Mask of Creation. Taking off her own Mask, she handed it to Bingzak. Then, holding the Mask of Creation with both hands she lifted it to her face. The magnetic clamps engaged as she brought it closer and the Mask attached itself.

There was a flash of light as the runes on the Mask exploded in a brilliant burst of green light. The group around her took a step back as her armor began to glow as well. In awe, Harvali examined her hands as they shone with the glittering light.

“Look!” Kivoda said suddenly, pointing at the ruins. “Look!”

Turning their attention to the ruins, their eyes widened as they saw that the runes on the pillars were also glowing green. Harvali herself was just as shocked as the rest of them, staring at the impossible sight.

“What is this?” Kopaka gasped.

Glaruu stood up, staring out at the ruins before looking at the archaeologist. “You, Harvali, are truly the only light in the darkness!”

Harvali turned and looked at her, her eyes wide.

---

Makuta stepped out onto the balcony overlooking the City of the Mask Makers. His new armor glittered in the light coming from inside the Forge.

After he had returned from the Region of Jungle, and after he had killed his brother, he decided to… treat himself, to some new armor. He had used his old armor for millenia, after all, he had reasoned. And now that he was nearly unopposed in his rule, he needed to look the part.

He had discarded the glowing orange pieces of his last form, replacing them with plates that shone purple. His armor was now more robust, making him look more imposing. Four wings protruded from his back, which would give him flight. He had always wanted to fly.

In addition, he had upgraded his choice in weapons. His three-pronged staff had been replaced by a large tribal staff, with a carving of his Mask of Ultimate Power at the top. It could still channel his elemental power, it was just more ornamental. He also now carried to smaller weapons: a small staff with prongs and crystal growing from it. A small ax-based blade was hung from his hip.

The titan sighed. Even though he knew that the Toa were still out there with the legendary Masks, he didn’t feel threatened by them. Instead, he felt elated. Ekimu was dead, and they were surely hopeless. They were like a chicken that had just lost their head.

He had won. That was all that mattered

Behind him, Skull Basher appeared in the entryway. Makuta turned to look at his servant.

“What is it, my lieutenant?” he asked.

“My lord,” he began. “Why did you not let me on the hunt for the Toa? Those are my troops Umarak is leading!”

“You are my lieutenant,” Makuta said. “I need you by my side and commanding my armies.”

“I have been on the hunt before. I can do it myself!”

Makuta turned and headed back into the Forge. “Umarak can track the Elemental Creatures. You cannot.”

“That means nothing, my lord,” Skull Basher retorted. “As Kulta’s lieutenant, I was an expert tracker.”

“I wouldn’t rely on anything of Kulta’s,” the Mask Hoarder stared into the burning purple fire of the forge. “Considering that I’m the one who killed him.”

Skull Basher fell silent.

“Now, I do not want to hear anything more about the hunt for the Toa,” Makuta turned to the Skull Raider. “Umarak will contact me when he finds them. And even so, they are no threat to me anymore, especially considering that the cycle of the Toa of Light is forever broken.”

---

The Creatures were close. He could feel it.

Umarak continued through the volcanic landscape, keeping low. The Skull Warriors and Skull Scorpios followed behind him, having an irritatingly less regard for stealth than he had. It probably wasn’t a big deal, since the haze from heat could conceal them fairly well.

He didn’t know where the Creatures were, but he knew they were close, and stationary. At last, he would be able to absorb the seven remaining Creatures and complete his destiny.

They entered a field of ancient ruins. Umarak felt the Creatures close now, very close. Slowly, he navigated his way through the stone pillars, the group of skeletal warriors following his path.

He came to a stop when he saw a small hut sitting in the middle of the forest, signaling for the others to stop also. Crouching down, he narrowed his red eyes.

There they were. The six Toa, six Protectors, Okotans, and the seven Creatures – all gathered around the entrance to the hut.

A smile broke behind his Mask of Shadows. This was it. After thousands of years, he could complete his destiny. After thousands of years, he could rest.

He was about to signal the others to move when a glow appeared from in front of where the Toa were standing. The glow flickered for a moment before the runes on the ancient ruins began to glow also. He looked around in confusion before he keeled over in pain. Through the pain, he saw that his armor had also begun to start glowing green, just like the runes.

After a few moments, he managed to overcome the pain, but the glow was still there, along with the glow on the runes and from in front of the Toa.

“This is not good,” Umarak muttered to himself.

Something was happening, and he didn’t like it.

Getting up from his spot, he made his way around to get a better look at where the light was coming from. Like sheep, the warriors followed. He made his way over ruins and blocks of stone as he circled the hut.

Coming to a stop behind a thicker patch of pillars, he was in line with the Toa. Narrowing his eyes, he tried to get a good look at what the light was coming from. He couldn’t tell however, because the light coming from it was far too bright. The natural filters on his eyes kicked in, which helped him hunt in the daylight.

Smiling, he looked at the glowing ball of light, before recoiling in shock. Shaking his head, he leaned forward again to get another look.

It seemed impossible, but, it looked as the glow was coming from an Okotan. And they were wearing the Mask of Creation.

He had to tell Makuta.

---

“What are we going to do now that Ekimu’s dead?” Skull Basher asked, obeying the command not to mention the hunt.

“Now, I establish my rule, and take my rightful place among the gods,” Makuta answered. “At long last, I finally step out of my brother’s shadow.”

He chuckled to himself as he continued to stare into the flames. Suddenly the flames exploded in light. The titan took a step back and covered his eyes. The light faded, and his eyes widened as he saw that the forge was now burning green.

“My lord, look!” Skull Basher said to his left.

Looking up, the runes engraved across the walls of the room had also begun to glow green, bathing them in their glow.

“No. No…” Makuta muttered.

“What is this?” his lieutenant asked.

Turning, the titan made his way back onto the balcony. Across the City, spots of green light were fading into view, illuminating the dark night. The Mask Hoarder’s face became flushed with horror.

“NO!” he yelled, his voice echoing through the City.

Quickly, he ran back into the Temple of Creation and made for the spiral staircase. Skull Basher followed him. They ascended to the third floor, and ran across the large room littered with ancient relics. As they ran between them, they barely noticed the walls all shining with the green light as the runes on them glowed.

Coming to a halt at the far, both looked at a particular carving placed in the center of it. The carving greatly resembled Ekimu, and was adorned in runes. They were glowing, like all the others, but brighter than any of them.

Skull Basher was bewildered. “What does it mean, my lord? What is happening?”

The Mask Hoarder did not answer, instead staring with a grim expression at the carving.

“Please, my lord. Tell me,” the Skull Raider asked again.

“It means,” Makuta began. “That there is a new Toa on the island of Okoto.”

He turned and looked at his lieutenant. “It means that my brother has been reborn.”

Chapter 14: Destiny Awaits

Harvali reached up and took the Mask of Creation from her face. Setting it on the ground, she stepped away from it. The light from the ruins faded, followed by the light from her armor, and finally the Mask itself stopped glowing.

She was obviously disgruntled. “What was that?”

“Destiny, my dear,” Glaruu looked down to examine the Mask of Creation. “Destiny indeed.”

“How does it do that?” Lewa asked.

“The Mask of Creation has been reforged from the Masks of previous Mask Makers, dating all the way back to the first Toa of Light. It embodies its energy, which is tied to the rest of Okoto. Harvali wearing the Mask activates it. She alone can activate it.”

“So every rune in the area did that?” Onua inquired, obviously impressed.

Glaruu shook her head. “Every rune across the island did that.”

The Toa exchanged concerned glances. The sage saw this and raised an eyebrow.

“What’s wrong?” she asked.

“If every rune across the island did that,” Tahu said. “Then Makuta knows that Ekimu has been reborn.”

“Yes.”

“We were hoping he didn’t know that,” Gali replied.

“Oh,” Glaruu stroked her chin. “Well, he was going to find out eventually.”

“So we just lost the element of surprise?” Kopaka asked.

“Yep,” Pohatu sighed. “We did.”

“And if Makuta knows, then he’ll come for us,” Nilkuu said.

Harvali ran a hand through her hair. “If I am supposed to become the Toa of Light, how do I inherit its power?”

“You must restore Agil in order to become the Toa of Light,” the sage answered.

“That’s impossible,” Narmoto crossed his arms. “Agil is dead.”

“No. The Creature has merely been trapped inside Umarak’s essence. Bot dead,” she replied.

“How do you know?” Korgot asked.

“Because, Protector, nothing is ever truly gone.”

Tahu thought about it for a moment. “So, if we’re able to release Agil from Umarak, what do we do then? What’s our next move?”

“You must get Harvali to the Temple of Light, where she will unite with Agil, and become the Toa of Light.”

“And then what?” the Okotan of Jungle asked.

“’Then what’?” Glaruu repeated. “Then you defeat Makuta and save the island, of course.”

Despite her having known the answer, Harvali was still struck by these words. She stood still for several moments, letting the realization soak in. It was true. She had to save the island.

She was awoken from her daze as the sage reached down and picked up the Mask of Creation. Looking at it one more time, she handed it to the archaeologist. Stepping back, she looked at the assembled.

“Now, you’d best get going. Makuta will really be looking for you now that he knows that his brother has been reborn.”

“Part of me still really thinks that we shouldn’t have revealed that to him,” Kopaka said.

“Perhaps, but it had to happen. No avoiding it. Go to the Region of Earth. Hide out there. Train Harvali, plan your next move, and be ready to save the island.”

Tahu nodded and stepped forward to thank her. “Thank you so much, Glaruu-.”

“Go!” she cut across him.

Taking her advice, the group turned and began walking away from the hut. Harvali was the last to move, still looking at the prophetess. They stared at each other for a moment, before she turned and followed the group.

Glaruu stood and watched them go, before returning to her hut.

---

It had been three days since they had escaped their three attackers, and finally, they were almost at their destination. The caravan of refugees made their way through the Region of Jungle, Glonor and Cesea leading the way.

As they walked, Glonor and Cesea stayed close together.

“Do you think they’ll come looking for us?” she asked.

He shrugged. “I don’t know. Maybe. They definitely seemed crazy enough.”

“Where do you think they came from, anyway?” Cesea wondered.

“They reminded me a little of Umarak. Maybe they’re natives like him.”

She tapped the edge of her Mask in thought. “But how come we’ve never seen them before? I mean, three guys like that would’ve drawn attention to themselves.”

“Unless everyone who has seen them was killed before they could tell anyone,” Glonor suggested grimly.

“Like what they were going to do to us?” she looked at him. He nodded.

Cesea looked down. “That’s awful.”

“There’s a lot of evil in this world,” he said.

“You don’t have to tell me,” she smiled faintly.

Their eyes met before they saw a large structure looming in front of them. Looking up, they saw that they had returned to the temple. At last, they had reached their destination.

“We made it!” Cesea exclaimed.

Behind them, the crowd cheered their excitement, before the Okotan of Ice fired his weapon into the air.

“Shh!” he hissed, pressing a finger to his lips. “We don’t want to let the whole island know we’re here!”

Quickly, the crowd fell silent, but the looks on their faces was all that was needed. They were safe at last. They had found refuge again.

“So, what do we do now?” she asked Glonor as the caravan made its way into the temple.

Glonor set his crossbow down against a rock, before leaning against it himself. “The only thing we can do: wait here for the Toa to get back.”

“We can’t always rely on the Toa,” Cesea said, joining him.

“Well, right now, I can’t think of anything else to do.”

She nodded. “I suppose you’re right.”

“You should get some sleep,” he said. “I’ll take watch.”

“All by yourself?”

“Yep.”

“Nah. I’ll stay with you,” she replied.

He looked at her. “You really don’t have to.”

“But I want to,” she smiled. “I want to be on watch with you.”

After a few moments, Glonor returned her smile. “Okay.”

In the forest outside the temple, three figures watched as the Matoran settled themselves in their refuge, their glowing eyes narrowed. They were shadows, watching but not seen.

“When do we strike?” Morvarid asked, clutching his weapon.

“Soon,” Mask Snatcher replied.

Rock Crusher growled his displeasure.

“Don’t worry,” the reptilian smiled. “Soon, we will have our revenge. Just be patient.”

He watched Glonor and Cesea sitting next to each other on the rock.

“Soon, they will regret ever crossing paths with us.”

---

Makuta threw the box of crystals to the floor in a violent rage. The crystals shattered and flashes of light erupted from them. He growled in anger, storming across the room to another box. Taking it in his clawed hands, he too threw it down, roaring his dismay. Skull Basher and a few Skull Raiders and Elemental Beasts watched the scene from afar.

“Ekimu cannot be reborn! He cannot! I was free of him! I was free!” he roared.

A ball of energy appearing in his hand, he fired a bolt of power at a large crate. The container exploded in a fiery blast, littering the ground. His breathing was heavy, his eyes were blazing.

“I was rid of my brother,” he said. “But now he has returned.”

A Skull Raider stepped forward. “My lord, we will find them-.”

He was cut off as a blast of elemental energy was fired at him. His body blasted apart, with pieces of it flying as far as the other end of the room. The remaining warriors took a step back in surprise. Makuta turned away from where the Raider had been standing and crossed the room again, still raving in rage. The other Skull Raiders raised their weapons defensively.

“No!” Skull Basher hissed.

They looked at their leader for a moment before obeying, sheathing their weapons. They watched as the titan stormed around the room, continuing to destroy objects at random.

“Of course I will find my brother,” he said, mostly to himself. “But the very fact that he has been reincarnated means that he continues to undermine me! This must end!”

He fired another bolt of energy at a carving of Ekimu, reducing it to a hole in the wall. He stood staring at it when the shadows in the corner of the room grew dark. Turning, he watched as Umarak emerged from them. He bowed before the titan.

“My lord,” Umarak said.

“My Hunter,” Makuta replied. “What news do you bring?”

“I found them, my lord. I found them all. I even found the Toa of Light.”

Makuta’s eyes widened. “What?”

“The archaeologist Harvali has been chosen by your brother to succeed him, my lord,” Umarak answered.

“Are you sure?” the Mask Hoarder asked.

Umarak nodded. “When she wore the Mask of Creation, as I’m sure you saw, every rune in the area glowed. Even my armor did.”

“Why would your armor glow?” Makuta raised an eyebrow. “Unless…”

“…Unless Agil’s energy within me was reacting to her wearing the Mask as well,” he finished.

“Is that even possible?”

“Apparently.”

Skull Basher walked over to interject.

“Where are they, Umarak?” he asked.

“In the Region of Fire heading towards the Region of Earth. The Skull Creatures are still following them from a distance. I came here to inform you,” the Hunter replied.

“Show me,” Makuta said.

Flexing his hand, a ball of energy appeared in the Hunter’s palm. Tossing it into the air, it stopped a few feet away, flickering above the ground. Makuta outstretched his arm at it, his fingers glowing. The ball of light suddenly sparked and expanded, becoming a large disk of energy. The middle shimmered before disappearing, showing the volcanic landscape of the Region of Fire.

“Shall we?” the titan smiled.

Together, the three, along with their warriors, marched through the portal.

---

The Toa, Protectors, Creatures, and Okotans continued their forward march through the Region of Fire. They avoided jets of fire that shot up from the cracks in the ground.

“It’s far too hot here,” Kopaka said. “I’m going to melt.”

“Yeah, I agree with Kopaka here,” Lewa replied. “This heat could set a tree on fire.”

“What?” Tahu and Narmoto looked at them. Ikir chirped.

“It could be cooler,” Gali suggested.

“The Region of Fire is an essential part of Okoto’s balance,” Narmoto said. “You can’t simply turn the heat down.”

The Toa of Ice looked at his brother. “You could.”

“I will not,” the Toa of Fire replied. “I like it how it is.”

“Of course you do,” Pohatu wiped sweat from his brow.

“Plus, this is obviously one of the best-looking Regions on Okoto,” Tahu argued. “I mean, just look at the landscape!” he gestured to the scenery.

“Nah,” Lewa said.

“Not seeing it,” Kivoda shook his head.

“Nope,” Nilkuu replied.

“Eh,” Onua shrugged.

Tahu was affronted. “Oh, come on! You don’t know what you’re talking about!”

They continued walking, chuckling to themselves. Tahu and Narmoto still tried to vouch for their Region. After a moment, Harvali stopped, pressing her fingers to her temples and rubbing. Everyone around her stopped, gathering to see what was wrong.

“Are you okay, Harvali?” Gali knelt down beside her.

She collapsed to the ground, holding her head. Vizuna suddenly straightened up, looking around. Izotor noticed.

“Vizuna, are you-?”

He nodded.

“What can you see, brother?” Korgot asked.

“Something’s coming,” he said, his eyes wide.

Harvali then looked up.

“He’s here.”

At that moment, the ground began to shake. Above them, the sky grew darker, bolts of lightning streaking between the clouds. They shivered as a wind rushed through the valley, whistling as it hit the ancient ruins that littered the field.

“Defensive positions!” Tahu yelled, drawing his blades.

The others did the same without hesitation, scanning for any sign of their adversary. They stood back to back; all of them. After everything they had seen, everything they had done, they had each others’ backs.

There was a small shockwave as a ball of energy appeared in the air several paces ahead of Onua. The others saw it, too, and turned to face it. Harvali stood behind them, clutching the Mask of Creation tightly to her chest.

In a flash, the ball expanded to become a disk, before the glowing center dissolved to reveal three figures standing in a room. The three were joined by a few others before they walked through the portal. Umarak the Hunter, Skull Basher, and several Elemental Beasts and Skull Raiders followed a tall being, adorned in black, purple, and gold armor, with wings jutting from his back and carrying a large tribal staff. He also had other weapons sheathed to the sides of his hips.

Behind the Toa, several Skull Warriors and Skull Scorpios scurried from the ruins to flank them. Onua, Lewa, and Pohatu, along with Kivoda, Izotor, and Nilkuu turned to face them. The Creatures stayed enclosed in their circle with the Okotans.

A smile broke across the Mask Hoarder’s Mask of Ultimate Power.

“Ah. We meet again,” Makuta said.

“I see you’ve upgraded your armor,” Tahu replied. “I don’t like it.”

“Don’t worry,” the titan chuckled, brandishing his weapon. “You haven’t to see it for very long.”

They glared at each other for a moment. Behind the Toa, Harvali watched, holding onto the chain slung over her shoulder that carried the three Masks. Her and Makuta’s eyes met, and his widened.

“You,” he said, pointing at her. “Ekimu chose you, didn’t he?”

She said nothing. Tahu’s face darkened.

“You will not take her.”

“I have to,” Makuta replied. “I can teach her in the ways of the Mask Maker. Together, we can restore Okoto. Move past my brother’s tyranny.”

“That’s not going to happen,” Kopaka said.

The group stood their ground. Makuta’s face became serious.

“That’s not your decision. Hand over the Toa of Light.”

“No.”

“Do not test me, firespitter,” the Mask Hoarder growled.

Tahu shook his head. “I’m not testing you. I’m telling you exactly what’s going to happen.”

“And that is?” he raised an eyebrow.

“You are not going to take Harvali. We are going to walk away from here. If you try to stop us, we will fight you, and you will lose. Understood?”

The titan looked at him for a moment before roaring with laughter. Skull Basher and Umarak stood laughing behind him. The Toa and their allies narrowed their eyes as they watched the three slowly stop laughing and continue opposing them.

“If you fought us, we would crush you. How many more friends are willing to lose?” Makuta chuckled. “You’ve already lost Ekimu. How much more can you take?”

“We will do whatever it takes to ensure your defeat,” Gali said. “You can count on that.”

“Are you sure you want to go that route?” the titan stepped forward.

The Toa exchanged glances and nodded. Tahu’s face was one of determination as he addressed the Mask Hoarder.

“Yes.”

Makuta grinned. “Alright, then.”

In his right hand, the carvings of the tribal staff he carried began to glow with the colors of all six elements. Thrusting the weapon forward, a powerful blast of raw elemental energy shot from it. The Toa, having anticipating this, commanded their companions to jump out of the way. They did so, and just barely missed getting hit by the attack. Dirt and smoke shot into the air as it hit the ground.

Being the first to recover, the Toa, moving as one, made to charge the titan. All around them, Makuta’s forces opened fire. Ice projectiles flew from the Skull Warriors’ weapons as blasts of energy were flung by the Elemental Beasts. Umarak himself was firing at them from his bow.

Together, the six managed to dodge the attacks, but narrowly. The Skull Warriors were easy; they were the walking dead, after all. The Elemental Beasts proved a greater challenge; the Storm Beasts fired bolts of lightning at them, while the Lava Beasts threw molten rocks at them. The Quake Beasts were were creating large, sharp crystals and hurtling them at the Toa.

Behind them, the Protectors, Creatures, and Okotans got to their feet and joined the fight. The Protectors began attacking the Skull Warriors, shattering their bodies with the force of their strikes.

The Elemental Creatures took on the Beasts, firing intense blasts of their elemental power at them. Combined, they were able to eradicate them, reducing them to dust.

As the Toa approached the titan, he held up his fist, which glowed with dark energy. At once, a dozen Shadow Beasts appeared in front of them. They tried to stop when they were blasted with shadow by the shimmering adversaries. They crashed to the ground, their advance halted.

The Shadow Beasts moved to surround the Toa, creating a circle. The six got up, readying their weapons, and charged the apparitions. As quickly as they moved, they were blasted backwards again, the twelve closing the circle further.

“Just like old times, huh?” Gali said as she swung her trident at one of them.

“Too much,” Pohatu attempted to slam his hammers into the face of a Shadow Beast.

“Come on!” Tahu yelled. “We have to stop Makuta before he gets to Harvali!”

Readying their weapons, the six attacked the creatures.

---

Outside the circle, Makuta walked forward. With the Toa out of the way, he was free to take his prize. Harvali stood at least thirty feet from him, the other Okotans standing beside her. She stared at him defiantly, her eyes shining. His eyes blazed red, a smile on his face.

“Do not fear, Harvali,” he continued his stride. “I am not here to harm you.”

“I take it that promise didn’t extend to Ekimu?” she retorted.

“Ekimu was a disease on this land. He wanted to stunt its growth. He sought his own glory over the progress of his people. I sought to better the lives on all Okotans, and he stopped me.”

“You were going to destroy Okoto,” Harvali replied.

“No! Everything was going to be fine if he hadn’t intervened,” his hand unconsciously traced the shape of his Mask. “I was going to control… I did control…”

“That’s not how history sees it,” the archeologist took a step forward.

“History is wrong, manipulated by my brother,” he growled. “Join me, and you will learn the true history of Okoto.”

She stood her ground. “History lies not in the life of one being. History belongs to all of us; all of Okoto. Every single life is part of its history. One life can change it, yes, but it does not make it theirs. History is something we all have to take care of and nurture. History is not Ekimu’s, and it certainly isn’t yours.”

He stopped. “Maybe you’re beyond saving. You’ve spent too long in the shadow of my brother.”

Raising his staff again, it crackled with energy. “You’d be better off dead.”

Suddenly fearful, she moved to turn away when Makuta fired. Covering her eyes, a blinding light shone through the field before fading an instant later. Opening her eyes, she turned to see what happened.

Ombra, Creature of Shadow, was standing between Makuta and Harvali. Its form was glowing as it glared at the titan. The Creature had blocked the blast with its own blast of shadow.

“Ombra,” he said, lowering his weapon.

The Creature growled.

“You’re a traitor, you know,” he said. “You’ve sided with Ekimu over me. We were allies. Partners. Now you have betrayed me, and are working with those who seek to destroy me.”

Pawing the ground, Ombra stepped forward. The Creature growled again.

“Words of a fool!” Makuta spat. “I am the cure to this dying island, and I will destroy you, the Creatures, the Toa, the Protectors, and anyone else who gets in my way, if I have to.”

The two stared at each other for a moment. Dark energy crackled in the Creature of Shadow’s mouth. A second later it opened its jaw and a blast of shadow shot from it. Makuta brought up his hand just before it hit. The blast splintered against his hand, which radiated with elemental energy. Two bolts of the shadow power flew from the Ombra’s attack and struck Umarak and Skull Basher, who had been standing and watching the scene, sending them crashing to the ground.

Makuta’s feet slowly skidded across the volcanic floor as he pushed against the Creature’s attack. He grunted as he brought up his other hand to block the blow.

Behind Ombra, the six other Creatures came beside their comrade. Each of them fired a blast of their respective element from their mouths, Akida firing it from the cannons mounted to its body also. All of them joined Ombra’s, pushing the Mask Hoarder even farther back.

“No…” he muttered as he continued to skid across the ground. “No…”

He looked up and saw all seven Creatures standing between him and Harvali.

“NO!” he roared, attempting to push forward, but found it impossible.

The Mask of Ultimate Power lit up, glowing with the light all of six elements. He had to draw any power he could in order to fight back. Any power that wasn’t being used against the Creatures had to be used. Concentrating, he drew power from everything he controlled in the area. His hands suddenly glowed brighter, creating a shield. He continued to push forward, taking a step towards the Creatures.

---

The Toa were still fighting the Shadow Beasts when they suddenly vanished. They evaporated like steam in the air. Looking around in confusion, the Toa saw the Elemental Beasts falling to the ground around them. Their bodies shattered on impact; creating a thousand shards. Skull Warriors and Skull Scorpios fell also, dead.

“What’s going on?” Gali asked.

“That!” Kopaka pointed.

Several paces from them, the seven Creatures were fired raw elemental energy at Makuta. Looking through the glare cast by the energy, they saw that the titan’s form was also glowing.

“He must be drawing any power he can get,” Pohatu said. “Anything that can’t be spared.”

“That’s why the Beasts disappeared?” Tahu was transfixed by the battle ahead of him. The Toa of Stone nodded.

“Instead of standing around chatting,” Lewa readied his ax. “How about we help the Creatures?”

“Very wise, tree-swinger,” Onua wielded his own weapon.

“What’re we waiting for, then?” Tahu smiled. “We’ve got him this time. Let’s go!”

The six Toa ran forward toward the battle. Coming to a halt behind the Creatures, they readied their weapons. Stepping forward, they unleashed their own blasts of elemental energy, adding to the already brutal force that was striking the titan. This caused his to lose his footing even more, sending him skidding backwards. Narmoto came to join the Toa.

“No!” the Toa of Fire shouted over the roar of power. “You’ve got to get the villagers out of here!”

The Protector of Fire looked at him a moment before nodding. He turned and rejoined the Protectors, who already stood gathered with the Okotans.

“Come on!” he gestured with his arms. “Get out of here!”

Together, they moved towards the ruins when Vizuna noticed that Harvali was still standing with the Toa and Creatures.

“Harvali!” the Protector ran over to her. “We’ve got to go!”

“No!” she replied. “I’ve got to stay!”

“It’s not safe!”

“I know what I’m doing!” she looked him in the eyes. “Trust me.”

He returned her look, before nodding, and running back to the join the others. The archaeologist turned to face the scene again.

Bolts of energy flew in all directions. Makuta still holding his hands up against the combined force of the thirteen elemental beings, but even the Mask of Ultimate Power could not stand to fight it. He continued to skid backwards; a trail of lava, created by his feet digging into the ground, was left in his wake.

“NO!” the titan screamed. “NO!”

“This is it!” Tahu yelled. “This is it!”

The ground beneath their feet began to shake. There was a flicker of light before a dome of energy appeared around them, shimmering with all six elemental colors.

Harvali suddenly felt something warm against her side. Looking over, she saw that the Mask of Time was glowing. Grabbing it off the chain, she felt it shuddering in her hands. The same colors flickering in the air flickered across the Mask’s shining surface. Her eyes widened as she saw it begin to glow brighter, and brighter still.

Looking up, she called out.

“Stop!”

A split second later, the Mask of Time exploded with light, engulfing them all.

---

Harvali woke up a moment after in an abyss of white. Looking around, she saw the six Toa standing beside her. They all looked around with confusion, same as her. This void was exactly like the one she had met Ekimu in. But it couldn’t be, could it? Was she dreaming again?

“What is this-?” Gali asked when something moved in the distance.

Turning towards it, they saw the blurred shape of a figure walking towards them. Their footsteps echoed in the white void. As they got closer, their body came more into focus. When they stopped several feet in front of them, they were in full view.

Their armor was a dark red and gold. They bore a strange Mask of Power, unlike any they had ever seen before. Somehow, he reminded them of Ekimu.

He looked a them and smiled.

“Welcome, Toa,” he said. “I am Tawhito, the first Toa of Light. I have been waiting for you.”

Book III: Destiny

Chapter 15: Genesis

The seven stood in the endless void. The being who had identified himself as Tawhito, stood before them. His demeanor was friendly and welcoming, but there was something strange about him. They also noticed that the Creatures, Protectors, Okotans, or even Makuta himself were no longer with them. Not they were complaining about the last one, of course.

“What’s going on?” Kopaka asked. “What is this place?”

“This is a void between worlds,” Tawhito replied. “A meeting place, per say.”

“Why are we here?” Pohatu inquired.

“I needed to speak to you,” he answered. “The fate of Okoto depends on it.”

Tahu rubbed his forehead. “I don’t understand. How did we get here?”

“The Mask of Time brought you here,” Tawhito said.

“What?” Lewa asked. “What do you mean that Vahi brought us here?”

“During your battle with Makuta,” he began to explain. “The Mask of Time absorbed the sheer amount of elemental energy being discharged. This, in turn, supercharged the Mask, and activated its power.”

“Like how the Protectors summoned the Toa?” Harvali interjected.

He nodded. “Exactly. This allowed the Mask to take you out of sync with the rest of Okoto, and to bring you here to this place.”

“You speak as if the Mask has… sentience,” Gali said. “But that can’t be right.”

Tawhito chuckled. “If the Mask were not alive, it could not have brought you here.”

“How can a Mask be sentient?” Onua asked. “That isn’t possible.”

“Brother,” he turned to the Toa of Earth. “After everything you’ve seen, surely you cannot believe that.”

“Why do you call him brother?” Tahu raised an eyebrow. “We’ve never seen you before.”

He smiled weakly. “That’s because your memories have been distorted. Thousands of years of being held in stasis in the stars erased your history. You may not remember me, but I remember you all very well.”

Tahu looked at him with narrowed eyes. “Who are you?”

“I will show you who I am, and who you are.”

Holding up his hand, a ball of light appeared in his palm. It stayed there a moment, and then, exploding in an array of color, consumed them. They were blinded by it before the light faded and they found that there were surrounded by thousands of points of light.

Looking around, they saw several bright orbs appear before them. As their eyes adjusted to the glare, they saw that they were several planets of various shapes and sizes. A sun burned in the distance.

One of the planets, blue because of the endless ocean that filled its surface, was closest to them. As it spun through space, they saw a large landmass floating in the middle of the ocean. They couldn’t make out any details, as it was completely dark.

Suddenly, a voice rang in their ear, which they recognized as Tawhito’s.

“Long ago, in the time before time, eight elemental entities descended from the heavens onto the island of Okoto. When they arrived, the island was barren and without life. So, using their immense power, the eight gave life to the dead land.”

Stars began to appear above them before eight balls of light fell and illuminated the dark island below. As they fell, the seven saw that the island was indeed Okoto, but not as any of them had ever seen it. It was barren and lifeless. They saw the eight warriors arrive on the land, their bodies glowing with raw elemental power.

“They created six Regions from the elements of six of the entities: fire, water, jungle, stone, earth, and ice. And it was decided that light would rule the day and shadow the night. And so, the island of Okoto was born; a rich, vibrant, land.”

They saw the warriors gather into a circle. They watched them combine their powers and create the six Regions of Okoto. There were blasts of energy as the light and shadow entities create the day and the night.

All around them, they saw the island of Okoto, vibrant with color, and lush with power. The Regions were more beautiful than they had ever seen them. They awed at the sight of them.

“But, their work was not yet finished. While they had given life to the island, there were none to enjoy it. Deciding to use their power again, the eight beings chose to create inhabitants of the island. With an incredible amount of power, they created the Okotans, each representing one of the six Regions of the island.”

With a blast of light, they saw villages spring forth before them, with a multitude of villagers living in them and tending to them. They saw them populating each Region, enjoying the beautiful paradise that was given to them.

“They also created creatures and beasts to live amongst the Islanders. But, some of the beasts rebelled against them and attacked the villagers. Not wanting to destroy their own creation, the entities created an army of warriors to protect the island from danger.”

Images of beasts and creatures frolicking and living among the villagers flashed before them, but they also saw several beasts attacking the villagers. They then saw the elemental entities coming together to create an army of warriors, which looked shockingly similar to the Skull Warriors.

“Their last act was to create a massive construct: a labyrinth. Built on a small island, it was built as a stronghold, if it were ever needed.”

There was a rumbling noise before massive walls shot up around them. Large blocks began moving past them in an aimless manner, creating bridges and barricades before dispersing at random. Suddenly they were in the sky, looking down on the Labyrinth of Control.

“With their great work complete, the eight warriors decided to depart Okoto. But, two of their number, the light and the shadow, wanted to stay behind and give up immortality to live amongst their creation. Realizing that their work in this universe was done, the remaining six decided to return to the stars and watch over the island until they were needed again.

“So, the eight split their power, creating the Elemental Creatures to serve as guardians of their elemental power. The six then bid farewell to their brothers and ascended back into the heavens, where they stayed for millennium, until they were needed again.”

There was a multicolored flash before they saw the eight Elemental Creatures standing beside the warriors. All of them clanked fists with the others before there was another flash, and they saw six beams of light ascending into the sky. They flew high before shooting outwards, becoming six stars in the night sky.

“With the others gone, the two remaining entities gave up their elemental forms and each merged their power with one of the inhabitants of the island. The entity of shadow merged with Roa of the Region of Ice, and the entity of light merged with me, Tawhito of the Region of Fire. Together, we became the first Mask Makers and leaders of Okoto.”

Light shimmered in their eyes before it faded and they saw Tawhito standing in front of them next to another figure clad in white and silver armor. Roa, like Tawhito, also bore strange Masks of Power; one they had only seen in carvings. They stood together, as allies.

“As Mask Makers, we created the Okotan civilization, building villages and even cities for our people. For the Creatures, we built temples for them to live in. In turn, they gave us Elemental Crystals with which to create Masks of Power. We first crafted Masks for ourselves, and then for our people.”

Sparks flew in front of their eyes as they heard the sound of a hammer striking metal. A second later several large and glowing Masks of Power came into view around them. They shone like statues of pure energy.

“We continued to build the island. We lived in ease for some time. But, then something happened. Something came to Okoto. Something unknown; something new.”

In the blink of an eye, they were in the Forge of the Mask Makers, looking from behind at Roa and Tawhito, who were standing on a balcony and overlooking the City of the Mask Makers.

“It’s amazing how much we have been able to accomplish in only a few decades,” Roa said.

“We’ve been blessed, sister,” Tawhito replied.

“Well, we did help make the island,” she chuckled.

His brother laughed also. “I guess you’re right.”

Their attention was suddenly caught by a flicker of light in the sky. Looking up, they saw a streak of fire burning through the night. Straightening up, they watched as it crashed somewhere in the Region of Jungle, a large ball of smoke billowing in the distance. The ground beneath them shook from the impact.

“What was that?” Roa exclaimed.

“We’d better go see,” Tawhito said, turning and rushing into the Forge. His sister joined him.

They descended from the Forge and came into the City. The Toa followed them as they went. Several figures coming up the stairs towards the Mask Makers caught their eye. They were the Protectors. The original Protectors. They appeared very similar to the ones they knew, but they were also different.

“Mask Makers,” Flammik, Protector of Fire, stopped and looked at the smoke coming from the Region of Jungle. “What was that?”

“I don’t know,” Tawhito shook his head. “But we need to find out.”

“Was it a meteor?” Rokreng, Protector of Stone, suggested. “Those have fallen to Okoto before.”

Droton, Protector of Earth, shook his head. “This was different. It couldn’t have been a meteor.”

“Let us not waste any more time, then!” Bumonda, Protector of Water, readied her harpoon weapon.

“I agree,” Buzkayo, Protector of Ice, nodded. “Let’s go.”

“Onwards, then,” Jagiri, Protector of Jungle, smiled.

The group and the City dissolved before they reformed in the heart of the jungle. The Protectors and Mask Makers made their way towards the billowing smoke under the starry night. After a few moments, they broke through a wall of trees and out into a large field. They stopped to awe at the massive crater before them. A fierce fire burned in it, which was creating the plume of smoke.

“Flammik, Bumonda, Buzkayo,” Roa said. “Take care of the fire.”

The Protector of Fire nodded. “With pleasure.”

Stepping towards it, the three Protectors combined their elemental powers to extinguish the flame. They did in an instant, a massive ball of steam floating into the air. As it dissipated, the five others joined the three Protectors around the edge of the crater. Looking through the steam, they saw something glittering at the bottom of the hole.

Their eyes widened. “What is it?” Rokreng asked.

“I… I don’t know,” Droton said, mostly to himself.

“That’s not possible, is it?” Bumonda looked at the Mask Makers.

“How can a Mask of Power have fallen from the heavens?” Buzkayo gasped.

The glittering object laying at the bottom of the crater was indeed a Mask of Power, but unlike any they had ever seen. Its golden surface glittering with elemental energy.

Tawhito stepped forward climbed over the edge of the crater. Pressing his feet against the rock wall, he let go of the lip and slid down to the bottom. Roa followed his lead, as well as the other Protectors.

Arriving at the bottom, they gathered around the foreign Mask. Hesitantly, Tawhito knelt down and reached for the Mask.

“Careful,” Roa advised. Her brother nodded.

Cautiously, he wrapped his hands around the Mask of Power. As soon as he touched it, it lit up, brighter than it had been before. He gasped. Picking it off the ground, he noticed that it was warm to the touch. But, he felt that it was not warm because of the flames, but because of the Mask itself.

“It was a Mask of Power, but unlike any we had ever crafted. Any we could craft. It glowed when we picked it up; its surface was warm to the touch. We had no idea what its use was, or where it had come from.”

Around them, the crater dissolved, along with the Mask Makers and the Protectors, before the Toa found themselves back in the Forge. The furnace was burning brightly in the center of the room, serving as the only light in the room. The Mask Makers and Protectors were there also. On a table was the Mask of Time, still glowing with light. They were all watching it.

“This is absolutely impossible,” Droton said, examining the Mask.

“Yes, it is,” Flammik replied.

“But it’s here. It’s real,” Rokreng pointed at it. “How can it be real?”

“It fell from the heavens,” Buzkayo looked out the window. “But who created it?”

“Nothing we know of,” Bumonda answered.

Jagiri looked at the Mask Makers, who had been silent. “Do you have any ideas?”

Roa shook her head. “It can’t be a meteor. We know that. It couldn’t have come from Okoto. There’s literally nowhere it could have come from.”

“It could be a gift from the Great Ones?” the Protector of Stone suggested.

“No,” Tawhito said. “It’s not.”

“What is it, then?” the Protector of Ice raised an eyebrow.

“There’s only one way to find out,” the Mask Maker approached the Mask.

“Brother, don’t!” Roa realized what her brother was doing.

He held out his hand. “I have to. We have to know.”

“You don’t know what it’ll do to you!” she pleaded. “It could kill you!”

“I have to know where it came from. I have to know,” Tawhito looked at his sister. “And I have to do this.”

The two stared at each other for a long moment. Silence engulfed them, save for the crackling of the forge. After several moments, Roa nodded. Tawhito returned it, and turned his gaze to the Mask of Time.

Reaching out, he picked it up off the table. As soon as he did, it lit up, and felt warm in his hands again. Taking off his own Mask of Light and setting it on the table, he lifted the mysterious Mask to his face. When it was a few inches away, the magnetic clamps engaged and the Mask attached itself to him.

At once, a blast of power shot through him, and his vision went blank. A second later he saw flashes of light through the slits in the Mask, images of bizarre and unknown things.

He saw what appeared to be a tall Okotan using a strange tool to carve an even stranger Mask. It appeared to be incomplete; only half a Mask. The image then disappeared and was replaced by another tall Okotan, who was wearing the incomplete Mask. He held two blades and appeared to be standing with other tall Okotans in a cave.

There was a bright flash of light and the figures were gone. They were replaced by an army of beings clad in strange armor, climbing out of boats and onto the shore. Fierce, they stormed villages and plundered.

In another flash, he saw two figures: one clad in gold and glowing blue armor, wielding a hammer and shield, with wings on his back, and another clad in silver and glowing purple armor, also carrying a hammer and shield. The two figures charged at the warriors.

He was then blinded again, before he saw an object coming into view. It was a Mask of Power, but something was wrong with it. It seemed to be shrouded in shadow, and dark smoke plumed from it, as if it radiated darkness.

Then he fell unconscious.

He awoke moments later. He saw Roa and the Protectors gathered around him, looking down. Feeling the cold against his back, he realized he had fallen on the floor. Pushing himself off the ground, he was helped up by his sister and the Protectors.

On his feet, he saw that they had replaced the Mask of Time with his Mask of Light.

“What happened, brother?” Roa asked.

“I saw things,” Tawhito replied, looking at the Mask on the table. “That Mask showed me things.”

“Like what? What things?”

He shook his head. “I don’t know. But that Mask is incredibly powerful. The Vahi must be protected.”

They all looked confused. “Vahi?” Jagiri questioned.

“That’s its name. I don’t know how I know, but that’s it.”

“What do we do with it?” Flammik inquired.

The scene disappeared again, leaving the Toa in a void. They were then on a hill in the Region of Jungle. Ahead of them, silhouetted against the starry sky was a large structure, with a large pendulum swinging from side to side with a rhythmic ticking accompanying it.

It was the Temple of Time.

Traveling inside, they saw the six Protectors gathered under the large platform with the Mask Makers. A chamber was opened in the large pillar that supported the higher platform. Carefully, Tawhito lifted the Mask of Time and placed it inside. Stepping away, a piece of stone slid down and covered the Vahi, locking it away.

Silently, the Protectors stepped away and headed outside. Roa was about to step away when Tawhito produced a chisel and began carving a shape into the stone.

“What are you doing?” Roa asked.

Tawhito looked at him. “I don’t know.”

Finishing his carving several minutes later, he and Roa stepped back to examine it. It appeared to be a Mask of Power, but an incomplete one. It had three holes on each of the side plates, and a vent piece for the mouth.

“I saw it in my vision,” he explained. “I have no idea what it is.”

“Come on,” Roa said. “Let’s go.”

Tawhito nodded, and the two turned and walked away. The rhythmic ticking of the Temple continued as they left.

“The Mask of Time left an impression on me. I kept drawing a strange Mask I had never seen. It seemed to have been burned into my mind by the Vahi, and I had no idea what it meant. I had no idea what any of what the Mask had shown me meant, really.”

Everything suddenly went dark before they heard the Mask Maker speak again.

“As the years dragged on,” he continued. “My sister and I grew older, and our mortal bodies decayed. Deciding that our spirits must be preserved, my sister and I chose worthy Okotans to inherit our power. As our mortal bodies died, we imbued our Masks of Power with our energy, and gave it to our successor. They would become the next Mask Makers.”

They saw Tawhito and Roa giving their Masks of Power to two Okotans – one from the Region of Earth and the other from the Region of Water. The Mask Makers handed them their Masks, which glowed with elemental power.

“Thus began the cycle of the Toa of Light and the Toa of Shadow. Our power was passed on from generation to generation; from element to element. We ensured that there would always be a guardian of Okoto and a leader for the villagers. This continued for some time, each pair of Mask Makers innovating and improving the island while also protecting it from dangers.”

They saw the two Okotans from the Regions of Earth and Water standing before them, but they were now clad in gold and silver armor, respectively. They then saw two more, clad in similar armor, appear. They were from the Regions of Stone and Jungle. They were followed finally by Mask Makers from the Regions of Ice and Fire.

“The cycle continued for hundreds of years. The first successors were Urawoi and Voku. They served until they passed their power on to Nuya and Yuri, who were followed by Barua and Defali.”

The six Mask Makers disappeared before two familiar figures came into view. This time, they both were adorned in golden armor, carried crystal hammers, and each wore a distinctive Mask. Tawhito reappeared and walked towards them.

“Until recently, the power of the Toa of Light and the Toa of Shadow were embodied by Ekimu of the Region of Water, and Makuta of the Region of Earth. But, Ekimu’s time is over. The power has been passed, and it now resides in you,” he stopped in front of Harvali, who instinctively took a step back.

“What do I do?” she asked.

“I shall show you the past,” Tawhito said. “So you can ignite the future.”

Everything suddenly went dark before they saw a massive battle unfolding before them. They saw beings clad in skeletal armor warring against the people of Okoto. They saw the six Protectors – Mamuk, Owa, Agarak, Kerato, Epolim, and Udapo – fighting alongside the Okotans and the Skull Warriors, all trying to stave off the invaders.

The warriors were savage, using every weapon they had against the Okotans. Some warriors were able to fell dozens of villagers with one swing of their weapon, much like how Kulta had been able to fell all six Toa with one stroke.

“The Skull Raiders, hailing from another land, sought to conquer the island of Okoto. The Protectors, leading armies of villagers, fought against them. But they were outmatched, so desperate measures had to be taken.”

The Protectors and warriors were seconds from losing. The Skull Raiders were fierce warriors, and they couldn’t keep up. Mamuk saw this, and knew they only had one option.

“Retreat!” the Protector of Fire yelled.

Obeying, the Okotan forces turned and ran from the invaders. The invaders, laughing, charged after them. Their bodies bigger and stronger, they quickly caught up with them, only a few feet behind. They were about to strike when a flash of light blinded them.

Suddenly, several dozen of them were blasted backwards by a wave of energy. They fell several places down the hill before coming to a stop. Looking up, their eyes widened as they saw what attacked them.

Two figures, adorned in gold and blue, and one in silver and purple were standing at the top of the hill between them and the Okotans. They each had a hammer and shield, and were radiating with raw energy. The blue and gold had wings jutting from his back, and the purple and silver had thick armor encasing his body.

“What is this?” the lead Skull Raider, Kulta, exclaimed.

“You have attacked this land,” Ekimu, Toa of Light, said, his voice booming.

“You are now enemies of Okoto,” Makuta, Toa of Shadow, continued.

“You shall be punished,” they said in unison.

Kulta growled. “You shall be destroyed! We will destroy you!”

“We are the defenders of Okoto,” Makuta lifted his weapon. “Nothing has ever stood before us and won.”

“Obviously, you have never battled us,” Kulta chuckled. “We are the Skull Raiders, and no one has ever stood before us and won.”

His army roared their agreement behind him. The Toa smiled.

“Do you really want to risk that streak?” Ekimu replied.

“They do not call me ‘the Skull Grinder’ for nothing,” Kulta smiled, brandishing his tri-bladed weapon.

The two Toa looked and each other and shrugged. Returning their attention to the army, they nodded.

“Two forces, with apparent equal superiority, pitted against each other with even odds,” Makuta said. “We shall put it to a duel.”

“A duel?” Skull Grinder repeated.

“To determine the fate of the island,” Ekimu replied.

“Your best warriors against us,” Makuta added.

Kulta thought about it for a moment and nodded. “I accept.”

“Excellent,” the Toa of Light smiled.

The two Toa walked forward toward the Skull Raiders. Kulta nodded to a figure clad in orange and gray armor with two elemental blasters mounted to his wrists with blades attached to them. Together, the two of them walked forward toward the Toa. The six Toa and Harvali watched as the two parties met in the middle-ground between the two forces.

“Are you sure you want to do this?” Kulta chuckled. “You can still walk away.”

“You’re the ones who are going to want to walk away,” Makuta replied.

“I guess this is where we stand, then,” Skull Grinder readied his weapon.

Ekimu nodded. “Indeed.”

A fraction of a second later Kulta swung his weapon down on the Toa of Light. He reacted quickly, bringing up his shield to block. There was a flash of light as the two met. Ekimu struck the warrior with his hammer, sending him skidding backwards. The Toa then charged at him, holding his hammer in his hands.

Jumping into the air, the Mask Maker brought up his hammer to strike. Thrusting his weapon forward, a bolt of energy shot from Kulta’s staff. It struck Ekimu in the torso, knocking him to the ground.

Ekimu pushed himself up to see Skull Grinder rushing forward, his weapon at the ready. Flapping his wings, he shot into the air as Kulta swung his weapon at him. Seeing the Mask Maker take flight, the warrior shot another bolt of energy into the air. The Toa barely managed to dodge it. Swooping around, and flew at Skull Grinder.

Kulta saw him coming, and moved out of the way of Ekimu. He passed right by him, and he managed to strike the Toa with his weapon, knocking him out of the air. Rolling across the ground, the Toa of Light quickly recovered and was back on his feet. Wielding his hammer, he sent a blast of light at his opponent. It hit Kulta in full, sending him smashing into a large rock.

The shock of the impact made him lose his grip on his weapon. Falling to the ground, it rolled several feet away. He himself fell to the ground, his weapon out of reach.

The Toa of Light approached the felled warrior, standing over him. His eyes blazed and his armor shone like the sun.

Shifting their attention, the group of seven watched as Makuta dueled the other Skull Raider. The two were locked in fierce combat, with each equally matched against the other.

The Skull Raider swung his blades at the Toa of Shadow before activating his blasters. They sent powerful blasts of energy flying at Makuta. Flipping out of the way, the projectiles struck a boulder, blasting it to pieces.

Makuta shot forward, swinging his hammer as he did. It crackled with shadow energy, leaving a trail of darkness in his wake. The Skull Raider brought up his blades to block the Toa’s weapon. A blast of energy shot out as the two made contact. Pushing forward, the Skull Raider knocked Makuta away and ran at him.

Bringing up his shield, the Toa of Shadow blocked the Raider’s blades. Sparks flew as the two pushed against each other. Shifting his grip on his hammer, Makuta brought it around and struck the Skull Raider in the knee. Buckling, he lost his balance, allowing the Toa push his shield upwards. This did it for the warrior, and sent him crashing to the ground.

Getting up, Makuta walked over to the Skull Raider and stomped his foot on his chest as he attempted to get up.

“Don’t even think about,” he said.

The two Toa looked at each other. They had both defeated their opponents, and they lay felled at their feet.

“Now, you’ve lost,” Ekimu said to Kulta, who looked up weakly at him with blazing eyes.

Chapter 16: World's End

“You have two choices now,” Ekimu pointed his hammer at the Skull Grinder. “You either turn around and get back on your ships, or you become prisoners of Okoto forever.”

“We will not be your prisoners,” Kulta spat.

“Then you will get on your boats and sail away,” the Toa of Light replied.

Skull Grinder glared at him. “No.”

The Skull Raiders roared their applause at their leader, pounding their weapons on the ground. Makuta raised an eyebrow.

“You do realize what is happening here, right?”

“We will not submit to your rule, and we will not run away,” Skull Grinder pushing himself off the ground. His eyes were blazing brighter than ever.

“I promise you,” Ekimu said. “You don’t want to do this. There is no way this will end in your favor.”

The Skull Raider struggled underneath Makuta’s foot. “We will fight!”

“You will lose,” the Toa of Shadow replied.

However, the others were roused by these words. One, massive horns protruding from his head and dual axes in his hands stepped forward. The seven recognized him as Skull Basher.

“The Skull Raiders do not surrender and do not retreat!” he roared. “We will destroy you!”

Makuta rolled his eyes. “Your two mightiest warriors have fallen before us. You very definitely will not destroy us.”

“We will fight!” he roared, and the others joined him.

The two Toa exchanged glances. Stepping away from their felled opponents, coming to stand and face the Skull Raiders. They held their hammers with both hands, their armor shining with power. The invaders rallied behind the horned warrior, brandishing their weapons.

“One last chance,” Ekimu said. “Surrender or run.”

Behind them, Kulta and the Skull Raider got to their feet. Their grabbed their weapons and readied them.

“Neither!” Skull Grinder said, swinging his weapon at the Toa of Light.

There was a blast of light and a blast of darkness. Everything went white, and then it all went black. There were yells of pain and yells of surprise. There were crashes and the clanging of armor.

When everything came back into view, the Skull Raiders were pushing themselves off the ground. Their expressions were scared and startled. Ekimu and Makuta were standing in the middle of them. Shining with raw elemental energy, they radiated with pure power.

“Now,” they said in unison, their voices echoing. “You will leave this island… forever.”

Getting to his feet, Kulta looked in terror.

“Run!” he yelled.

None of the warriors objected. In terror, they ran for the hills. Ekimu and Makuta looked after them.

“That is not what they were supposed to do,” Makuta said.

“They’re heading further into the island!” Ekimu yelled, before running forward. His brother joined him an instant later.

The Skull Raiders had gotten a head start, and the Toa were several paces behind them. Wielding their weapons, they fired several blasts of elemental energy at the invaders. They struck just short of the retreating forces, sending dirt and rocks into the air. Several of the Skull Raiders at the rear would turn and fire blasts of their own weapons at them. The Toa managed to dodge them, but they impeded their pursuit.

“Where are they going?” Makuta asked.

“I don’t know, but we must stop them!” Ekimu replied.

They continued to run, slowly closing the gap between them the Raiders. The two parties continued to take shots, attempting to stop each other.

At the front of the Skull Raiders, Kulta turned to the Skull Raider who had fought Makuta.

“Axato. I need you to stop them,” he said.

“But they defeated us-,” he tried to protest.

“They were prepared then,” Skull Grinder cut over him. “They are vulnerable now.”

He looked at his leader a moment before nodding. Slowing down, he sunk to the back of the group. Behind him, Ekimu and Makuta were only several feet away from them. They fired multiple blasts, striking stragglers and sending them crashing to the ground. Readying his weapons, Axato stopped. The other Raiders passed by him on both sides, leaving him behind.

The Toa weren’t prepared for what happened next. They saw Axato standing still while all his comrades ran away. They saw the warrior turn around with his weapons at the ready. They saw them light up before they were engulfed in red light.

Crashing to the ground, the two Toa manged to look up to see Axato turn and walk away from them, before they felt unconscious from the impact.

Ekimu and Makuta were knocked out, but the Toa could still see the Skull Raiders. They watched as they ran into the mountains, leaving the Mask Makers behind.

The six Toa and Harvali watched as they traveled through the Region of Jungle for several hours, before coming to the entrance to a cave. Looking at it, Axato turned to Kulta.

“What are we doing here?” he asked.

“We shall hide out here and regroup, planning our next attack,” Skull Grinder replied.

Skull Basher raised an eyebrow. “Doesn’t it seem cowardice of us to hide away like this?”

“Those two warriors are unlike anything we’ve ever seen. They are immensely powerful,” Kulta said. “We cannot afford to face them again without a plan.”

After a moment, his two lieutenants nodded. Returning it, the Skull Grinder turned and walked into cave, leading his Skull Raiders into darkness.

The scene faded and the Toa were left in darkness before they saw Ekimu and Makuta, now reverted to their Mask Maker forms standing on the balcony, just as their predecessors did thousands of years prior. It was evening, and they were watching the city as it was bathed in a golden light.

“Do you think we’ll see those warriors again, Ekimu?” Makuta asked.

“They stayed on the island for a reason,” Ekimu replied. “I would say yes.”

“Not as though they’ll be a problem,” Makuta smiled. “We are plenty capable of taking them on.”

“As are the Protectors,” Ekimu said. “Speaking of whom: I do hope they will be able to attend the Festival of Masks.”

His brother chuckled and clapped him on the back. “Of course they will. They’ve never failed before.”

“Yes, but they just went home. I wouldn’t want to tear them from their families-.”

“It’s been a few days since they went home, and the Festival isn’t for another few weeks,” Makuta replied. “It’ll be fine.”

Ekimu nodded. “I suppose you’re right. I’m just being paranoid.”

Makuta laughed. “Yes. You’re good at that.”

Looking inside the forge, his brother sighed. “We should get back to crafting Masks.”

“Very well,” he pushed himself off the railing. Together, they headed inside the forge.

The group watched as the two Mask Makers crafted. Sparks flew in all directions as the sound of their hammers hitting metal rung in their ears. They saw Ekimu forge ordinary Masks, while Makuta was crafting stranger Masks. He kept looking over at his brother, like he was trying to make sure he didn’t see what he was doing.

The two continued even as the Toa’s view of them disappeared. They were then in the Region of Jungle, watching Agarak, Protector of Jungle, journey through the forest. He pushed branches and bushes out of the way as he went.

As he was walking, something scurried behind him. The Protector swung around, his hand on his Elemental Flame Bow.

“Who’s there?” he called.

No response.

He was about to turn back when Uxar came into view. The Creature hovered in midair, its wings beating fast. The Protector’s eyes widened as he watched the deity.

“Uxar? What?” Agarak gasped.

Staying still only for a moment, Uxar suddenly turned and zoomed out of view. The Protector attempted to chase after it, but the Creature was gone.

The Protector then disappeared, and the Toa found themselves back in the City of the Mask Makers. There was a crowd of Okotans gathered around the City Gate. Looking through the crowd, the seven saw the six Protectors crossing the bridge. The crowd cheered as they entered the City. Waving their acknowledgments, the Protectors pushed through the crowd.

Ekimu and Makuta were there waiting for them. They greeted the Protectors graciously.

“It is good to see you again, my friends,” Ekimu smiled, clanking fists with each of the Protectors.

“It is good to see you both as well,” Mamuk replied.

“We are very grateful that each of you was able to make it here for the Festival,” the Mask Maker said.

“He was very worried that you wouldn’t,” Makuta added with a grin.

The Protectors laughed as Ekimu cracked another smile.

Once more the scene dissolved and they formed in front of the massive statues of Ekimu and Makuta that stood in the City. It was day. A massive crowd was gathered there, cheering and waving. The two Mask Makers were standing on a stage, returning the waves of massive gathering. On a separate platform, the six Protectors stood. The platform was circled by red flags, which waved in the wind.

Tawhito’s voice echoed in their ears. “This the story of Ekimu and Makuta. This is the story of the Battle of the Mask Makers, and of the Great Cataclysm.”

Ekimu was speaking. “Gathered friends! Welcome to the Festival of Masks! I am so glad that you were all able to make it here! As many of you know, the Festival of Masks is held to honor the Protectors, who work endlessly to protect us and our villages from the dangers of the island.”

He gestured to the six Protectors.

“So, let’s thank the Protectors for all they have done for us!”

The crowd erupted into thunderous applause. The Protectors waved their acknowledgments, smiling broadly. Ekimu and Makuta were also clapping their hands. The noise died down after a few moments, and Makuta stepped forward to speak.

“The Festival of Masks is also to remember our heritage, and to remember all those who we have lost. It’s a time to come together, and a time to spend together.”

The crowd applauded, but slightly less enthusiastically than they had for the Protectors. Makuta frowned as Ekimu stepped past him.

“Now, go and enjoy the Festival!” he announced.

The crowd cheered as the Mask Makers stepped off the stage. The Protectors stepped down from their platform and went to join the Mask Makers, except for Agarak, who went join his family.

“That was really great, Ekimu!” Owa said.

“Yeah, thanks!” Udapo added.

“You’re very welcome,” the Mask Maker replied. “And I’m sure Makuta would say the same thing-.”

But Makuta was gone. Looking around, they saw him ascending the steps to the Forge of the Mask Makers.

“Why did Makuta leave?” Epolim asked.

“I don’t know. He’s been rather depressed lately,” Ekimu answered. “I’ve tried to talk to him, but he ignores me.”

Looking down for a moment, the Mask Maker looked up again. “Anyway. I wanted to invite you all, including Agarak, to tour the Forge with me!”

“Really?” Kerato gasped.

“Of course!” Ekimu said happily. “It’s about time you had a tour! Plus I’ve got a surprise for you there.”

The scene dissolved. They were then in the courtyard of the Forge. A tree stood smoking and bare, as if it had just caught fire. The Protectors stood with another Okotan, gathered around Ekimu and Makuta. Makuta was holding two Masks that each comprised of two different colors.

“How could you do this, Makuta?” Ekimu was saying, his voice full of anger. “The combination of more that one element in a Mask of Power is forbidden! There’s a sacred law! Why would you do this?”

“You wouldn’t understand!” Makuta replied, equally angry. “The villagers love your Masks. They couldn’t care less about mine!”

“Why do you say this? Of course the villagers love your Masks!” his brother said.

“You’re wrong,” he shook his head. “It’s only you they laud. Whenever I walk in a room, it’s like I’m not even there. You walk in a room and you get a standing ovation. You create a basic Mask and you’re praised. I create something unique and no one cares.”

Ekimu was speechless. “Brother… I don’t-.”

“Save your breath,” Makuta growled. “I don’t need your hollow apologies.”

Turning on his heel, he stormed off. Ekimu moved to call after him, but he was already gone. Sighing, he turned to the burnt tree.

“All Makuta wanted was the recognition his brother received. But he thought he had to break sacred laws to get it. There is nothing wrong with being unique, but there was a reason such Masks were forbidden,” Tawhito said.

“Ekimu, look!” Epolim said, suddenly pointing up towards a hill.

Following his gaze, the Mask Maker’s eyes widened.

“Mata Nui…” he muttered.

The eight Elemental Creatures were gathered on top of the hill, looking down on the scene. They shimmered with elemental energy.

“The Elemental Creatures? All at once?” Agarak gasped.

A second later they were gone, fading in the wind. The group was bewildered.

“What does it mean, Ekimu?” Mamuk asked.

“I don’t know,” the Mask Maker said. “But the eight never gather, only unless something bad is about to happen.”

He turned to them.

“We must go to the Temple of Time. Now.”

The next thing the seven knew, they were in the Temple itself. Placing his hand on the carving, Mamuk watched as it glowed with an orange light before sliding away to reveal a golden Mask of Power. Ekimu walked forward and carefully grabbed the Mask with both hands, lifting it out of the vault.

“It is beautiful, Ekimu,” Owa awed.

“Legend has it that there existed one object that came before our ancestors, older than the Elemental Creatures, older than Okoto, older than our planet, older than the stars themselves. This object was known as the Vahi, the Legendary Mask of Time,” the Mask Maker said, holding up the Mask of Power.

The Protectors were astonished. “How can this be, Ekimu?” Udapo inquired.

“Even I am not sure, but it is also said that this piece is only half of a greater Mask.”

“And where is the other half?” Kerato raised an eyebrow.

The Mask Maker sighed. “I do not know, Protector.”

“But this Mask,” he said, walking around to a staircase that led up to the platform above them, the Protectors following in his wake. “This Mask can give glimpses into the past and future and into other realms beyond our imagination.”

He reached up and placed his hand on the Mask of Creation, pulling it off and handing it to Epolim. Now taking the Mask of Time in both hands, he raised it up. With a flash of energy, the Vahi magnetically attached itself to the Mask Maker’s face.

“The Mask never shows fantasies. It only shows truth. However, it does not explain what it shows,” Ekimu spoke. “If the appearance of the eight Elemental Creatures in one place is indeed an omen… Let us hope I have the wisdom to comprehend what the Mask reveals.”

Suddenly the Mask began to glow, the Mask Maker shaking a little.

“I forgot how this Mask tingles...” he said. “I can see something… coming into view...”

Through the slits in the Mask, he could see flashes of random images. As they began to come into focus, he saw fires blazing, cities destroyed, strange, skull-faced creatures chasing villagers. There was another flash and he saw six differently colored comets falling from the sky. They crashed onto the island before he saw six figures emerge from them.

As he saw them, a single word echoed through his mind.

Toa…

“Toa?” he said aloud.

Suddenly everything went dark before he could see the Protectors standing in front of him. He grabbed the Vahi and pulled it from his face, energy streaking as he did so. He handed it to Mamuk, who took it and brought it back down to the vault.

“What did you see, Ekimu?” Owa asked as the Mask Maker placed the Mask of Creation back on his face.

“Destruction...” he said. “Horrors I could never have imagined. And...”

Udapo raised an eyebrow. “And?”

“Toa.”

The Protectors stared at the Mask Maker.

“Toa? Why? And what was the destruction?” Agarak asked.

Ekimu began walking down from the platform, followed by his the defenders of Okoto.

“I don’t know, but I feel we need to get to the Festival of Masks.”

As they walked to the airship, they were suddenly blinded by a flash of light. They covered their eyes before the light faded. Looking up, they saw Uxar hovering before them. Gasping, they awed at the sight of the Creature.

“Creature of Jungle!” Ekimu said, bowing. Uxar bowed in return.

“Why are you here, Creature?” the Mask Maker asked. “Why did you appear to us in the City?”

Holding its front claws together, the Creature glowed with elemental energy before a green crystal suddenly appeared between its claws. It hovered there, suspended in a green light. It then floated from Uxar and towards Ekimu. He held out his hands as it came to rest there. He looked at the crystal before looking up at the Creature.

“Of course…” he said. “I know what to do. Thank you.”

The Creature nodded its acknowledgment when, in a flash of light, it disappeared, leaving them alone. Ekimu continued to stare at the crystal as the Protectors stood bewildered.

“What does it mean, Ekimu?” Udapo asked.

He turned to them. “It means the end of the world is coming, and we need to move very quickly.”

The scene faded and they saw Makuta working in the Forge. He was hammering on a piece of metal that changed colors with each strike. Sparks flew in all directions as he continued to strike, grunting with each hit.

“The villagers worship Ekimu,” they heard him muttering. “They have never cared about me or what I’ve done. But… after they see this, they will finally see that I am as capable of great things as Ekimu!”

He continued slamming his hammer down on the piece of metal as it slowly took shape, roaring his rage into the dark forge.

Everything dissolved before they saw flashes of Makuta’s ship in the air, the Mask Maker at the helm. A box stood beside him, with a familiar symbol engraved on it. They then saw Ekimu forging Masks, and the six Protectors gathered around him, five of them carrying Elemental Crystals.

They were then in the Capital City. It was bright and peaceful, unlike how it was in the Region of Stone.

There was a massive crowd gathered before what they knew to be the museum. Makuta stood there on a raised platform with another Okotan.

“Greetings, citizens of the Capital City!” the villager announced. “We were hoping for both Mask Makers to be here, but please help me welcome our special guest, Makuta!”

The crowd cheered, albeit a little muted. Behind his Mask, Makuta frowned.

“People of Okoto,” Makuta said. “Today, you will witness history being made.”

He walked over to a box set upon a table to his left. Placing his hands upon it, he pulled it open and reached inside. Pulling something out, he revealed a golden Mask of Power, a strange shimmer running across its surface.

“Allow me to present my greatest work. With this – the Mask of Ultimate Power – I will be able to control the natural forces of Okoto, such as the climate, the weather and even the land itself.”

Makuta reached and pulled the Legendary Mask of Control from his face and placed the new Mask on. There was a flash of energy as he did so.

“No Okotan will never want for anything. Famine and natural disaster will be a thing of the past.”

The Mask suddenly began to shimmer more and more.

“And I will control it…” he said, his tone becoming distant and detached. “I will control… Control…”

Smoke began to billow from the Mask before it turned black. His form then erupted with dark energy. His armor began black and red, and he grew twice his height. He grabbed his hammer off his back, which changed to match his own transformation.

The ground began to shake as buildings began to fracture. The sky grew darker as energy filled the air. Okotans screamed and began to run away in all directions.

Above the city, Ekimu watched from his airship.

“Makuta!” he yelled over the growing roar of power filling the air. “He’s going to destroy Okoto!”

Grabbing his hammer and shield, the Mask Maker rushed to one of the side doors of the ship and jumped out. The Protectors yelled after him, but he was gone.

Landing, dust shot out all around him. He looked up to see his brother standing on the platform, deadly bolts of energy streaking in all directions.

“Brother!” Ekimu yelled. “Stop this now! You’ll destroy everything!”

“NO!” Makuta yelled. “I will control… Control…”

“Okoto will perish if you continue to wear that Mask! Please, take it off!”

“I…” the titan’s voice echoed. “I have stood in your shadow for too long, brother. I deserve my glory!”

“This is not glory! This is destruction!”

“I will rid myself of you!” Makuta yelled. Jumping forward, he brought his hammer down on Ekimu. The Mask Maker rolled out of the way as his brother hit the ground. A shockwave rippled from the impact, sending Ekimu to the ground. Spinning around, Ekimu unleashed a barrage of energy from his crystal hammer.

Makuta blocked the blast with his hammer, retaliating with a blast from his own hammer. Ekimu jumped out of the way of the bolt of energy, rolling across the ground.

His brother came running at him with his hammer. He swung it at him, and the Mask Maker blocked it with his shield. Shifting, Ekimu swung his own hammer at Makuta. The two collided in midair, sparks of energy flying everywhere. The two brother pushed against each other, locked in battle.

“Please, Makuta,” Ekimu pleaded. “Please…”

There was a blast of energy, and Ekimu slid across the ground. Pushing himself up, he saw that Makuta was glowing with raw power now. Taking his hammer in his hands, Ekimu closed his eyes. When he opened them again, tears were streaking down his cheeks.

“I’m sorry, brother.”

Running forward, he charged Makuta. The titan, seeing him, sent bolts of energy his way. Ekimu dodged them, the bolts hitting the ground behind him. Jumping into the air, he swung his weapon at the Mask of Ultimate Power.

Makuta roared as the hammer hit the edge of the Mask and he felt it detach. Both brothers watched it soar into the air, energy trailing from it. Cracks then appeared in the surface of the Mask, and together, they watched as it exploded.

Then everything went white.

And then it all when black.

---

The Toa found themselves standing in the void again. They were silent, still absorbing what they had seen. They looked up as Tawhito appeared again in front of them.

“So,” Tahu said. “That’s how it happened.”

The Mask Maker nodded. “Yes. That was the Battle of the Mask Makers.”

“Why did you show us this?” Kopaka asked.

“Because you needed to see what led Makuta to make the Mask of Ultimate Power,” he answered.

“Well, it was obvious,” Pohatu replied. “It was ambition and greed.”

“That was only a part of it,” Tawhito shook his head.

They were confused. “What was the other part?” Gali inquired.

“Makuta was definitely ambitious, and his heart was full of greed, but that is only because the villagers preferred Ekimu over him. The villagers did not treat them as equals, but treated Makuta as lesser. Yes, he did allow that greed to fester inside of him, but all he wanted was to be praised like his brother. He made a mistake.”

“A pretty big one,” Lewa muttered.

“But, one mistake does not mean that that person is forfeited the right of grace. That is why I showed you these things.”

“To show us that Makuta is evil?” Kopaka said.

“Makuta is not evil, Toa of Ice,” Tawhito replied. “The Mask of Ultimate Power feeds on prominent characteristics of its wearer and amplifies them. Makuta was ambitious and coveted his brother’s fame and success. He wanted to be revered like we was. And when he wore the Mask, it channeled all his anger and greed, and that’s what caused the power to grow out of his control.”

“Still his fault,” Pohatu crossed his arms.

“That is not the point,” Tawhito shook his head. “I’m saying that Makuta was also a victim. All he wanted was recognition. He still wants that, but thousands of years in the Shadow Realm has warped him. He needs redemption.”

“So you’re saying…” Tahu trailed off.

“…That Makuta can be, and needs to be, forgiven and redeemed. Like us all. There is still good in him, but he’s been overshadowed by the Mask.”

He turned to Harvali. “You are the only one who can show Makuta grace. You are the only one who can bring light to the darkness, and save Okoto, once and for all. You’re the only one who can bring him to redemption.”

The archaeologist was about to ask a question when Tawhito faded, and everything went white.

Chapter 17: Night of a Thousand Stars

In the Region of Fire, there was nothing but molten fields and downed pillars that once represented Okoto’s history, which now laid in dust.

Suddenly, there were sparks of energy falling through the air, coming from nowhere. They became bigger and more numerous. A second later they exploded in a blast of light before fading seconds later. In their place were seven figures, six of them tall warriors clad in armor while the other was a villager.

Kopaka looked around in shock. “We’re back? How are we back?”

“I’m wondering more about how we got there in the first place,” Onua replied.

Harvali picking up the Mask of Time, looked at it. Its golden surface didn’t glimmer with the power of elemental energy like it had before they had been taken to the void.

“What do we do now?” Gali asked.

“Hang on a minute,” Tahu said, surveying the area.

Lewa raised an eyebrow. “What is it?”

“Where are the others?”

And sure enough, the Protectors, Creatures, and Okotans were all gone. As were Makuta and his forces. They were alone in the valley.

“Are they dead?” Harvali gasped. “Were they killed in the blast?”

Onua was watching the night sky. “No, I don’t think so,” he said.

They all turned to the Toa of Earth. “What makes you say that?” Kopaka asked.

“The stars are in different positions than they were when we fought Makuta,” he said. “This means that we’ve traveled ahead in time. A week, I’d say.”

They were shocked. “A week?” Tahu’s eyes widened. “How did we travel ahead a week?”

“In the void, Tawhito said that the Mask of Time had taken us out of that moment,” Onua explained. “So what if it dropped us back a week later?”

“Is that possible?” Gali raised an eyebrow.

“At this point,” Pohatu crossed his arms, “we should probably stop asking that question.”

“That would make sense,” Harvali replied. “I just can’t wrap my head around it…”

Lewa stepped forward “So what happened to them? Where are the Protectors and Creatures now?”

“Probably taken by Makuta,” the Toa of Stone answered. “I’d bet on that.”

“Which means we have to get them back,” the archaeologist said. “By any means.”

Tahu shook his head. “Right now, that is the riskiest thing we could do. We would essentially be giving ourselves up to Makuta. Without the Protectors and Creatures, we do not stand a chance against him.”

“Are you saying we should run?” Kopaka asked.

“For now,” he replied. “We must regroup, and we have to devise a plan. We will attack the City, but not right now. Not until we’re ready.”

“So where do we go?” Lewa questioned.

“The Region of Earth,” Onua suggested. “We can hide out there. There’s a lot of underground caverns for us to use.”

“Alright,” Tahu nodded. “That’s where we’ll go.”

“I don’t feel good about running,” Pohatu said.

“It’s all we have,” the Toa of Fire retorted. “Makuta is too powerful, and we must regroup.”

The group fell silent, and seeing this, Tahu readied his weapons.

“Okay. Let’s go.”

---

Makuta was looking out over the City of the Mask Makers again from one of the windows of the Forge. He watched as his minions wandered through the streets, aimless until he commanded them to do his bidding. One thing about being a dictator over mindless slaves was the undeniable fact that it was incredibly lonely.

Sure, there was Umarak and Skull Basher, but those two were still under his control, even though they could think freely. Perhaps seizing control wasn’t turning out how he thought it would.

It was all he had, though. Everyone else rejected him. Even in his death, Ekimu was still looked to for guidance. And his reincarnation into the archaeologist did not help him crush his brother’s memory.

He grunted. He had waited thousands of years, plotting, growing his power, all to take revenge on his brother and the people of Okoto. So far he had driven them from their cities and killed their idol, but he did not have complete control. The Toa still led a resistance, even if he had taken their guide, allies, and Creatures. They were dangerous, and they had the Toa of Light.

They had to be snuffed out. He had to control.

He turned as the footsteps of Skull Basher filled his ears. His lieutenant stopped beside the furnace, bowing his head.

“My lord,” he said.

“What do you have to report?” Makuta asked.

“We have yet to find any trace of the Toa anywhere on the island,” Skull Basher replied. “Nowhere. They are most likely gone.”

“There will be a sign of them. Someday,” the Mask Hoarder said, returning to his gaze of the City. “They are not gone. I am sure of this.”

Skull Basher stepped forward. “What do we do until they reappear?”

“We wait.”

His lieutenant gazed at him for a moment and then nodded. Bowing again, he turned and walked away. As he approached the spiral staircase, Umarak appeared from the first floor. The two glanced at each other as they passed. Umarak approached his master and bowed.

“My Hunter. What do you want?”

Umarak looked up. “My lord. I want to entreat you to let me absorb the Creatures-.”

Makuta’s eyes flashed. “You have asked this before. Ever since we captured the Creatures, you have pleaded with me to let you drain them of their elemental power.”

“Because it is my destiny to do so!” he replied. “My sole purpose is to hunt the Creatures and drain their energy!”

“Your purpose,” the titan took a step forward, his eyes blazing. “Is to serve me. I changed your destiny. Your destiny belongs to me now.”

“But my lord-.”

“No!” he snapped. “I will let you drain them, but only when I allow you to. Understand?”

The Hunter glared at him for a moment before bowing again. “Yes, my lord.”

His blazing eyes fading, Makuta strode forward and walked past Umarak. He continued towards the spiral staircase. The Hunter turned to watch him when the titan stopped and looked at him.

“Come with me,” he said.

Getting up, Umarak walked forward and joined his master as they descended the steps.

---

“We have to get out of here,” Nilkuu pulled at the bars again.

“How many times are you going to say that?” Kivoda rolled his eyes. “We’ve been here for a week.”

“Well, we haven’t gotten out of here in a week, have we?” Nilkuu retorted.

“Does it matter if we get out?” Izotor said sadly. “I mean, the Toa are gone. Even if we did get out, we wouldn’t be able to do anything.”

“We’d have the Creatures,” the Protector of Stone replied.

“Makuta was able to take all of us,” Korgot shook her head. “We need the Toa.”

A deep voice filled their ear. “I need the Toa, too.”

The titan himself was descending the spiral staircase to the dungeons. Behind him, Umarak followed, his eyes on the cells that held Elemental Creatures. The Mask Hoarder stopped in the center of the dungeon, looked at all his prisoners.

“What do you want this time, Makuta?” Narmoto stepped up to the bars of his cell.

“The same thing I’ve always wanted: the Toa.”

“And our answer is always the same,” Vizuna said. “We don’t know.”

He raised an eyebrow. “Are you sure?”

“Considering that they disappeared in a blast of light,” the Protector of Jungle crossed his arms. “Yes, we’re sure.”

Makuta brandished his staff, which crackled with energy. “We’ve had this conversation a number of times. I am sick of the same answers.”

“Maybe we give the same answers because it’s the truth?” Kivoda suggested with narrowed eyes.

“Or you’re simply trying to protect your allies,” he smiled. “That is what you do, after all?”

“Even if we knew anything,” Nilkuu said. “We wouldn’t tell you.”

“Soon you’ll realize that your duty to the Toa is meaningless. If you haven’t noticed, the time of heroes is over. Ekimu is dead and the Toa are on the run. My victory is at hand.”

Izotor stood up. “You’re wrong. The Toa will return, and they will send you back to the Shadow Realm, where you belong.”

The titan looked at the Protector of Ice for a moment before tilting his head back and letting out an ear-splitting laugh.

“I can guarantee you that that will not happen.”

“Careful with your arrogance, titan,” Korgot narrowed her eyes. “It may just topple you.”

“You’re the ones who are going to want to watch your words, Protectors,” Makuta smiled. “You are the ones in the cells.”

“Go away, tyrant,” Kivoda spat. “We’re not giving you anything.”

His face suddenly became grave. “If you do not tell me where the Toa are, I will give the Creatures to Umarak, and then hopeless to stop me.”

Umarak looked up, his interest piqued.

“We don’t know where the Toa went,” Narmoto replied. “And if giving the Creatures to Umarak will stop the Toa from defeating you, why haven’t you done it yet?”

“I like to give my enemies hope,” Makuta came face to face with the Protector. “Only to strip it away from them.”

He chuckled. “Well, it’s good that the Toa are gone, then. Because it gives you hope of stripping away their power, but you’ll end up being the one who is hopeless.”

Contorting with rage, the titan snarled at him before turning and storming out of the dungeon and up the stairs. Umarak, looked at the Creatures in their cells before following his master. The Protector of Fire, sighing, took a seat on the dirt of his cell. The others looked at him.

“We need to get out of here,” Korgot finally said.

---

It had been a week, and they had restored their camp at the temple. Glonor had to admit that he was glad that they had returned. It was a sanctuary, and he figured that they probably shouldn’t have left in the first place. Of course, all that mattered now was that they were safe here.

He was watching the perimeter when Cesea approached him. Smiling, he turned to greet the villager of Stone.

“How goes the guard-duty?” she asked.

“Dull,” he replied. “But it’s better than being attacked.”

She chuckled. “True.”

“What are you up to?” Glonor inquired.

“Nothing much,” Cesea shrugged. “Same old same old.”

“I can relate to that,” he remarked.

She paused for a moment, before looking into the jungle. “Do you think we’ll be here forever?”

He followed her gaze. “I don’t know. We could be.”

“Well,” she sighed. “At least it’s beautiful.”

“It sure is,” he nodded.

They continued to gaze out at the jungle around them, which teemed with life. They saw insects fly in the air and large animals stalk between the trees. The sun filtered dimly through the treetops, creating patches of light on the forest floor. A gentle breeze brushed past them.

Suddenly the quiet was broken by a scream from the other side of the grounds. Looking at each other, the two Okotans immediately ran in the direction of the noise, joined by several others. Coming to the scene, they saw a discarded blade laying in the grass, with no sign of its owner anywhere around.

Glonor readied his bow. “Something is very wrong here.”

“Aren’t you perceptive?” came a familiar voice.

The Okotan turned as he was hit by a blazing blast of energy. It struck him with full force, sending him crashing to the ground.

Looking to where the blast had come from, the Okotans saw three figures standing there: Mask Snatcher, Rock Crusher, and Morvarid. Mask Snatcher had a broad grin on his face while Morvarid glowed with energy. Rock Crusher smashed his fists together and growled. The villagers readied their weapons.

“Why so surprised, little Islanders?” Mask Snatcher chuckled. “I did say that you would pay. That was a promise, and I never go back on a promise.”

Glonor got to his feet, helped by Cesea, and readied his bow. “You can’t expect to beat us.”

“You won only because I underestimated you,” the reptile replied. “You will not be so lucky this time.”

“We don’t need luck,” Cesea said. “We never have.”

Morvarid’s eyes flashed. “That’s a nice lie you tell yourselves to feel important and strong. To feel that you yourselves can propel the dark. But you’re wrong. You’re weak.”

“Honestly, I don’t care what you have to say about us,” Glonor answered. “We know who we are, and we know who you are. You’re monsters. You hide in the dark and try to diminish the light. But the dark can never cover up the light. You’re the ones who think you’re strong but are really weak.”

Enraged, Rock Crusher roared. The others winced.

“That’s enough,” Mask Snatcher snarled, readying his weapon. “It’s time you were returned to Makuta.”

“That ain’t happening,” Glonor replied.

There was a moment before Morvarid fired his weapon. The Okotans jumped out of the way as the blast struck the ground, sending dirt into the air. Okotans in the temple, who had come out to see the commotion, gasped in shock. The guard, recovering, charged the attackers.

Glonor fired a barrage of projectiles at Mask Snatcher. Spinning his staff, he blocked the attack. Running out of ammo, the Okotan stopped to reload, and that’s when the reptilian being moved to strike. Swiftly, he came towards the villager and brought his weapon down on him. Glonor saw this, and a split second before being hit, dove out of the way.

He rolled across the dirt and managed to reload his weapon. Lifting it up, he opened fired again on his opponent. Several of the projectiles hit Mask Snatcher before he was able to block them again with his staff.

Behind him, an Okotan of Fire readied a blade and threw it at the reptile. It struck him in the back, causing him to fall forward. He was then hit by Glonor’s projectiles, sending him to the ground. Above him, Glonor and four other Okotans surrounded Mask Snatcher.

A few paces away, Cesea and three other Okotans were dodging powerful blows from Rock Crusher. Cesea jumped out of the way as the beast brought his fist down on her. He hit the ground instead, causing a tremor that shook them all.

One villager, from the Region of Water, with a bow, fired several arrows at the beast. They shattered against his rock-solid hide. He turned towards the Okotan, his jaw shaking with rage and his eyes blazing brightly. Roaring, it charged the villager. She jumped out of the way of the blow, while an Okotan of Ice lunged with a spear at the creature.

To his surprise, and with nothing but sheer, he managed to hit a soft spot between Rock Crusher’s plates of armor. Piercing his flesh, the beast roared in agony. It turned and grabbed hold of the spear. Extracting it, it snapped it in half and approached the villager.

Around him, more of the Islanders attempted to hit soft spots, trying to create more fissures in his natural flesh. He attempted to knock them away, but they continued to come. He roared, his anger boiling. Cesea smiled.

Morvarid was not faring better than his partners. He fired blast after blast of energy in an effort to subdue the more than a dozen Okotans swarming him. A few were knocked away, but they were replaced almost immediately by others. He was nearly overwhelmed.

“This was a bad idea,” he muttered to himself.

Between dodging attacks by the villagers, he saw that both Mask Snatcher and Rock Crusher were in similar situations. They were all caught between a rock and a hard place, with nowhere to go. He armed his weapon, but he knew it would be no use.

Unless…

There was something. Something that he could do. It was risky, but it could be his – their – way out. Around him, the Okotans swung their weapons. Morvarid, taking a step back, readied his weapon. Concentrating as best he could, he called upon his power. Blue energy began to glow between gaps in his armor.

The Okotans, seeing this, immediately ceased their attacks. Power began to radiate from the being as everything was cast in a blue light. Across the field, the villagers stopped to watch as more and more energy began to shoot from Morvarid before there was a massive flash of light, and then nothing.

Glonor then found himself on the ground, on his side. Opening his eyes, he saw Cesea and all the other Okotans also on the ground, unconscious. Rolling over, he was met with Mask Snatcher, Rock Crusher, and Morvarid standing over him.

“I told you that you wouldn’t be so lucky this time,” Mask Snatcher grinned.

---

The Toa and their Okotan companion continued their march through the Region of Fire to the Region of Earth. Tahu and Kopaka led the charge, while the others followed. The two held their heads high, even though they felt the same as the others, who stared at the charred ground.

They were tired. Tired of running, hiding, and losing everything. Tired of being failures. It was their destiny to defeat evil and save the island, but so far, the only evil they had defeated was the Skull Creatures, and everything after that had gotten the better of them. Umarak had been stopped, but only too late. Makuta had almost been resealed in the Shadow Realm, but they had failed.

And now they were on the run, without the Creatures, the Protectors, or their guide Ekimu. They were alone.

Harvali was the first to give voice to their thoughts.

“I can’t believe that we’re fleeing,” she lamented. “We should be taking a stand against Makuta!”

“Every time we face him, we fail,” Onua replied. “To continue doing that would do no one any good.”

“Other than giving Makuta the satisfaction of destroying us,” Pohatu said.

“If we were to face the Mask Hoarder again without our Creatures and lost,” Gali added. “The island would most surely fall into darkness forever. We can’t allow that to happen.”

“The island has already fallen into darkness!” the archaeologist snapped. “Literally! Both Ekimu and Agil are gone. There can only be darkness.”

Lewa looked back at her. “Don’t-.”

“I thought the Toa were supposed to be able to face any threat, no matter what they thought the outcome would be,” she cut across him. “Or, at least, that’s what I grew up believing, But I guess what we grow up believing isn’t always true, either.”

“Harvali-.”

“I grew up hearing stories of how the Toa were legendary beings of untold power,” she continued. “You were supposed to be able to take a stand against the darkness and the evil, and that they would run and hide at the sight of you. That’s how I always saw you, and that’s what you did when you first arrived, and when you faced Umarak, and then Makuta.

“But, now all you seem to do is run. Sure, we fought Makuta when we still had Ekimu, but that was only because we had to. If he hadn’t found us, we would’ve probably made it to the Labyrinth of Control. The same for our skirmish before we met Tawhito. I don’t know if it’s because you can’t unite with your Creatures, but you’re acting like cowards.”

“We’re not cowards,” Tahu replied. “We’re just-.”

“’Just’ what? Just trying to save yourselves?”

“No, it’s not that-.”

“Trying to regain your strength?”

The Toa of Fire stopped and turned to face the Okotan. The others stopped around them.

“We’re trying to save you.”

She was confused. “Why would you be trying to save me?”

“Because you’re Ekimu’s legacy, and we need you to stop Makuta,” he said. “If we lost you, then it’s all over. We would have failed, for good. We can’t risk that until we have a plan.”

“You can’t rely on the Toa of Light all the time,” the archaeologist replied. “I’m just one piece-.”

“And if we don’t have all the pieces,” Onua joined. “Then we’re going to fall apart.”

“But surely I can’t be that important.”

“If that vision is to be believed,” Lewa stepped forward. “You’re very important.”

Harvali held her head. “But I don’t want to be. I can’t save Okoto. I can’t.”

Silence fell among them again, and not for the last time on their journey. They all stood still, before Gali knelt down in front of the Okotan. She placed her hand on her shoulder and smiled.

“None of us thought we could save island when we first arrived, either,” she said.

“I did,” Tahu and Kopaka interjected. The Toa of Water glanced irritably at them.

“Well, the rest of us were certainly unsure if we could fulfill our destiny and save the island. We weren’t even sure of each other. But, as we began to work together, and as we saw that we were capable of fulfilling our destiny, we knew that we could do it.”

The Toa smiled. “And I know you can do it.”

Harvali looked up and met her gaze, and smiled. Looking around, the other Toa were also looking at her and smiling. Wiping a tear from her eye, the Okotan nodded.

“Okay. Thank you.”

Pohatu looked to the horizon. “Now let’s get moving again. We still have a lot of ground to cover.”

So, together, the group of seven continued on, as a night of a thousand stars twinkled brightly in the sky above them.

---

Lost.

It had been a long time since his cliff-side duel with the six Protectors, and still Skull Slicer had not been able to find his way out of the chasm.

Skull Slicer had failed twice in his duty to his masters, once at the arena and the other when he attempted to defeat the Protectors. Both times he had been banished, and he knew that it was most likely punishment from the gods for his failure.

He continued his aimless walk through the dense fog, to where he was going unknown. He couldn’t even see the sky above. Everything was shrouded in shadow.

Had the others succeeded where he had failed? Had Makuta finally returned? The ground had trembled a few times in the last few weeks, but he didn’t know what they meant. He could only hope that his brothers had completed their task.

The warrior kept on when his foot suddenly struck something in the dark. The object moved when he hit it. He heard it clatter a few feet away. Feeling his way through the dark, he made contact with the mysterious object.

Picking it up, he felt warmth run through his flesh-less fingers. To his shock, the object began to glow, revealing its form. It was familiar, and completely impossible.

The Golden Mask of the Skull Spiders.

He couldn’t believe it. This was the Mask the Lord of Skull Spiders had used to control the swarms – and him. It must have been lost when the Toa defeated the beast.

Now he had found it, and it was his.

A smile broke across his face as he stared into the glowing Mask of Power.

Chapter 18: All Roads Lead...

The sky was overcast as they made their way through the Region of Earth. The rough terrain was tough for those who weren’t accustomed to it. Onua and Pohatu had no problem, but the others had a hard time keeping up with their brothers.

“How can anyone live on this land?” Kopaka groaned. “It’s impossible!”

Onua gave a hearty laugh. “People in the Region of Earth don’t live ‘on this land’, brother,” he said. “They live under the earth. I thought you knew that?”

“I’ve never been here before,” the Toa of Ice replied.

“It shows,” Pohatu muttered.

They continued to traverse the landscape, jumping over rivers of purple light, which were created by glowing crystals deep in the earth. It was beautiful, but they were too wary to appreciate it.

After a while, the Toa of Earth stopped them. They were standing at the edge of what appeared to be a cliff, overlooking a vast valley.

“I think we’ve found our refuge,” he said, attaching his hammer to his back.

Lewa looked around the expanse. “Where?”

“Did I not say under the earth?” Onua answered.

Suddenly he jumped off the cliff and disappeared from sight. The Toa rushed forward to see what their brother was doing, and saw him standing on a ledge several feet below them, looking up. He was smiling and waving for them to join him.

“Come on down!” he called.

Hesitant, but trusting their brother, the five Toa jumped off the cliff. Lewa carried Harvali as they jumped. Landing on the ground below, they joined Onua. He was looking at the cliff-face, and they turned to see what he was seeing.

They quickly found that it wasn’t a cliff-face, but a cave. But it wasn’t just simply a cave; it was the entrance to a village. Huts sprouted from the ground and hung from the ceiling. Purple lights illuminated the darkness.

“Welcome to the village of Atakus,” Onua announced proudly.

Looking over the underground city, they saw dozens of curious Okotans coming to see them. They looked in awe at the Toa, their eyes wide and full of hope. The villagers bowed when Onua led the group into the cave. Entering the village square, they found themselves surrounded by a large crowd of Islanders.

One, obviously the chieftain, came up to them and bowed. They bowed in return. He looked up at them.

“Great Toa!” he exclaimed. “It is an honor. What brings you to our village?”

“We seek refuge,” the Toa of Earth said. “For a few days, at least.”

“Of course, great Toa!” the Chieftain nodded. “But may I ask why?”

Tahu sighed. “We took a bad hit, and we need a place to lay low for a little. That is all.”

Looking at the Toa again, the Chieftain bowed. “Come with me, Toa,” he said and turned to lead them further into the village.

The Toa, glancing at each other, followed.

---

Mask Snatcher, Rock Crusher, and Morvarid stood around the caravan of villagers. They had been stripped of their weapons, and were now the trio’s prisoners. No one attempted to make an escape, for they were afraid of what their captors would do if they rebelled.

Glonor awoke on the ground. Looking around, he saw Cesea sitting by him. He began to get up, and she helped him. He grunted as he felt a sharp pain in his side. Looking down, he saw a large dark patch in his flesh.

“Yeah,” Cesea whispered. “They did a real number on us.”

“What happened?” he asked, holding his head.

“In short: they wiped the floor with us,” she replied. “Morvarid used some kind of energy blast to knock us all out. It was cheating, if I’m being honest, but it doesn’t matter now.”

“What matters now is getting out,” he finished for her. She nodded.

“They’re still set on taking us back to the City of the Mask Makers and delivering us to Makuta,” Cesea said. “We need to make sure that doesn’t happen. Who knows what that tyrant will do to us if we are returned to him.”

“I’m not particularly keen on finding out,” Glonor narrowed his eyes when he saw Mask Snatcher watching the crowd.

“What do we do?” an Okotan they knew as Vora, from the Region of Fire, asked.

“I don’t know,” he shook his head. “We don’t have any resources. You’ll have to give me time to think.”

At that moment, Mask Snatcher got up on a large rock, overlooking the crowd. Clearing his throat, he smiled, and began to speak.

“Good people of Okoto!” he said happily. “If you had not guessed; you are our prisoners, and you will do everything we command you to. It’s a bit of a journey to the City of the Mask Makers, so I don’t want any of you getting any ideas of a rebellion,” his eyes seemed to fall upon Glonor and Cesea.

He continued. “If you fail to obey our commands, or try to turn against us, you will be dealt with according to your trespasses. And, as a word of warning,” he smiled again. “All trespasses will result in instant death. Understand? Good. Now, let’s get moving.”

Jumping down from the rock, the reptilian being walked in the direction of the City of the Mask Makers. At the back of the caravan, Rock Crusher roared, indicating to the Okotans that they had to start moving. Reluctantly, they did, following Mask Snatcher into the forest as Morvarid and Rock Crusher flanked them.

“Well,” Cesea said as they walked. “Here’s that time you asked for.”

Glonor looked at her grimly before nodding. “We’ll get out of this,” he replied. “I promise.”

---

Makuta stared into the purple flames of the forge. He was stroking his chin, obviously deep in thought.

He knew that it was only a matter of time before the Toa resurfaced, and when they did, they would come for him. To protect his power, and everything that he had achieved since he had returned to the island only a few weeks prior, he had to be ready for them.

Skull Basher entered the room. The titan looked up.

“Ah, my lieutenant,” he said. “Just who I wanted to see.”

“What is it, my lord?” the brute asked.

“It’s only a matter of time before the Toa come for me,” Makuta stepped away from the flame, holding his hands behind his back. “I want to be ready for them when they do.”

“I will increase the number of my warriors and the Elemental Beasts that patrol the edges of the City,” Skull Basher replied.

But the Mask Hoarder shook his head. “The Skull Creatures and Elemental Beasts are not enough. The Toa have dispensed countless numbers of them. We need something new.”

“What do you suggest?” he inquired.

Thinking for a moment, Makuta’s eyes suddenly lit up.

“Why had I not thought of this before?” he said excitedly.

Grabbing his tribal staff, the titan walked over to the far wall of the room. Outstretching his hand, his fingers flashed with energy before a rift appeared in front of him. It widened into a portal, complete darkness on the other side. It was foreboding, as if pure evil radiated from the rift. He stepped through. Hesitantly, Skull Basher followed him.

They were in the Shadow Realm. The Capital City loomed around them. The glowing purple outlines of the buildings were the brightest lights there. Everything appeared blurred and unstable. Corrupted villagers, Elemental Beasts, Skull Warriors, and Skull Spiders roamed aimlessly through the streets. Skull Basher stayed close to his master as they journeyed.

“We need to get to my tower,” Makuta said. His voice echoed in the darkness. “That is where I grew the Elemental Beasts. There, I will create a new army.”

Skull Basher saw the tower reaching high into the black sky. They continued walking when something shimmered before them. The warriors stopped and readied their weapons. A flash suddenly blinded them for a moment, before it faded and they saw two figures standing there.

One was skeletal, his whole body glowing green and purple. He carried a long sword and shield with a blade attached to it. The other wore a long cloak, his head covered. They could only see his blazing red eyes. He carried what appeared to be a large dream catcher as a staff.

“So,” the cloaked figure spoke. “The tyrant returns.”

The Mask Hoarder and his lieutenant watched several python-like creatures slither into place around them. They all carried two-pronged weapons, which glittered with energy.

“Dream Snatcher. Good to see you,” Makuta said, his eyes flashing.

“What brings you back to the Shadow Realm?” the warden of the Pit asked.

“The Toa threaten to overthrow me,” he began. “I need new warriors in order to defeat them.”

“So you want to take advantage of my home once again for your own gain,” Dream Snatcher replied. “Why am I not surprised?”

“This is to benefit us both,” Makuta said. “I know the Toa have been a thorn in your side as much as they have been in mine. Perhaps we can… make an arrangement?”

The red lights underneath the jailer’s hood narrowed. “Such as?”

“Well,” the titan smiled. “If you help me defeat the Toa, I will let you lock them in the Pit for the rest of eternity.”

“What about their elemental powers?” Demon Warrior interjected. “Because they used those last time to escape.”

“I will take care of that. Do not worry,” Makuta grinned darkly.

Dream Snatcher turned away to think about it for a moment. He then turned back to the titan and extended his hand.

“You have a deal,” he said.

Looking at it, Makuta smiled again before taking it.

---

“How do we get out of these cells?” Korgot asked, running her hand alone the bars.

“These prisons are made from ironwood and inhibit the abilities of anyone who is held in them,” Izotor replied. “They were specifically designed to keep people in.”

“That didn’t stop Makuta from opening them when he fell through the floor,” Nilkuu chuckled.

“Well, Makuta ain’t the lightest guy around,” Kivoda said.

“We need a different way to get out,” Axato joined, “because I’m pretty sure that there isn’t going to be an overweight titan crashing through the ceiling again.”

The Protectors turned towards him. “Then what do you suggest?” Vizuna inquired.

“We need to get hold of a weapon of some kind,” the Skull Raider replied, pulling himself closer to the bars. “I’m thinking one of the Skull Warriors’ bows would suffice.”

“And where are we going to get one of those?” Narmoto raised an eyebrow.

Axato sighed. “When one of those boneheads is nearby, obviously. I thought you were supposed to be smart?”

They stared at each other for a moment before the Protector nodded. “True.”

“If we manage to get out,” Kivoda continued pacing in his cell. “Where do we go? What do we do?”

“We’ll need to get our own weapons and gear back,” the Skull Raider answered. “And then we get out of here as fast as we can. We cannot afford to stick around here once we escape.”

“I don’t think anyone would object to that,” Nilkuu said. Everyone nodded their agreement.

There was silence for a moment before Hewkii spoke. “So, how long until a guard comes through?”

“Hopefully not too long,” Narmoto replied. “We need to get out of here.”

“Oh, that’s not happening,” a voice suddenly filled the room.

Umarak was standing in the doorway, his shadow stretching across the stone floor. His gaze flickered between the Okotans and the Elemental Creatures.

“What are you doing here again?” Korgot asked. “We have no new information for you.”

“I’m not her for you,” the Hunter shook his head. “I’m here for them,” he pointed at the Creatures.

“You can’t do that,” Vizuna’s eyes widened. “Makuta told you that you couldn’t!”

“A long time ago,” Umarak stepped towards the Creatures. “Makuta promised me all eight of the Elemental Creatures. He has already given me one. Once I have taken a bite, I must finish the meal.”

“He’ll destroy you if you betray him,” Izotor said.

“It does not make a difference to me,” the Hunter gripped the bars of Uxar’s cell. He stared at the Creature.

“My destiny has been left unfulfilled for thousands of years. It is time I completed it.”

Taking a step back, the Hunter leveled his hand at the cage. There was a flicker of light before the cage swung open. The Creature attempted to move to escape, but immediately, the shadows of the cell swarmed it. Being lifted into the air by the darkness, Uxar was brought before the Hunter. They came to face to face, and there was a wicked smile across Umarak’s Mask of Shadows.

“After all this time,” he said. “Now you’re mine.”

Turning around, Umarak smiled as the Creature floated towards his back. As it closed in, two points of light ignited on the Hunter’s back. Uxar attempted to struggle, but it was no use. It screamed in pain as it began to unite with Umarak.

“NO!” the Okotans yelled as dark energy filled the room.

In a flash of light and a roar of power, the Hunter united with Uxar. As soon as they were connected, the body of the Creature began to glitter with orange light. The Creature let out one last cry for help before its body became pure energy. The light hung in the air for a moment before being sucked into the Hunter’s body.

Light exploded from Umarak as he yelled in pain. His armor shone bright, igniting the dark dungeons. They all hide their eyes from the glare.

After the light faded, Umarak fell to one knee, breathing heavily. He stayed like that for a moment, glittering with energy, before standing up. Turning around, he came to face Ketar’s cell. The Creatures, and Okotans, watched the Hunter with horror as he opened the Creature of Stone’s cage.

“No, Umarak! Please!” Narmoto pleaded. “You’ll destroy Okoto!”

“This is my destiny,” the Hunter said as he raised Ketar into the air with his shadow hand. “And it’s finally being fulfilled.”

He turned again as the Creature of Stone floated towards him.

---

“Okay,” Tahu began as they stood around the table, which had a map of the City of the Mask Makers laid out on it.

“Any move we make on the city must be quick and concise. Makuta is expecting us, but he doesn’t know exactly how we’ll attack, so that gives us a slight advantage. We’ll have to act on that advantage for as long as we can, because it could mean the difference between failure and success.”

“You mean death or life,” Pohatu corrected.

“We could attack from behind,” Onua stepped up to the map. “Pohatu and I could launch us from one of the cliffs into the city.”

“Then we infiltrate the Forge, get Harvali to the Temple, and free our Creatures,” Kopaka said.

“But even if we get our Creatures, we can’t unite unless we have Agil, and the Creature is inside Umarak,” Lewa replied. “How do we get Agil out?”

“I don’t know,” Tahu shook his head. “But we have to try.”

“’Trying’ and ‘succeeding’ are two very different things,” Pohatu crossed his arms.

Gali nodded. “Yes. We don’t know how we’d be able to restore Agil from inside Umarak, and we certainly don’t want to have a first test while we’re battling Makuta for the fate of the island.”

“How are we supposed to test it at all?” Kopaka said. “It’s not like there’s a clone of Umarak that we can practice on.”

“There’s no way of testing it,” Onua responded. “The only way to do it will be trial by fire.”

“I hate fire,” the Toa of Ice groaned. Tahu scowled.

Harvali joined the conversation. “It doesn’t matter if we can practice on Umarak or not. If destiny is truly on our side, and I believe it is, then we need not worry.”

“That’s easy for you to say,” Lewa replied. “We’re the ones who have to fight him.”

“Can’t you contact Ekimu or something?” Kopaka asked. “Ask him if he knows how to how restore Agil.”

“I don’t know how to talk to him,” the archaeologist looked down. “He’s only appeared to me in a dream, and it’s not like I called him there.”

“There has to be a way to call him,” the Toa of Water said.

“If there is, there’s no way I’ll figure it out.”

Tahu stroked his chin. “You could try putting on the Mask of Creation?”

“You can’t believe that that’ll work,” the Toa of Ice buried his face in his palm.

“I don’t see you helping!” the Toa of Fire retorted.

“Actually, I think that Tahu has a point, strangely enough,” Onua replied. “Ekimu was telepathically linked to the Mask of Creation. It bears his imprint. It could also act as a bridge between Harvali and wherever Ekimu’s spirit is now.”

“So you think it’s possible?” Kopaka questioned.

The Toa of Earth nodded. “Indeed.”

Gali shrugged. “I guess we could give it a try.”

Harvali looked at the Toa. They all looked at her with expectant eyes. Sighing, she reached around and grabbed the Mask of Creation from her sash. Looking at it for a moment, she reached up and disconnected her Mask of Power. Setting it on the ground, she then took the Mask of Creation in both hands and lifted it to her face.

There was a spark of light as the Mask magnetically attached itself to the villager’s face. She then closed her eyes. The runes glimmered in a green light before fading.

She stood there silently for a moment, before she opened her eyes.

“It’s not working.”

“Try harder,” Pohatu said.

“I did.”

“You just need to concentrate,” Gali smiled. “That’s all this sort of thing needs.”

“Concentrate on what?” Harvali was growing frustrated.

“Ekimu,” the Toa of Water replied. “Focus on him, and his energy. Call for him. He will come.”

“Why should we even look to Ekimu for help?” the archaeologist suddenly said. “Didn’t he hide things from us?”

“He did, but that doesn’t mean we should completely disregard him,” Tahu replied. “He saved us, and he made us the heroes that we are today.”

“That’s not actually true,” came a voice.

Turning around, they gasped to see a figure they never thought they’d see again standing before them. The Toa drew their weapons.

“No need for hostility, Toa,” Skull Slicer raised his four hands.

“You?! How are you here?” Tahu ignited his flame swords. “The Protectors sent you into the chasm!”

“I survived the fall,” the warrior rasped. “I then wandered the fog in search of a way out. While I was down there, I felt the tremors, and knew something had happened. I continued looking for a way out, trying to get up to help.”

“Help who? Makuta?” Lewa brandished his ax.

“Originally,” Skull Slicer nodded. “But, as I continued wandering, I realized that everything that had happened, everything that I had done, had not been my will, but that of the Lord of Skull Spiders, Skull Grinder, and ultimately the Mask Hoarder himself. I realized that I could not continue to be someone’s puppet, and had to find my own path.”

“So you had an epiphany. Great,” Pohatu rolled his eyes.

“You laugh, but that is what happened,” he replied. “I realized that I needed to fight Makuta, not fight for him.”

The Toa’s eyebrows were all raised. “You mean you want join us? You’re serious?” Gali gasped.

He nodded. “Indeed. I wish to join you in your quest to defeat the mad titan.”

They all glanced at each other in disbelief. All of them were shocked by this.

“I know we used to be enemies, and that I tried to kill both you and the Protectors, but that was the old me. I know that you’re probably thinking that you can’t possibly trust me under any circumstances, and I completely understand.” He locked eyes with them. “But for the sake of Okoto, I think we must align forces.”

Tahu stopped to consider this for a long moment. “Even if we did say yes, what do you have to offer?”

A smile crossed the warrior’s boney face. “I’m glad you asked.”

Reaching behind his back, he reached into his pack and produced something that gleamed in the purple light of the cavern. As he brought it to the front, the Toa and Harvali all gasped in surprise. It was a golden Mask of Power, forged in the shape of a Skull Spider.

“What is that?” Kopaka asked.

“This is in the Golden Mask of the Skull Spiders,” Skull Spider explained. “It was forged by Makuta thousands of years ago. It can communicate with and command the Skull Spiders. It is what the Lord of Skull Spiders used to lay siege to Okoto, and to control me.”

“We didn’t see anything like that when why fought the beast,” Lewa said.

Skull Slicer looked down at it. “That’s because, just before you arrived, he lost in the chasm. I only found it a few days ago. Its discovery led me to escape, and led me to finding you.”

Onua blinked. “Why?”

“Because. With this Mask of Power, we can command the Skull Spiders, and use the very beasts that Makuta used to attack the island to attack him and end his reign of shadows, once and for all.”

The Toa and the warrior stood in silence, staring at each other. Silence hung between them like a fog.

Finally, Tahu lowered his blades and stepped forward.

“If you say that you want to help defeat Makuta, I honestly can’t argue with that,” he said.

The other Toa looked at him in surprise. But, after all they had been through with the Toa of Fire, they had learned to trust his judgment, and were doing it now. Together, they lowered their weapons and joined their leader.

“Thank you, Toa of Fire,” Skull Slicer bowed. “Together, we will defeat Makuta and restore peace to the island.”

A smile crossed Tahu’s face when an unbelievable pain suddenly shot through his body. It felt like everything within him had suddenly disappeared, and that it had been replaced by ice. Keeling over, the Toa of Fire fell to his knees.

Around him, the other Toa did the same, each experiencing similar, but unique pain. The ground beneath them began to tremble as they fell to the ground.

Tahu hit the ground, and he saw Harvali and Skull Slicer standing in shock before him before his vision blurred into an unnatural darkness.

---

Across Okoto, the ground shook, and the Regions themselves began to grow darker. The green of the jungle, the deep blue water of the sea, glow of the crystals underground, the light of the desert, the pure white snow of the north, and the warm glow of the volcanoes, all faded to dimness, and even to gray.

The villagers all looked out in fear, because they all knew what had happened.

The Elemental Creatures, manifestations of the very soul of Okoto, were gone.

Chapter 19: The Last Day

The Toa of Fire had been laying on the ground for several minutes before he came back around. Pushing himself up, he saw that his fellow Toa were all in a similar state. Villagers had come to see what was going on. As he tried to get up, he noticed that the cave was much darker than it had been moments ago.

He closed his eyes as his head began to throb painfully. Getting to his knees, he pressed his palm to his forehead.

“What…” he trailed off, pain ringing in his voice. “What happened?”

“Did you feel that?” Onua said, trying to get to his feet.

“Like everything inside of me suddenly disappeared?” Lewa held his head. “Oh yeah. I felt it.”

“What was that?” Gali was the first to get on her feet. “I’ve never felt such an emptiness before. It was like…”

“Like a void,” Kopaka replied.

Harvali stepped towards them. “What happened?”

“It was the Creatures,” Pohatu said, sitting on the ground, his head down. “The Creatures are gone.”

“Gone? How can the Creatures be gone? How do you know?” the archeologist said in disbelief.

“I don’t know,” the Toa of Stone shook his head. “But I know what I felt.”

Onua nodded. “I felt it too.”

“Umarak,” Tahu said darkly. “It was Umarak.”

“He… absorbed the Creatures,” Gali held herself, looking down. “They…”

“Died,” Lewa finished.

Silence hung in the air like a damp chill. Everyone looked down as the realization that the Toa were telling the truth washed over them.

“If the Creatures are gone,” the implications suddenly hit Harvali. “That means that the island is in danger! We have to do something!”

“Makuta has taken the Creatures from us,” Kopaka said. “We have nothing now.”

“You can’t give up!” the archeologist protested. “We have to save Okoto! It is our duty!”

“Already I can feel my connection to the elements weakening,” Pohatu looked at his hands.

“I feel… empty,” Gali fell to her knees, holding her sides.

“There’s no point in attacking Makuta now,” Lewa held his head. “It’s over.”

“NO!” Harvali snapped. “You are the Toa! The heroes of Okoto! You have to fight! Please, you’re the only hope for our survival!”

Weakly, they looked at her. Their eyes were heavy and cold, their forms sagging. They were broken and defeated.

But that didn’t stop her.

“If you do not challenge Makuta, he will destroy this island, and everything on it. With Umarak taking the Creatures, he’s already started this. If he is not stopped and the Creatures restored, Okoto will crumble, and everything will die. You have to fight.”

She stepped towards them.

“Please,” her voice dropped. “You are Okoto’s only hope,” she gestured to the crowd gathered around them. “You are their only hope. They are the soul of Okoto, and if they die, then Okoto does.”

Harvali knelt down in front of the Toa of Fire. “Please. Fight for them.”

The two looked at each other. Several moments passed before Tahu managed to get to his feet. He was weak, but he looked to his fellow Toa.

“Harvali is right,” he said. “We can’t give up. Just because we don’t have the Creatures anymore doesn’t mean our duty disappears also. Our duty is to Okoto, and by extension, the Okotans. We cannot forfeit that just because the odds are stacked against us.”

His fellow Toa were watching him intently. The crowd was doing the same.

“We are the Toa,” Tahu raised his blade. “We will restore the Creatures, we will save the island, and we will defeat Makuta, no matter the cost!”

Slowly, the five Toa got to their feet, holding their weapons high like their leader. Harvali raised her spear, Skull Slicer raised his blade, and the crowd of Okotos raised their hands.

---

The two dark figures stood together in the Shadow Realm.

“So,” Makuta smiled. “Do we have an agreement?”

Dream Snatcher nodded. “Yes. For now, our interests are… mutually… aligned.”

“Excellent,” the titan boomed, outstretching his large claw towards him. “Gather your forces. We will meet here in an hour.”

“Whatever you say,” the cloaked figure shrugged, shaking Makuta’s over-sized hand.

The Mask Hoarder gave the warden a half-smile when a searing pain shot through his body. Keeling over, the titan fell to one knee, holding his sides. He roared in pain as his body began to shimmer, the edges of his armor blurring out of focus. Skull Basher rushed to his master’s side. Dream Snatcher and Demon Warrior watched with looks of confusion.

“What is happening, my lord?” his lieutenant asked, panicked.

Makuta growled and pushed the warrior away. The pain faded and his form stabilized. Slowly, he pushed himself up off the ground.

“I need to get back to the city…” he stumbled forward. “Umarak…”

A circle of energy appeared in midair, spreading into a portal to the City of the Mask Makers. Stepping through it, he appeared in the forge. Behind him, Skull Basher emerged just as the rift closed. Makuta made his way towards the stairwell, followed by his bewildered lieutenant.

“My lord? What is going on?” he asked.

“Umarak…” they descended towards the dungeons. “He didn’t…”

They made their way down the spiral staircase. Entering the large stone room, they found Umarak kneeling on the floor, glowing with energy. The Protectors, Okotans, and Axato were pressed up against the bars of their cells, watching the Hunter.

The titan’s face lit up with rage. “What have you done?”

He turned towards Makuta. His eyes were blazing.

“Fulfilled my destiny.”

His armor glowed brighter before his form began to grow. Energy continued to radiate from his body, casting the room in an orange light. The people of Okoto watched in horror as the Hunter’s form became akin to that of when he was the Destroyer. His armor was smoother this time, however, and seemed to be more natural than when he had transformed before.

The light faded. His armor still radiated with raw elemental energy. Slowly, he pushed himself off the ground. Everyone watched as he stood up tall. Makuta watched him, his expression that of shock.

“What did you do?” the titan asked quietly, before his voice began to get lower. “What did you do?!”

“My destiny was to capture and absorb the Creatures and their elemental powers,” Umarak said. “That is what I have done.”

“I told you to leave the Creatures alone!” Makuta roared. “I needed them alive!”

The Hunter shook his head. “I had no choice in the matter.”

“You answer to me alone! You are mine to command!”

“And I am,” he replied. “I now hold the power of all eight elements. The soul of Okoto now resides in me.”

Umarak smiled. “Not even you have this power, my lord.”

Makuta watched him with blazing eyes, his anger boiling within him. Stepping forward, he came face-to-face with the Hunter. Umarak’s expression was one of peace, while Makuta was breathing heavily with rage. They stood off like this for a moment when a look of realization came over the titan’s face.

“You control the power of the Elemental Creatures,” he said.

“Yes.”

“Then you control the Toa’s elements… and the Toa themselves,” the smile behind the Mask of Ultimate Power broadened.

“Yes, my lord,” Umarak nodded.

“Then maybe this is for the best, after all,” the titan began to laugh, his voice booming.

“You’ve killed the Creatures,” Narmoto said. “You have n idea what that will do Okoto!”

“They were the soul of Okoto,” Makuta replied with glee. “Now my Hunter is the soul of Okoto. My warrior. My Conqueror.”

The newly-christened Conqueror stood proud. The people of Okoto watched in horror as the two titans stood there. Slowly, the Mask Hoarder turned to face them.

“People of Okoto,” he announced. “Your hope is dead. The Toa no longer stand a chance against me. I control their power now. The shadow has fallen.”

He smiled. “This is the last day of the age of heroes. Welcome to the new age.”

---

The forest buzzed around them as they continued to be led against their will towards the City of the Mask Makers. Sunlight flickered through the canopy of trees onto them.

In the midst of the group were Glonor and Cesea. Glonor had recovered from his injuries, and had been pondering a way out of their situation. It was going to be hard, though, because the three scavengers were watching them closely. Their dedication to herding the near-hundred Okotans through the jungle was impressive, the Islander had to admit.

All their weapons had been taken from them and left behind at the temple, meaning that their options were limited.

“Keep going!” Mask Snatcher barked at the head of the caravan. “We still have a long way to go for the city!”

They kept on. Cesea leaned over to Glonor.

“Do you have a plan yet?” she whispered.

“I’ve got half of one,” he replied. “But there’s no way to execute it.”

“We’re gonna have to do something,” she continued. “We’re getting close to the city. Time’s gonna run out.”

“I know,” he nodded. “I just have no idea what we’re going to do.”

They continued walking. Their legs began to ache, but they knew that they couldn’t stop to rest. The three were ruthless, and Glonor knew that anymore attempts of escape would be met with brutal and unhindered force. The majority of the Okotans were not great fighters, either, meaning that most of them would be unable to help in their escape. They had to be careful.

“Move faster!” Mask Snatcher continued to growled, his red eyes flashing. “At this rate it’ll take an extra week to reach the City of the Mask Makers!”

At the front of the group, one Okotan of Fire came to a stop. The remainder of the caravan rippled to a stop behind him. Seeing this, Mask Snatcher rounded on the villager.

“What is the meaning of this?” the lizard spat. “Why are you stopping? Why are you disobeying my commands?”

“You don’t command us. We don’t belong to you. We don’t belong to anyone,” the Okotan of Fire stood his ground. “We aren’t taking another step under your rule.”

“Insolent fool!” Mask Snatcher screeched. “You think that one Okotan will have the power to stop me?”

“No,” another Okotan, from the Region of Jungle, stepped forward. She stood beside the villager.

Mask Snatcher watched them with a smirk. He brandished his spear. Its blade glinted in the sunlight.

“You have no weapons. To oppose me would lead to your death,” he said. “However,” he chuckled, “if you would like to try and fight me, I wouldn’t be mad…”

Morvarid and Rock Crusher laughed. The two Okotans continued to stand their ground. Glonor and Cesea watched from a distance.

“What are they-?” Glonor muttered before a loud voice echoed through the jungle.

“They may not have weapons,” said the voice. “But we do.”

Turning around, Mask Snatcher’s expression dropped as he saw almost two dozen Okotans of Jungle standing before them. They were all armed with either bows or spears. Leading them was a villager bearing a Mask carved in the shape of Toa Lewa’s. He had a bow aimed directly at Mask Snatcher.

“Who are you?” the reptile growled.

“We are the guardians of Hornfell,” Kongu replied. “And we are here to protect our people.”

“You think that you can stand against us?” Morvarid stepped forward.

A smile broke across the Okotan’s face. “Yes. We do.”

Suddenly an arrow shot through the air and struck the warrior in the shoulder. Morvarid screamed in pain, blue energy trailing from the wound. Angrily, he pulled out the narrow and snapped it in his hand. He then raised his weapon towards the villagers. Mask Snatcher brandished his weapon while Rock Crusher beat his fists and growled.

“You’ve made a very big mistake, you peasants!” Mask Snatcher roared. “We will destroy you!”

Glonor found his voice. “No. You’re the one who’s made the mistake.”

“You!” the reptilian warrior’s eyes flashed. “You’ve opposed me at every turn! I’m sick of y-.”

An arrow struck him between the plates on his back, burrowing itself into his soft tissue. Energy leaked from the break in his flesh. Shaking, he turned back towards the Hornfell guard. Kongu was standing with his bow empty.

“Enough with this!” Mask Snatcher turned towards Morvarid.

“Wipe out the villagers!”

The warrior nodded and raised his weapon. A ball of blue light materialized between the prongs, flickering with energy. It hovered between them, growing larger by it second. Glonor knew that it was about to burst and take them all out.

He was about to call out when an arrow hit Morvarid’s ball of light. It exploded on impact, the shockwave knocking the warrior off balance. He fell to the ground with a thud.

Mask Snatcher and Rock Crusher stood in shock for a moment. Cesea looked to Glonor and smiled. She then turned to the caravan.

“Attack!” she yelled.

At once, dozens of the Okotans charged towards the two warriors. As they met, the villagers from the Region of Jungle tossed weapons to the refugees. They surrounded their captors. The warriors looked back in shock.

“What is this?!” Mask Snatcher’s voice cracked.

“A reckoning,” Glonor smiled, holding a spear to the reptile.

The lizard roared. Brandishing his spear, he swung it at the Okotans crowding around him. They ducked underneath the glinting blade. He then spun around, using his tail to strike several of the villagers, knocking them to the ground.

“You want a reckoning?” he spat. “Here is a reckoning!”

His weapon then began to glow with an orange energy. He then charged the Okotans, raising his staff. In response, they leaped out of the way just as he brought his spear down on them. As it struck the ground, a wave of energy shot out, knocking several of them off their feet. They hit the forest floor hard, many of them becoming knocked out.

Mask Snatcher, breathing heavily, spotted Glonor among the fallen and began to approach him. Energy crackled around his spear again.

“I’m going to wipe you out!” he growled, raising his weapon.

On the other side of the battlefield, the Okotans were battling Rock Crusher and Morvarid, the latter having recovered from his earlier blow.

Cesea ducked under one of Rock Crusher’s powerful swings before being forced to jump out of the way of one Morvarid’s energy blasts. Getting back to her feet, she brandished a blade. Cesea, with many of her Okotan brothers, stood together against the two warriors.

Rock Crusher growled. Morvarid laughed in response. “You’re right, my friend. They do look weak together like that.”

She raised an eyebrow. “Weak? You think that we’re weak?”

“Well yes,” he replied, a smile on his face. “Unity makes you easier to shatter.”

“You’re wrong,” the Okotan of Stone smiled. “Unity makes it easier for us to shatter you.”

Morvarid roared in anger. Raising his weapon, he fired a blast of energy at the Okotans. They jumped out of the way, the blast exploding behind them, and charged the warriors. Rock Crusher smashed his fists together, and ran to meet the Okotans.

The archers from Hornfell fired dozens of arrows at the brute. They shattered against his dense armor, raining on the floor. Rock Crusher smirked at this, before swinging his massive fists at them. They ducked, barely missing being hit. The titan then slammed his fists down on them, causing the ground to quake as they dodged him.

Rock Crusher roared in rage as the Okotans regrouped and began to fire at him again. Their arrows continued to break on his armor, but they continued to fire. One arrow managed to hit the soft-tissue on his cheek, causing a wisp of energy to escape from the wound. This caused him to roar in rage again, his jaw opening wider than before.

One of the villagers saw that his mouth was covered in flesh, and carefully aiming his bow, fired an arrow. It hit the roof creature’s mouth, energy flowing freely from the wound. Rock Crusher roared again, his screams piercing their ears.

But the damage was done. His weakness exposed, the archers honed in on it. The brute roared in agony as more arrows flew into his flesh. Golden energy glowed underneath his skin. Cracks began to appear in his armor, exposing even more tissue, which was quickly struck by arrows.

He stumbled backwards. One of the archers saw a bright glowing spot in his chest where the plate of armor had just fragmented. Readying her bow, she aimed her weapon at the opening. Pulling her hand back, she readied to fire. She watched the spot for a moment before letting go. The arrow flew through the air towards the brute, striking him a split second later.

It hit exactly as she had intended. Energy began to streak from the wound. Rock Crusher looked down at the arrow sticking from his chest before his body was covered in light and there was an explosion of energy.

After the light faded, they saw that Rock Crusher was no more, his body being replaced by particles of light floating in the air. These hung for a moment before disappearing also.

Feet away, Cesea and several others were locked in combat with Morvarid. They jumped out of the way as blasts of energy were unleashed from his weapon, dirt flying into the air as the deadly projectiles hit the ground.

“I don’t know why we tried to do this!” he said angrily. “Okotans are such a bother! Would’ve been more productive to just wipe them all out.”

Cesea slid across the forest floor as the warrior took a swing at her with his claws. Skidding near him, she brought up her blade and slashed the back of his leg. He cried in pain as more blue energy trailed from the cut.

Looking down, he fired a blast of energy at the Okotan. She was thrown across the ground by the blast, rolling to a stop several feet away. She barely moved, being dazed by the blast.

Morvarid smiled at her when he was hit by a barrage of arrows. They hit between his plates of armor, burrowing themselves in his flesh. More energy leaked from his form.

“No…” he muttered between whimpers of pain. “No…”

More arrows continued to pierce him. Blue energy glowed from underneath his skin. He tried to raised his weapon to fire another blast, but found that his arm was too damaged to do so. Instead, he turned to retreat, when a blade went through his chest. It stayed there for a moment before it was torn out with a twist. Energy streaked from the large wound.

Shaking, Morvarid turned to see Cesea standing there, blade in hand. Her eyes were narrowed, her hands shaking slightly.

“What have you…?”

“Done?” Cesea finished. “We used unity. Don’t say that I didn’t warn you.”

Morvarid’s form continued to crack, blue light spewing from the seams. He looked in horror at Cesea for a moment before he exploded in a blast of blue light. As the light faded, she saw that he was no longer there, replaced by flickering balls of energy that soon disappeared.

---

Mask Snatcher continued to approach Glonor as the Okotan crawled backwards across the jungle floor.

“There is no place for you to go,” he sneered. “This is where it ends for you.”

Glonor continued his retreat, desperate to stall. “You may think that, but there is always a way.”

He laughed. “You think there is? Then you’re as naive as the rest of your pathetic species.”

Energy crackled around the creature’s blade. “The Okotans have been a consistent pain in my side since I first came to this wretched reality. It would be my pleasure to wipe all of you off the face of Okoto.”

“’This reality’?” he continued to find reasons to stall. “Where are you from?”

“The Shadow Realm. All three of us are. We came through different rifts in the fabric of space at different times. We found each other and decided to join forces. We’ve terrorized a few villages over the years, and eliminated dozens of villagers who strayed too far away from home.”

“What made you want to take us to Makuta? What did you want to get out of it?”

“Safe passage back to the Shadow Realm. I’m done with this filthy island.”

“You think that Makuta would’ve granted that to you?”

“I don’t know,” he shrugged. “But it was worth a shot.”

Glonor came up against a tree. He was out of time. Mask Snatcher smiled, readying his spear again.

“Well, story time is over,” he grinned. “I’m going to enjoy killing yo-.”

An arrow suddenly hit him in the back, followed by another, and another. Energy trailed from them as Mask Snatcher yelled in pain. Turning around, the Hornfell guard had regrouped, surrounded by the rest of the Okotans. The reptile saw that Morvarid and Rock Crusher were nowhere to be seen.

“What is this-?”

“It’s over,” Kongu said. “Give up. You’re outnumbered.”

Mask Snatcher’s form shook with anger. Energy glittered around his weapon. He looked down. Kongu frowned and stepped forward.

“It’s over,” he repeated, his tone sterner. “Give. Up.”

“No…” Mask Snatcher muttered.

“What?” the Okotan raised an eyebrow.

“NO!” he yelled.

Raising his weapon, a bolt of energy shot from it. The blast struck several of the assembled, sending them flying backwards. The remaining archers unleashed a wave of arrows at the reptile. They hit him with expert precision, digging deep into his flesh. One after another hit him, his form radiating with energy.

After several moments, they stopped, and looked to see their handiwork. Mask Snatcher was simply standing there, swaying slightly in the breeze. His form shone like a star.

Behind him, Glonor got up, and raising his foot, kicked the reptile in the back. The creature fell forward before exploding in a blast of light as he hit the ground.

Once the light faded, the Okotan was met by Cesea, who hugged him. He hugged her in return. As they embraced, Kongu came up to them. The two broke apart on his arrival. The captain smiled before extending his fist to Glonor.

“Good work,” he said.

“We did good work?” he chuckled. “You’re the ones who saved us.”

“Call it a team effort,” the Okotan of Jungle replied.

Glonor smiled before clanking his fist. The remainder of the Okotans gathered around them.

“What do we do now?” Cesea asked Glonor.

“Well, you’re more than welcome to return to Hornfell with us. There’s plenty of room,” Kongu said.

“I think we’ll take you up on that. For now, anyway,” the Okotan of Ice nodded.

“’For now’?” he raised an eyebrow. “Do you have other plans?”

He nodded. “I’m done hiding. Makuta still holds the City of the Mask Makers, and I know that the Toa will eventually go to reclaim it. I want to be ready for when they do.”

“Why?” one Okotan asked.

“Because I want to be there.”

---

“This is ridiculous,” Harvali groaned as Lewa helped her off the stone floor again.

“If you’re going to fight Makuta,” the Toa said. “You’ve got to know how to fight.”

“Actually, I was hoping to just blast him with light energy until he disintegrated or something,” she readied her Chronicler’s staff again.

“That could be a good strategy,” Lewa nodded. “But you still have to know how to fight, because you won’t always be able to just blast people with light when you don’t like them.”

She rolled her eyes. The Toa frowned.

“Alright,” he readied his ax. “Again.”

Harvali sighed before taking a deep breath. Settling herself into position, she lunged at the Toa. He moved out of the way as she slashed at him with her blade. Bringing up his ax, he struck her with the staff, knocking her to the ground again.

She laid defeated on the ground, not wanting to get up. Lewa leaned on his ax and shook his head.

Behind them, the other Toa and Skull Slicer were planning their assault on the City of the Mask Makers. They were at a table with a large map of the city laid across it. Several glowing purple crystals illuminated the parchment.

“Alright,” Tahu said. “Let’s go over the plan one more time.”

He rested his finger at the entrance to the city bridge. “The six of us will start here and draw the attention of Makuta’s warriors. Meanwhile, Harvali and Skull Slicer will come from the north,” he pointed to the cliffs situated behind the Forge of the Mask Makers, “and bridge the chasm. That’s when he’ll use the Golden Mask of the Skull Spiders to take control of the Skull Spiders and anything that they can latch onto. Then Harvali will enter the Forge and wait for us to restore the Creatures.”

“How do we plan on restoring the Creatures, exactly?” Kopaka asked. “Ask Umarak nicely?”

“No,” the Toa of Fire shook his head. “We hit him. Hard.”

“Really?”

“Yep.”

Kopaka buried his face in his hand. “How is that worse than my sarcastic suggestion?”

“We’ll figure it out when we get there, Kopaka,” Onua replied.

“That doesn’t seem like something we want to figure out in the moment,” Gali said.

“I agree,” Pohatu nodded.

“If we can connect with the energy of the Creatures,” Onua stroked his chin. “We might be able to pull them from Umarak.”

“Would that work?” Kopaka inquired.

“Maybe.”

“Great.”

“We don’t have a lot of options here,” Tahu said. “We’ll have to work with what we have. A lot of this is going to have to be decided in the moment. We have no idea what we’re up against in the city. We have to trust that destiny will illuminate our way.”

They stood silent. Finally, Skull Slicer spoke.

“What do we do then?”

“Once we’ve restored the Creatures, Harvali unites with Agil and becomes the Toa of Light. Once she’s done that, we unite with our Creatures and face Makuta for the last time.”

“What are we going to do to Makuta?”

“I don’t know. But we’re going to make sure that he never threatens Okoto again.”

At that point Lewa and Harvali came over. They joined them at the table.

“Do we have a plan?” the Toa of Jungle asked.

The Toa of Fire nodded. “We do.”

“Will it work?” Harvali inquired, peering over the top of the table at the map.

“We’ll see,” Gali shrugged.

“The plan’s basically suicide,” Pohatu crossed his arms. “But it’s all we’ve got.”

“Look,” Tahu began. “I know there are a lot of uncertainties here, and there is so much at stake here, but it is our duty to stand up against evil. It’s only been a few months since we came together, and already we’ve faced much adversity. We’ve fought everything that Makuta has thrown at us, and every time we survived.

“We fought the Lord of Skull Spiders and his spiders. We fought Skull Grinder and his power-draining warriors. We fought Umarak and his Shadow Traps. We fought our way through the Shadow Realm and returned to Okoto to face Makuta again. We are destined to defeat the tyrant.

“My brothers and sisters; this is our greatest task. The fate of Okoto and everyone on it is in our hands. What we do will change everything forever. We are at a crossroads, and we must choose the right path if we want to survive.”

Tahu took a deep breath. “This is the last day before everything changes.”

Chapter 20: The Final Battle

The sky was dark above the City of the Mask Makers. A gentle wind blew through the land, rustling the trees that bordered on the edge of the cliff. The fog in the chasm surrounding the city churned, appearing like smoke.

The atmosphere signified that something was going to happen here, something unlike anything that had happened before on the island of Okoto. There was an energy in the air that could only mean one thing:

The final battle for Okoto was about to begin.

Outside the city gate, the leaves of the trees rustled. A moment later the six elemental Toa emerged from the forest. Their armor glistened in the dim light. Coming to a stop in front of the bridge, they overlooked the city.

On the other side, Elemental Beasts, Skull Raiders, Skull Creatures, and corrupted villagers roared at the warriors. They gathered on top of the city walls, glowing with elemental energy.

“There’s that army we were promised,” Lewa held his ax close to his chest.

The Toa stood together when a deep voice echoed through the air.

“Toa!” the voice of Makuta boomed. “Here at last!”

Several heavy foots preceded the hulking form of the Mask Hoarder as he appeared across the bridge. Skull Basher appeared beside him. He smiled at them, his eyes blazing behind the Mask of Ultimate Power. Raising his weapon, he pointed a the six Toa. Energy crackled at the end of his staff.

“Here to give yourselves up to the true master of Okoto!”

The army roared again, as if they were cheering. The Toa scowled.

“We’re not here to give ourselves up, Makuta,” Tahu replied, stepping forth. “We’re here to put an end to your reign of shadows.”

Makuta laughed, his voice echoing in their ears.

“You’re going to fight me? And my army? There’s only six of you! You cannot possibly hope to win!”

“It is our destiny to protect Okoto,” the Toa of Fire said. “Just as it was once yours.”

His eyes widened. “What did you say?”

“We know that you used to be a Toa like Ekimu was. We know that you’re the Toa of Shadow. You only made that Mask because you were jealous of the praise that your brother was receiving. You were supposed to be equal; two sides of the same coin. We know that you made a mistake.”

“Why are you saying this?” the titan growled. “What have you done?”

“We’ve seen the past, Makuta,” Tahu readied his weapons, igniting them with elemental energy. The others did the same.

“And we’re ready to forge the future.”

The six Toa then charged forward together as one. Makuta saw them and stepped back into the city. Several Skull Warriors and Elemental Beasts replaced him. They stepped onto the bridge as the Toa drew nearer.

A split second later the two forces clashed. Tahu brought down his blades on a Lava Beast. Gali impaled a Skull Warrior with her trident. Lewa used his ax to slash through a Storm Beast. Pohatu fired elemental energy from his hammers, knocking several Skull Warriors and Scorpios to the ground. Onua smashed three Skull Raiders with his hammer in one swing. Kopaka blocked the claw of a Quake Beast with his shield before cutting it in two with his sword.

Having created an opening, they Toa rushed through the city gate into the City of the Mask Makers. Arriving, they saw that Makuta was gone, replaced by dozens of Elemental Beasts, Skull Raisers, Skull Creatures, and Shadow Traps. They surrounded the Toa, forcing them to align themselves back-to-back.

“Evidently the great Makuta’s a coward,” Pohatu remarked, settling into a fighting stance.

“Unsurprising,” Kopaka replied. “He sent his minions after us before facing us himself.”

“He’s probably heading for the Forge,” Lewa twirled his ax.

“What about Harvali?” Gali asked. “He’ll be heading straight for her!”

“Destiny is on our side,” Onua answered. “We don’t have many options here, anyway.”

Their adversaries continued to close in.

“These beasts are no different than anything else that we have faced,” Tahu said. “We will defeat them just as we defeated everything else.”

Standing together, the Toa were ready as Makuta’s minions attacked.

---

“I don’t know how I feel about this!” Harvali said, clutching onto a rock.

The wind blew fiercely as they stood atop the mountains facing the back of the Forge of the Mask Makers. She and Skull Slicer stood on one of the cliffs, trying not to be blown off by the gusts and into the chasm below. From their vantage point, they could see the Toa battling a horde of enemies by the city gate.

“We need to help them!” the archaeologist pointed.

“We need to get into the city before I can use the Mask,” Skull Slicer replied. “That’s the plan, remember?”

She nodded, looking down at the edge of the city below.

“Okay,” the warrior stepped forward. “Ready?”

Hesitating for a moment, she nodded again. “Ready.”

Grabbing her with his two lower arms, Skull Slicer held Harvali to his chest before walking to the edge of the cliff. Taking a slightly rattled breath, he crouched down before springing back up, jumping off the edge and falling through the air towards the city below. Harvali covered her eyes as they dove, trying not to scream.

They landed with a thud. Dust flew out from under Skull Slicer’s feet. After a moment, he lowered Harvali to the ground. She shook slightly, but recovered pretty quickly. They were behind the Forge of the Mask Makers, a small garden before them.

“Do we get in through the garden?” Skull Slicer asked.

“No. It’s too exposed,” she replied. “There’s another way that Ekimu showed me.”

She hesitated for a moment. “But we’ve got to help the Toa first.”

Stealthily, the two of them made their way around the building to the front. The majority of Makuta’s forces were now fighting the Toa, giving them a slight advantage. Crouching behind a pillar, they watched the battle.

“This is it,” Harvali turned to Skull Slicer. “Use the Mask.”

Nodding, he reached up and detached the Skull Spider Mask from his face. Hooking it to his back, he then took the Golden Mask of the Skull Spiders in his hands and raised it to his face. The magnetic clamps suddenly engaged and attached itself to him. He recoiled as energy began to course through him. Taking a deep breath, he looked up.

“Are you okay?” she asked.

“Yeah. I’m fine,” he replied, excitement in his voice. “This feels amazing.”

“Can you take control of the Skull Spiders?”

He looked at the battlefield. “I think so.”

“Then do it.”

Closing his eyes, the skeletal warrior concentrated. He stayed still for several moments before the Mask began to glow with energy. He then opened his eyes and looked out at the fighting. A smile broke across his face.

“Got them.”

At once, the Skull Spiders came to a stop. The warriors around them stumbled over them. Several of them stopped to look at the spiders in confusion. They stayed still for a moment before launching into the air. They managed to grab onto several of the minions, latching themselves to their faces. Skull Warriors, Skull Scorpios, and Skull Raiders struggled as the spiders took control of them, before becoming. The Elemental Beasts, however, tore the creatures from their faces and onto the ground.

It was too late, though, because the damage was done. Almost three dozen of them were now under the control of Skull Slicer.

“Make them attack the others,” Harvali said. “Now!”

Nodding, he closed his eyes again. The Skull Creatures and Raiders immediately turned on the remaining forces. They stayed still for a moment before opening fire upon them. The Elemental Beasts roared as they were hit with blasts of ice and impaled with spears. Skull Warriors were frozen and blown apart.

“Good work!” the archaeologist exclaimed excitedly. “Now let’s go the forge!”

Getting up, the two retreated back towards the Forge.

---

“It worked!” Tahu was grinning broadly as he slashed through a Skull Warrior. “They took control of the army!”

“Then we can win this!” Kopaka replied, freezing several Shadow Traps with his sword.

With their unwilling allies, the Toa pressed forward through the army. The Toa led the charge, aided by the controlled warriors flanking them. Together, they cut through the Makuta’s forces. To the right and to the left, their allies were knocked away, but they pressed on. They had to press on.

In the distance, they could see Makuta and Skull Basher standing on the steps to the Forge of the Mask Makers. They Toa grew more determined.

“Keep going!” their leader called. “We’re almost through!”

A moment later Pohatu smashed the last Lava Beast in the head with his hammer, destroying its mask and its body. Their controlled allies had been defeated, but the work was done. Breathing heavily, the six Toa stopped to breath.

“There will be more,” Onua gasped.

“We have to get as close to the Forge as we can!” Gali pushed herself up with her trident. “Now!”

Recovering their strength, they got up and ran for the temple. Their feet pounded on the stone paths of the city. As they ran, corrupted villagers tried to throw themselves at the Toa, but were quickly brushed off. Ahead of them, more of Makuta’s minions were approaching, readying for battle. The Toa continued on, determined not to slow down.

“Break through their barricade!” Tahu said. “We will not be stopped!”

As they approached, however, they were abruptly struck by an unseen force. It hit them like a shockwave, knocking them off their feet and sending them crashing to the ground. Pushing themselves up, they saw several terrifying creatures slithering towards them. Creatures they had thought that they would never see again.

“Soul Grinders?” Lewa said. “How can they be-?”

In front of the Soul Grinders, two forms shimmered into view. They were blurry for a moment, but the Toa knew who they were.

“Hello again, Toa,” Dream Snatcher stepped forward, twirling his staff.

“Good to see you again,” Demon Warrior giggled, his eyes flashing.

“You?” Gali got up. “How are you here?”

“An unlikely alliance,” the warden replied.

“What? You’re working for Makuta?” Onua raised an eyebrow.

“Working with Makuta, Toa,” he corrected. “For now, our interests align.”

Tahu’s eyes narrowed. “And what are those interests?”

“Defeating you, of course,” he seemed to smile in the darkness of his hood. “Makuta wants you to be defeated. And I want you in the Shadow Realm. A mutual benefit.”

“You know that he’ll betray you, right?” Kopaka asked. “He can’t be trusted.”

“And what makes you think that?”

Pohatu frowned. “Isn’t it obvious?”

“It is, but I am not worried,” he nodded. “I am the only one who can defeat him, after all.”

“With your illusions? With your mind tricks?” Tahu stepped forward. “Makuta will crush you. We are the only ones who can defeat the Mask Hoarder. We are the only ones who can save Okoto.”

He took a deep breath. “Our destiny is at hand, Dream Snatcher, and you will not be able to stop us.”

“Your only destiny is to spend eternity in the Pit,” Dream Snatcher readied his weapon. Demon Warrior and the Soul Grinders tensed. “And I’m going to make sure that it is fulfilled.”

“We’ll see about that,” Tahu ignited his blades again.

The warden’s eyes flashed. “We shall.”

Raising their weapons, the two groups charged each other.

---

“What’s going on out there?” Hewkii stood in his cell, watching the ceiling. The sound of roars, clanging of weapons, and blasts of energy, echoed through the dungeons.

“Could it be?” Korgot turned to her fellow Protectors.

“The Toa?” Nilkuu said, shock in his voice. She nodded.

“They’ve got to be insane!” Kivoda exclaimed. A slight smile seemed to break across his face. “Absolutely insane.”

“They’ll need help,” Narmoto went up to the bars. “We’ve got to help them.”

“How are we going to do that, brother?” Izotor asked. “We still haven’t found a way out of these cells.”

“Then we should find one,” Vizuna nodded. “As soon as possible.”

Axato got up. “It’s going to be hard to get out of here. These cells were built to keep beings like me in. The only thing I know can breach them is Makuta himself.”

“Then let’s start working,” Narmoto said. “Now.”

---

“This way,” Harvali motioned, leading Skull Slicer to the opposite side of the building.

They hurried along a row of plants. Energy flashed into the air behind him, signifying again where the Toa were combating Makuta’s forces. Eventually, they came to a stop in front of a hexagonal impression in the stone wall. The symbol of a strange-lopsided Mask of Power, with a vent serving as the mouthpiece and three holes punched on each side of it.

Walking up to it, she placed her hand on the vent. “If I remember correctly…”

Pressing the three ridges of the vent, she stepped back. There was a clicking noise followed by a grinding noise before the hexagon split from the wall and slid sideways and out of sight. It moved away to reveal a narrow passage way, soaked in darkness. They stood staring at it for a moment.

“How did you know how to do that?” the warrior asked.

“Ekimu showed me after we reclaimed the City,” she replied. “I suppose he had always known that I was going to succeed him…”

“Come on,” Skull Slicer stepped forward towards the entryway. “We have to keep moving.”

Nodding, Harvali followed him into the opening. Once inside, the doorway closed, submerging them in darkness. They hesitated for a moment before walking forward. Their footsteps echoed down the narrow passageway. It was incredibly dim, making it nearly impossible to see even their own feet below them. They could only see their glowing eyes through the black. Yet they pressed on.

“Watch out,” the archaeologist stopped abruptly. Skull Slicer came to a stop ahead of her.

“What is it?” he asked.

“There’s a stairway down ahead of you,” she replied.

Dimly, they could see the stairs.

“What’s that doing there?”

“It leads down into the dungeons,” Harvali explained. “Ekimu built it if he ever needed to sneak into the forge.”

“Why would he want to do that?”

“No idea.”

He sighed. “Come on.”

Carefully, they began to descend the stone steps into the unknown. Their footsteps reverberated in their ears. Her heartlight blinked rapidly in her chest.

Reaching the bottom of the stairs, they came face to face with a solid wall. Stepping up to it, Harvali pressed a series of bricks. At once, there was a clicking noise and the wall rolled away. As it moved, they were illuminated by the flickering purple light of a torch mounted to the stone walls. Hesitantly, they stepped forward down the hallway. They walked for a while before reaching a split in the corridor.

“This way,” Harvali turned to the right.

They continued for a while before they heard voices echoing towards them. Harvali’s face lit up when she realized who it was. She rushed forward, quickly followed by her companion. They ran into a large room, filled with large metal cages.

“Protectors!” she exclaimed.

“Harvali?” Vizuna turned to her. “What are you doing h-?”

He stopped as he saw the skeletal figure standing behind her. The others did the same, watching the warrior with shock and anger.

“Get away from him!” Korgot said, grabbing the bars of her cell. “Now!”

“No. It’s okay. He’s on our side now,” she replied.

“He’s dangerous! You don’t know what you’re talking about!” Narmoto kept his eyes fixed on Skull Slicer. “He almost killed me not even a month ago!”

“I know, Protector of Fire,” Harvali responded. “But I’m only here because of him. Please. Trust me.”

They watched them for a moment, their eyes flicking back and forth between the two. Finally, Narmoto sighed, and nodded.

“If you trust him…”

She smiled. “Thank you.”

“Well,” Nilkuu said. “If you aren’t doing anything else, I’d like to be let out now.”

“Oh. Of course,” she quickly moved towards the cells. There were large, robust padlocks on each of the doors.

Inspecting them, she turned to her companion. “Could you help me here?”

Reaching behind his back, Skull Slicer produced four blades. Walking up to the cell, he raised one of his blades and brought it down on the lock. It shattered on impact, causing the door to swing open. Nilkuu stepped out, cracking his neck.

“Finally,” he smiled.

“Excellent. Let’s get everyone else out,” Narmoto clapped his hands together. “Quickly.”

And they did so. Skull Slicer smashed the padlocks of their cells. They rubbed their joints as they stepped out into freedom.

“I thought that I would never get out of that cell again!” Jaller smiled as he stretched.

“I knew we would do it,” Takua smiled.

“Our weapons and Masks of Power are in Ekimu’s forge,” Vizuna said. “We need to get there as soon as possible.”

“I would like that,” Axato grinned.

Izotor turned towards the archaeologist and her unlikely companion. “What’s the plan, Harvali? What are we going to do to defeat Makuta?”

“The Toa are battling his forces outside,” she replied. “We came in through a secret entrance. We need to get to the Temple of Light.”

“Why?” Hewkii asked.

“So I can become the Toa of Light.”

Silence hung in the air for a moment.

“You’re really going to do it?” Korgot wondered.

“I am,” she nodded. “It’s my destiny.”

“But, you don’t have the Creatures,” Vizuna shook his head. “Umarak absorbed them all. There’s no way of releasing them. It’s over.”

“The Toa are going to take care of that. They’ll fight the Hunter and restore the Crea-.”

“You don’t understand,” Nilkuu cut across her. “Umarak is not the Hunter anymore.”

“What do you mean?” she raised an eyebrow.

“He’s the Conqueror now,” Izotor explained.

“I doubt a name change is anything to worry about,” Harvali replied.

“It’s not just a name change,” Narmoto said. “When he absorbed the seven Creatures, he mutated again. He has the power of all eight elements now.”

Her eyes widened as she realized.

Kivoda’s expression became grim. “That’s why Makuta named him the Conqueror.”

---

Outside, Tahu narrowed avoided Demon Warrior’s blade, which burned with a crackling purple energy. He roared and charged the Toa again, lunging at him with his shield weapon. Tahu brought up his swords to block it. Sparks flew as the two collided, both warriors pushing against each other.

“Give up, Toa!” he snarled, his eyes blazing in his semi-transparent skull. “Give up!”

Tahu managed to break free of the gridlock and brought his blades up to swing at the warrior.

“Never!” he said, charging the beast, his armor ablaze.

The other Toa were busy fighting off the Soul Grinders and the remaining Elemental Beasts, Skull Creatures, and Skull Raiders. They struggled against their enemies, avoiding the deadly spears of the Soul Grinders while dodging the shredding claws of the Elemental Beasts. The weapons of the Skull Creatures and Raiders were easy to deflect, but still were to be avoided.

“Isn’t it weird that we’re always fighting off some kind of horde?” Lewa cut clean-through a Storm Beast.

“Now is not the time for observational humor, tree-climber!” Kopaka used his shield to block the spear of a Soul Grinder before slashing it with his sword.

“I’m just saying that earlier we did exactly this,” he replied, knocking a Skull Warrior off its feet with a gust of wind.

“Just focus on defeating these guys! We need to find Umarak so Harvali can fulfill her destiny!” Gali destroyed two Soul Grinders.

They continued battling their adversaries. From the sidelines, Dream Snatcher watched them, his eyes blazing from under his hood.

“You cannot defeat my forces, Toa,” he chuckled. “Not this time.”

The Toa were growing tired. The constant onslaught of enemies was taking its toll on them, and they weren’t sure if they could go on. They knew that they had to, however. Everyone was dependent on them. Even the island itself was dependent on what they did there.

They had to keep fighting.

Onua knocked several more of them away. Pohatu smashed several with his hammers. The Toa kept fighting, pushing back their enemies. They continued to come, however, overwhelming them.

Demon Warrior avoided Tahu’s strikes. The Toa was panting heavily.

“Tired, Toa?” he taunted.

Tahu growled. “Of you!”

Rushing forth, he furiously swung his blades at the warrior. He in turn blocked each of them, but was pushed back by his attacks. Demon Warrior stumbled in his retreat, but Tahu continued on, roaring as he struck the warrior’s weapons.

A second later, as Tahu struck it, Demon Warrior’s sword shattered into a million pieces. He gasped in horror, but had to bring up his shield as the Toa brought both his blades down on it. He struggled, barely able to hold up his weapon. Igniting his flame blades, Tahu began to melt the metal of the Demon Warrior’s shield.

“No…” he muttered, seeing his weapon turning orange. “No…”

It snapped. Splitting in two, the shield fell away from its master and to the ground. Demon Warrior gasped again. Looking up, the last thing he saw was Tahu’s fist flying towards him.

Demon Warrior fell to the ground with a thud. Tahu looked down at him with a smile before turning to help his fellow Toa. Cutting through several Skull Creatures, Elemental Beasts, and Soul Grinders, he joined them.

“How’s it going?” he asked, blocking a blow from a Quake Beast.

“We’re getting there,” Lewa struck a group of Skull Warriors.

“Not quickly enough,” Pohatu ducked under the snapping tail of a Skull Scorpio.

“Keep fighting! We’re almost through them!” he encouraged them.

They did as they were told. Together, the six Toa cut through enemy after enemy, destroying them or knocking them to the ground. They battled ferociously, never letting up and never holding back.

Finally, after several more minutes of fighting, Onua used his hammer to destroy the last Soul Grinder.

Breathing heavily, the six Toa stopped to catch their breaths. Their bodies ached and their muscles were weak. They could barely hold onto their weapons. They wanted nothing more than to be able to stop and rest. They were tired.

Several feet away from them a pair of hands began to clap. Lifting their eyes, they saw Dream Snatcher walking towards them. Stopping, he stopped clapping and retrieved his weapon again. He brandished it as he addressed the six elemental masters.

“Well, I can’t say that I’m not impressed,” he said, tauntingly.

“Go home, warden,” Tahu replied. “It doesn’t have to be like this.”

“Yes, it does,” he replied. “You’ve left me no choice.”

“Did you see what we just did?” Lewa pushed himself up with his ax. “You don’t want to fight us.”

“You are my prisoners, and I need to take you back to your cells.”

“Don’t do this,” Gali readied her trident. “We don’t want to harm you.”

He laughed hollowly. “You just destroyed those forces, and you just subdued my lieutenant. I know that you want to harm me.”

The six Toa glanced uneasily at each other. Dream Snatcher readied his dream catcher again.

“Fortunately, I can do something that you never will be able to defeat.”

Closing his eyes, he concentrated for a moment when everything began to shimmer around them, growing dark. Realizing that he was doing, the Toa gathered.

“Stop him!” Kopaka cried.

Readying their weapons, the six fired elemental blasts of energy. The blasts hit Dream Snatcher directly, sending him flying backwards. Around them, the shimmering stopped, and looked to see the warden laying unconsciously on the steps to the Forge.

“Did… did we do it?” Pohatu asked.

“Is this an illusion?” Tahu looked around.

Kopaka pinched him, causing him to yelp in surprise.

“What was that for?” he growled.

“I think we’re alright,” the Toa of Ice replied.

“No. You’re not,” said a familiar voice.

Looking up the steps, they saw a hulking figure walking towards them. Heavy footsteps followed him as he descended the steps. His armor glowed orange. His robust armor glittered in the light. Antlers that now looked like bull horns protruded from the sides of his hand. Blazing red eyes shone through Mask of Shadows.

“Umarak?” Lewa lowered his ax.

“It is I, Toa,” he answered, coming to a stop several feet from them.

“How can this be? How are you the Destroyer again?” Gali asked.

“After I absorbed the eight Elemental Creatures, I completed my destiny, and was rewarded for it. But, unlike wearing the Mask of Control, this is my true form. I am not the Hunter or the Destroyer. I am the Conqueror.”

Kopaka chuckled slightly. “Why do they call you that?”

Umarak smiled. “Because of this.”

His armor began to glow. Opening his claws, elemental energy began to radiate from them before the six Toa keeled over in pain. Their own forms began to glow, shaking slightly.

“What is this?” Tahu tried to stand, but was unable to.

“I didn’t just absorb the Creatures’ powers, Toa,” Umarak replied. “I joined with them. I took on their very essence. I am the Creatures. I control their energy, and therefore I control you.”

Energy began to trail from the six towards the Conqueror. The Toa cried out in pain as they felt like their energy was leaving them.

“And soon, I will absorb you, too.”

---

The Protectors finished retrieving their Masks and weapons from the forge.

“I’m so glad to have this back,” Nilkuu admired his Sandstone Blaster.

Vizuna ignited his Elemental Flame Bow. “Me too.”

“Come on,” Harvali urged. “We have to get to the temple.”

Together, the group rushed for the spiral stairwell. Below, they could hear heavy footsteps walking in the lower level. They knew it was Makuta.

“Quickly! We don’t have much time!” she hissed, beginning to ascend the stairs. The others followed, quietly as possible.

They reached the third level of the room. Ekimu’s collection lay littered around the large room. Dust sparkled in the air like snow. Moving forward, Harvali led them through the clutter towards the back of the room. Their footsteps echoed as they went.

Finally, they reached the carving at the back of the room, signifying the entrance to the Temple of Light. Harvali stopped and looked at it.

“What now?” Hewkii asked.

“We wait for the Toa to restore the Creatures so I can unite with Agil and become the Toa of Light,” Harvali replied.

“Uh,” Kivoda looked out one of the nearby windows. “I don’t think that’s going to happen.”

Joining him at the windows, they saw the six Toa kneeling before Umarak, obviously in pain. Their forms shimmered in and out of focus. Light trailed from them as if they were being drained.

“Oh no…” the archaeologist muttered.

“I’ll go help them,” Axato said, readying his Guillotine Blasters.

“I’ll help,” Skull Slicer nodded.

The two skeletal warriors moved to exit the room when several figures appeared at the top of the steps. Looking, they saw that several Skull Warriors, Skull Raiders, and Elemental Beasts had emerged, led by Skull Basher. They growled as they saw them.

“We’re out of time,” Narmoto ignited his blades.

---

Below, the six Toa continued to struggle. They felt their very essence being drained from their bodies. Their armor was beginning to turn dark and gray. Above them, Umarak laughed madly as his form became brighter and brighter.

“What do we do?” Lewa tried to move, but couldn’t.

“We have to get out of here!” Gali struggled.

“There’s… no way…” Pohatu said, full of pain.

“He’s too powerful…” Kopaka keeled over again.

“We have to… we have to get up…” Onua replied.

“Okoto needs us…” Tahu groaned.

The Toa continued to struggle. Their power was disappearing fast, and they were helpless to stop it. Their bodies were beginning to break apart, only seconds left before they disappeared completely.

As they approached the end, a disembodied voice filled the air. Their was no gender to it, or tone, or anything to identify who was speaking. But it echoed in each of their heads, louder than Umarak’s laughter or the pain coursing through their bodies.

You have the power… You have the power to save us…

“The Creatures!” Tahu immediately knew who it was, and so did the others.

Looking up at the titan, the Toa concentrated, and began to pull back. Immediately, the energy streaming from them stopped, before reversing. It flowed into them, their forms stabilizing instantly. Their armor returned to their original colors, and their strength was recharged. Getting to their feet, they stood off against the Conqueror.

“What is this?” he exclaimed, shocked. His form began to shake, beginning to dissolve. “What is happening to me?”

“You said it yourself,” Tahu smiled as he and his fellow Toa began to glow. “You are the Creatures, and so are we.”

More energy began to stream from the titan. He cried in pain, his armor growing dimmer and breaking apart.

“No… NO! I am Umarak the Conqueror! I cannot di-.”

He was cut off as there was a massive blast of energy. It illuminated the entire city, submerging them in complete whiteness. Everything stood quiet.

A moment later, the blinding light fading, the Toa blinked to see the eight Elemental Creatures standing where Umarak had been, who was nowhere in sight. The Creatures’ forms blazed with light.

“What happened to Umarak?” Kopaka asked.

“Is he… gone?” Gali looked at her brothers.

“For now, anyway,” Tahu replied, striding forward towards Agil. He knelt down in front of the Creature of Light.

“Harvali needs you,” he said.

The Creature watched him for a moment before spreading it wings and shooting into the air. The hawk flew towards the Forge of the Mask Makers.

They watched him go. Suddenly, a circle of light appeared on the landing above them. It glittered for a moment when it began to expand.

“Here we go,” Tahu turned to his fellow Toa. “United?”

“United,” they replied.

The Toa then turned around. At once, their six Creatures jumped onto their backs, blasts of light shooting from them. Energy rushed through them, causing them to glow with energy.

“I’ve missed this,” Lewa looked at his hands as they glittered.

Turning back towards the widening portal, they saw Makuta appear beyond the threshold.

“Be ready,” the Toa of Fire readied his weapons. “The final battle is about to begin.”

---

Inside the Forge, the group watched as their adversaries approached them. They growled, knocking away objects that got in their way. The people of Okoto stood together, their weapons ready.

“I don’t think we’re going to be able to win this one,” Nilkuu shook slightly.

“We have to try,” Narmoto replied. “We can’t let them get to Harvali.”

They continued to stand together. Suddenly, the cry of a hawk filled the air. The archaeologist’s eyes lit up as she realized what it was. Looking out the window, she saw Agil’s glittering form flying towards her.

Jumping back, she watched as the Creature of Light entered the room. It flew around the room, causing everyone to watch it.

“Harvali!” Vizuna turned to her. “The Mask of Creation!”

Quickly, she discarded her villager Mask. Taking the golden Mask in her hands, she lifted it to her face. In a flash of light, it clamped in place. At once, the carving behind her split open, revealing a swirling vortex of light.

Taking a deep breath, she walked into the light, followed immediately by Agil.

The next thing she knew she was falling through the vortex. Bright lights flashed around her as she fell. To her side, Agil flew next to her.

An echoing voice filled the void, filling her ears.

When times are dark, and all hope seems lost, the Toa must unite. United, the elements hold the power to defeat evil. United, but not one.

The light began to blaze brighter and brighter, and she felt energy coursing through her body like never before. Her armor began to change, growing and expanding.

The Toa have the power to defeat evil, and save the island.

---

“You destroyed Umarak,” Makuta snarled, descending the steps. “I did not think that possible.”

“Obviously you underestimated us,” Tahu replied.

“Obviously.”

The titan continued to descend the stairs towards them. The ground shook with each massive step. He twirled his weapon, energy flickering around it. His wings glistened in the light.

“No matter, though, because I will defeat you. You can count on that.”

“And what will you do with us?” Kopaka asked. “Throw us in the Shadow Realm?”

“That’s too good for you. No,” he growled. “I will destroy your unity. Once and for all.”

“As long as there is light, we stand a chance against the dark,” Gali stepped forward.

Makuta chuckled. “The light has faded. Ekimu is dead. There will never be another Toa of Ligh-.”

He was cut off by a blast of light that shone from the top of the Forge. Turning around, he looked in horror as the light grew brighter and brighter. The Toa all smiled broadly as they watched it. Several shimmered within them.

A second later there was an explosion, before a figure emerged from the light. They flew through the air, a pair of glistening gold wings extending from their back.

The figure landed in front of the Toa, standing before the titan. He looked in shock at her as she stood up. Her gold, silver, and green armor shown with light. Her hammer-ax weapon crackled with energy.

“Impossible!” Makuta roared, taking a step back.

Harvali, Toa of Light, looked up.

“Destiny has arrived, brother.”

Chapter 21: Grace

The seven Toa and Ombra, Creature of Shadow, stood facing the shadowy titan before them. There was an energy in the air, one that had only been felt on the island once before. The last time, the island had been changed forever. Whatever happened today, it would do the same.

Energy sparkled beneath Harvali’s armor. She stared at Makuta from behind her glistening Mask of Creation. He continued to stare in disbelief.

“How have you done this?”

“Destiny is on my side. All the Toa of Light live in me now. Tawhito, Urawoi, Nuya, Barua, and Ekimu. I am them, and they are me.”

“I do not care who you are, or what you believe you are,” Makuta growled. “But I will destroy you just as I destroyed Ekimu! All of you!”

Energy blazed from his tribal staff. The Toa themselves flickered with elemental energy.

“Please, brother,” Harvali said. “It does not need to be this way. We can still fix this.”

“I am fixing it,” he retorted. “This island is broken – smitten by my brother’s actions – and I am the only one who can fix it!”

“We can fix it together! Put aside the sins of the past and look to the future!”

“Nothing can forgive the sins of your predecessors,” he stepped forward. “Not even an act of grace.”

“We have to try, Makuta,” she pleaded. “I know wounds run deep, but the fate of Okoto is at stake.”

He shook his head. “No. No, I will not work with you. I will not. You are an indoctrinated remnant of my brother’s tyranny. You do not see me as an equal, but as an enemy. I cannot possibly side with ylu. You are the enemy, and you shall fall before me!”

Bringing up his weapon, he swung it at the Toa. A wave of elemental energy flew from it and struck the seven Toa. The rippling power knocked them off their feet and sent them crashing to the ground.

“I am the only one who can rule Okoto, and I am the only one who can save it! Ekimu has stood in my way for far too long, and I shall put an end to it! An end to you!” he roared in rage, approaching the seven Toa.

Getting to their feet, the Toa ignited their weapons and stood to face the titan. At once he swung at them with his tribal staff, energy streaking behind it. The seven flipped over it, landing back on their feet seconds later. Together, they brought up their tools and fired blasts of elemental energy at him. Ombra fired a blast of shadow from his mouth. He brought up his weapon to block it, energy arching in every direction as it hit.

Ceasing their attack, the eight charged the titan. Bringing up his weapon again, he fired another powerful blast of energy at them. They dodged it and continued their charge. Twirling his weapon, Makuta slammed it to the ground. At once, a dozen shimmering Shadow Beasts sprouted from the ground to face the Toa. As one, they rushed forward to meet them.

“Go to Makuta!” Tahu told Harvali. “We’ll take care of them!”

Readying her weapon, the Toa of Light jumped into the air and flipped over the creatures of darkness, landing on the other side. Ombra charged the creatures and joined the Toa in their attack. Behind her, the Toa clashed with the twelve. Readying her weapon and shield, Harvali faced the titan. He growled at her.

“You will not defeat me!” he roared, stepping forward. “I will make sure that the Toa of Light dies with you!”

“Makuta-,” she began when a wave of shadow flew towards her. Bringing up her ax, she cut through it with a blast of light.

Drawing his own ax, the titan brandished his weapons, beginning to move towards the Toa. Lunging forward, he brought his ax down on her. Bringing up her shield, sparks flew as the two collided. Using his weight, he pushed down on her, causing her knees to buckle. She grunted underneath the pressure, struggling to keep her shield up.

Adjusting her grip on her weapon, she swung the blade at the titan’s leg. Seeing it, he jumped out of the way just as it swung below him. This forced him to cease his attack, allowing Harvali to escape and renew her attack. Brining up her weapon, she fired a barrage of elemental light energy from her hammer. The blasts struck the Mask Hoarder, causing him to stumble backwards.

Getting up, he roared at her. “Ekimu employed such an attack, but like him, you too shall fall, eventually!”

Thrusting his weapon forward, Makuta fired a blast of elemental energy at her. She jumped out of the way, the blast instead hitting a large pillar riddled in runes. This destroyed the base of the pillar, causing it to fall forward on the titan. Using his tribal staff, he smashed the stone as it came at him, reducing it to dust.

Stomping forward, he swung at her again with his ax. Ducking under it, she fired several blasts of energy at him. He blocked them with his hand and brought up his staff again. Energy crackled from it. Harvali stood with her weapon and shield ready.

“Please, Makuta!” she tried once more, desperation creaking in her voice. “This doesn’t have to be!”

“Oh, yes it does, sister,” he twirled his tribal staff in hand. “You have chosen your side.”

“We can be on the same side, brother! You just have to stop! We can fix Okoto!”

“I will fix Okoto! The Mask of Ultimate Power has shown me how! It has shown me the light!”

“The Mask of Ultimate Power has corrupted you! It has been for thousands of years! Its imprint is what kept you in the dark in the Shadow Realm!” she replied.

“No. You’re wrong,” he replied. “It is the only thing that kept me free of Ekimu’s spell!”

“The Mask is killing you!” she said. “Take it off!”

“No! The Mask is the only thing that has ever given me the power to change things! I will never take it off!”

Behind her, the six Toa and the Creature of Shadow cut through the last of the Shadow Beasts and turned to see Harvali standing against Makuta. Rushing forward, they joined their new sister. They brandished their weapons. Ombra pawed the ground and growled. The titan’s brow furrowed.

“I see that the Shadow Beasts were too weak for you,” he sighed. “No matter. I will just kill you myself.”

Raising his staff once again, energy crackled around it. Drawing it back, more power began to radiate from it. As it grew brighter, everything around them grew darker. They watched before readying their weapons. After a few moments, Makuta thrust his weapon forward, roaring as energy exploded from it. It shot through the air like a lightning bolt, the noise of it sounded for miles around.

The Toa and the Creature tried to move out of the way, but were too slow, and were hit directly by the blast. At once, they were launched across the city, light trailing from them as they flew. They fell through the air and crashed into the Arena. They laid inside large craters in the floor of the building.

Dust filled the air as the Toa started to move. Slowly, the seven of them got up. Ombra, after a few moments, managed to get up, but shook slightly. They coughed as they inhaled dust.

“He’s too powerful!” Kopaka said, drawing his sword. “How can we beat him?”

“We need to remove the Mask of Ultimate Power!” Gali replied. “It’s the only way!”

“But the last time someone did that, it ravaged the island,” Lewa looked concerned. “Do we really want to risk doing that again?”

“We have to,” Tahu nodded. “For the sake of the island.”

“It seems like a big risk to take, firespitter,” Pohatu stepped towards him.

“Too big, maybe,” Onua agreed.

The Toa of Fire’s eyes flashed. “I don’t see you suggesting what to do instead!”

“Don’t turn on your friends, Toa,” a booming voice filled the Arena. “You just might need them to survive.”

Turning, they saw Makuta standing at the entrance. Energy crackling underneath his armor as he twirled his tribal staff. A smile was drawn across his Mask of Ultimate Power. The Toa immediately readied their weapons and stood to face him. Ombra crouched down, energy crackling in the Creature of Shadow’s mouth again.

Makuta surveyed the Arena.

“I used to come here with my brother thousands of years ago to watch the Hammer Flush tournaments. I remember the crowds cheering Ekimu as he entered, but never me. The Islanders worshiped him, and this stands as a testament to him as an idol.”

He twirled his weapon again.

“That no longer matters, however, because once I destroy you, nothing will stand in my way ever again.”

Readying his weapon, the Mask Hoarder lunged at the Toa. They jumped out of the way as he landed. Getting up, he swung his weapon at the seven Toa. In response, they ducked underneath it before swinging their own weapons at him. He blocked Tahu’s blades and pushed him away before dodging Gali’s trident and knocking her to the ground. Lewa brought his ax down at the titan’s back, but he blocked it and threw the Toa into Onua, who had been charging him with his hammer. Pohatu, Kopaka, and Ombra attacked him with elemental energy from both sides, briefly pinning him in place.

Harvali, running forth, jumped at the titan. Bringing up her weapon, she swung to strike the Mask Ultimate Power when she was knocked away by Makuta’s ax, which he had brought up when he saw her approaching. The Toa of Light hit the ground hard, becoming still.

Getting up, Tahu and Gali rushed over to Harvali and helped her up. She was dazed but alright. They helped her up.

“He’s too powerful,” the new Toa said.

“I’m going to go help the others,” Tahu nodded to Gali before rushing away.

Lewa and Onua made their way over to their sisters. Lewa helped steady Harvali while Onua looked to their brothers who were gravely outmatched against Makuta. Readying his hammer, he turned to his fellow Toa.

“I’ll go. You help Harvali recover,” he said before moving to leave.

“Wait!” Lewa called after him, causing him to stop in his tracks.

“What?” the Toa of Earth asked, obviously anxious to aid his brothers.

“Ekimu had the Arena rebuilt to just as it was before we destroyed it, right?” the Toa of Jungle asked.

“Yeah, he did,” Gali nodded.

“Even the Hammer Flush?”

She thought about it for a moment. “I believe so.”

A smile broke across his face. “I know what to do!”

“What?” the three of them asked.

He turned to his brother. “Onua. Hit the lever!” he said, pointing above the large Toa’s head.

Looking around, he saw the tower of pillars situated in the middle of the Arena. The familiar stone lever jutted from the top. Onua’s eyes flashed in realization.

“Are you sure? I destroyed it before-,” he was cut off by Lewa.

“That’s exactly what I want you to do. Bring the building down on Makuta. He made be immensely powerful, but I doubt he can survive a building dropping on him.”

“We haven’t any time to lose,” Harvali managed to balance herself. “We need to end this. Now.”

“Onua. Go smash,” Lewa said.

He readied his hammer. “Alright. Let’s do this.”

Charging forward, the Toa of Earth made his way towards the pillars.

Energy flashed through the air as Tahu, Kopaka, and Pohatu continued to battle Makuta. The three Toa could barely keep up against the titan, but were doing their best to stand their ground.

“Only three of you?” Makuta laughed, knocking the Toa of Ice away. “Where are the others?”

He brought his staff down on Tahu. The Toa barely managed to bring up his flame blades to block it. Sparks flew as the two met. The Mask Hoarder pushed down, causing him to buckled under the weight. To his right, Pohatu fired blasts of stone at Makuta. Bringing up his arm, the titan creating a shield of energy to stop the attack.

“You Toa are supposed to be legendary! Yet you’ve been abandoned by your own!” he taunted.

Another voice suddenly filled the Arena. “You’re wrong, Makuta.”

Looking up, he saw Onua standing atop the stone tower. Elemental energy glowed from underneath his armor. He held his hammer, ready to bring it down on the lever standing before him.

“They’re not abandoned. Never abandoned,” he said. “Just used as a distraction.”

“Hey!” Kopaka protested.

“What are you doing?” Makuta took a step forward, energy blazing in his eyes.

“Hitting the lever.”

Raising his hammer, purple elemental energy exploded from him, energy covering his body and spreading to his weapon. He held it for a moment before bringing it down on the lever. At once the Arena began to shake, the mechanism engaging. The tiles in the floor dropped away into darkness Cracks also appeared in the ceiling. The building was coming down.

“NO!” Makuta roared.

Igniting his tribal staff, he moved to attack the Toa of Earth. Behind him, Tahu, Gali, Lewa, Pohatu, and Kopaka gathered. Readying their weapons, they aimed them at the titan. Glowing with light, their fired powerful blasts of elemental energy at him. They five streams of power struck Makuta in full-force, sending him flying across the Arena and crashing into the ground, further destabilizing the structure.

Tahu looked up to Onua.

“Let’s go!” he yelled.

Jumping down, the Toa of Earth joined his brothers and sisters. Around them, the building was falling apart. Large blocks of stone came from the spires above them. The floor continued to give way, daring to plunge them into the darkness below.

“I am not getting stuck underground again!” Kopaka said.

“Run!” Gali exclaimed.

Together, the seven Toa and the Creature of Shadow ran towards the entrance of the Arena. More and more of the hexagonal tiles of the floor disappeared behind them while large blocks of stone fell from above. Pohatu redirected several pieces of the debris that threatened to crush them.

A second later they ran into entrance corridor. The walls fragmented around them, threatening to fall on them.

“Almost there!” Lewa pointed for the light at the end of the hallway.

Lunging forward, the eight of them crossed the threshold. They landed on the cobblestone pathway outside the Arena, falling to the ground. Getting back up, the eight of them looked up as the structure began to fully collapse. They watched with awe when they saw a figure moving inside of it. Squinting, they all gasped.

Inside, Makuta, using his large wings, was flapping across the chasm towards them. With expert skill, he dodged the large blocks that were falling around him. Rage blazed in his red eyes. Energy blazed from his weapon as he raised his tribal staff. The Toa, seeing this, raised their weapons to combat him.

Suddenly, a large block of stone fell and struck the titan. It knocked him out of the air. They watched as he fell into the darkness below.

Not even a moment passed before the entire Arena collapsed in on itself. The noise was deafening. The dust rising and filling the air like smoke blinded them. They listened as the rubble fell deeper into the pit. It was a familiar sound, but this time they weren’t the ones being buried under the wreckage.

After a moment, the rumbling died away. Silence fell, ringing in their ears. All was still. All was quiet. Watching, they saw dust begin to settle, the final pieces of rubble tumbling into the pit below. They were waiting.

Nothing happened.

“Uh?” Kopaka looked around. “Is he…?”

A large figure appeared from the pit. Their large wings blocked out the light that was beginning to break through the cloudy sky. The titan hovered in midair for a moment before readying their tribal staff. Elemental energy glittered from his weapon. The Toa moved to ready their weapons.

“Watch o-!” Tahu tried to say when the titan thrust his weapon forward. A powerful blast of elemental power struck them, consuming them in light. They cried in pan before their yells were drowned out by roaring power.

When the light, the seven Toa were lying the ground, the eight Elemental Creatures scattered around them. They were all unconscious.

Above them, Makuta descended to the ground. His massive wings folded into his back. He twirled his staff as he looked down on the Toa. A broad smile was spread across the Mask of Ultimate Power. The Toa continued to remain still as he began to circle them.

“You couldn’t stand against me when I first returned to the island, and you can’t stand against me now. I am Makuta, the Master of Darkness! I am the Shadow!”

Slowly, Harvali pushed herself off the ground. She weakly looked to the others, who were all still knocked out. Then, she looked to the titan looming before her.

“Ah. You’re not dead. Good,” he said, glee in his voice. “That will make your deaths more fun.”

“Please, Makuta,” she pleaded one last time. “You can end this, now.”

“Yes, I can,” he replied. “And I will.”

“If you don’t stop, you’ll destroy everything! If you destroy us, Okoto will fall!”

“All lies! Yes, the Toa and Creatures will not be reincarnated like you can be, but I will make sure that you are properly dealt with. Okoto will not fall into ruin with your deaths. In fact, Okoto will blossom like never before!”

“The Toa and the Creatures bring balance to Okoto! Okoto has only been out of balance for so long because you have been corrupted for millennium!” Harvali argued.

His eyes narrowed. “Explain yourself!”

“Before you were the Mask Hoarder, you were a Mask Maker. You both were, and being Mask Makers is so much more than making Masks of Power,” she got to her feet. “Ekimu was the Toa of Light. You were the Toa of Shadow. You were brothers, inseparable only by death. You were meant to be the defenders of Okoto while the others returned to the stars. You were heroes.

“But this changed when Ekimu first began experimenting with forbidden masks. He had broken the laws that you were to abide by, and this hurt you deeply. It created a rift between you, and drove you to create your own forbidden Masks, eventually forging the Mask of Ultimate Power. The incredible amount of power imbued in the Mask corrupted you. It magnified your worst intents and desires.”

She stepped towards him. “You are not evil. The Mask of Ultimate Power is.”

His eyes widened. “What?”

“You are a victim, Makuta,” Harvali said. “The Mask took advantage of you. You were jealous of your brother, and it caused you to kill him. You’re not the villain. You’re the victim.”

“I chose to kill Ekimu,” he replied. “Not the Mask. I did. I chose to blast him off the face of this island, once and for all. You mean to suggest that my actions are not my own?”

He swung his tribal staff at her, forcing her to jump backwards. Around them, the Toa and Creatures were beginning to stir.

“Everything that I have done – everything that I plan to do – is of my own free will.”

Leveling his weapon, he aimed it at Harvali. Energy blazed from it.

“And just like I chose to kill Ekimu,” Makuta growled. “I will choose to kill you.”

Energy crackled from his weapon. Harvali continued to stand her ground. The Toa and Creatures looked up to see.

“Goodbye, sister,” he said.

A powerful blast of elemental power exploded from the titan’s weapon. Everything seems to slow down. The ground shook beneath them as it traveled through the air. The area grew darker as the light of the attack became brighter. The Toa and Creatures watched its progress towards the Toa of Light.

Harvali, watching it come closer and closer, brought up her saw shield. The blast slowly came closer when time sped back up. She dug her feet into the ground as the blast finally hit her shield. Sparks flew in all directions as she strained from the intensity of the attack. Her feet skidded across the cobblestone as she was pushed back.

Around her, the Toa and Creatures got up. They readied their weapons.

“Hang on, Harvali!” Gali called to her, readying her trident.

Stepping forward, the six Toa pointed their weapons at Makuta. As one, they fired powerful blasts of energy at him. They struck him with force, causing him to stumble backwards. However, he managed to continue his assault on the Toa of Light, even more energy streaking from his weapon. Nonetheless, the Toa continued their attack. Beside them, the eight Creatures fired their own blasts of energy. This made the titan to skid backwards even more, this time causing him to lose his aim for a second.

This second was all Harvali need, however.

Free from the attack, she readied her Power Ax and charged forward. She ran between her allies’ attacks, a tunnel of light around her. Taking the handle of her weapon in both hands, she approached the titan.

“Agil!” she called to the Creature of Light.

Immediately, Agil stopped their attack and flew into the air, circling around before diving for the Toa. Jumping onto a stone, Harvali launched herself at Makuta. Behind her, Agil flew onto her back. There was a blast of light as the two united, large golden wings extending from her back. She flew through the air, coming within feet of the titan.

Bringing her weapon down, she swung it back up, directly towards her brother’s face. He could only watch as it came towards his Mask of Ultimate Power. He cried out in rage just as she knocked the Mask from his face. Energy trailed from it as flew through the air from his face.

There was a suddenly a blast of light that consumed the Mask, Makuta, and Harvali. It blinded the six Toa. A wave of energy rushed from it like a strong breeze, causing them to take a step backwards to brace themselves. It rolled across the entire city, knocking over corrupted villagers and the remaining Skull Creatures and Elemental Beasts.

At the foot of the Forge of the Mask Makers, the Protectors, Okotans, Skull Slicer, and Axato, who had been watching the battle, were hit by the shockwave. They lost their footing, nearly falling to the ground. Yet, they continued to watch the glaring light.

“What’s happening?” Nilkuu asked.

Vizuna smiled. “Destiny.”

The light began to fade. Narmoto readied his flame blades.

“Come on. It’s about time we helped.”

Together, the group descended the stairs and towards the collapsed Arena.

---

Slowly, Harvali pushed herself off the ground. She was no longer united with Agil. Her form had changed. Her armor was no longer that of the Toa of Light, but now like that of the Mask Makers. Her Power Ax and shield had also been shrunken.

The Toa and Creatures rushed up to her. She looked up at them.

“What happened?” she asked, still slightly dazed.

“You knocked the Mask of Ultimate Power from Makuta’s face, and then everything went white,” Gali replied.

“So I didn’t destroy the island? That’s good,” she sat down, holding her head.

“How did you know that would work?” Lewa inquired.

“I didn’t,” Harvali answered. “I really didn’t know what would happen when I did that. It just felt… right.”

Silence fell for a moment. Then, they heard footsteps, and turned to see the Protectors, Okotans, Skull Slicer, and Axato approaching them. They looked astonished and in awe of the heroes.

“Toa!” Narmoto said. “You’re alive!”

“Of course we are,” Onua chuckled, “Did you ever doubt us?”

“A little, yeah,” Kivoda replied.

“I thought that you were never going to come back, if I’m being honest,” Izotor rubbed his head.

“We didn’t think that we were either,” Gali smiled.

“And you won,” Korgot said excitedly. “You defeated Makuta.”

She looked at the seven of them.

“All of you.”

The Toa and the Mask Maker smiled at her. Nilkuu looked around.

“Where is Makuta?”

They were about to start looking when, behind them, something moved. Swinging around, their eyes widened as they saw an impossible figure standing before them.

Makuta stood there, but he was no longer a titan. Instead, he seemed to have been reverted to his Mask Maker form, much like Harvali, only his armor was now purple and silver, not purple and gold that he had once had thousands of years ago. He wore no Mask on his face, and was looking around holding his head, confused.

“What’s going on?” he asked, his voice quiet.

Immediately, the six Toa drew their weapons and pointed them at him. The Protectors did the same. He looked at them, fear in his eyes.

“Wait!” Harvali said, getting up.

Passing between the Toa and the Protectors, she approached Makuta. He looked at her, surprise in his eyes. She stopped before him, standing face-to-face.

“Harvali… I…” he struggled to speak.

“It’s okay,” she replied softly. “I know.”

“You know?” he raised an eyebrow. “How can you know? How can you understand? Everything I’ve done…” his breath shuddered. “Ekimu… I….”

“That wasn’t you. I told you that,” she cut across him. “Don’t blame yourself for his death.”

“All the death. All the destruction. I did it all!” he held his head. “I destroyed Okoto!”

“No, you didn’t,” she shook her head. “You didn’t destroy Okoto. But,” she stopped.

He looked up at her. Smiling, she reached behind her back and unhooked something from the chain that hung across her chest.

“You can help rebuild it,” Harvali said, holding the Mask of Control out towards him.

Looking down, he looked at his former Mask for a long moment. Harvali, seeing his reservation, smiled again.

“Take it. It’s yours.”

Meeting her gaze, he smiled faintly. Hesitantly, he looked down again and slowly reached for the Mask. As he touched it, he felt a warmth run through his fingers that he hadn’t felt in thousands of years. Taking it, he watched it, its eyes looking back at him.

Holding it up, he raised it to his face. Putting it on, the magnetic clamps activated, attached it to his face. At once a surge of energy shot through him, causing him to recoil. After it subsided, he stood up again. The Mask shimmered for a moment before turning silver, just like his armor. A smile on his face, he looked around, his purple eyes glowing from behind the Mask of Control.

“What are you doing?” Kopaka stepped forward towards Harvali.

“Don’t give him the Mask!” Lewa readied his ax.

“It’s okay!” Harvali said to her fellow Toa. “He’s not a threat anymore!”

“How do you know?” Pohatu asked, holding his weapons at the ready.

“Because I have shown him the light. The evil is gone. Makuta has been restored to who he is supposed to be,” she explained.

The Toa still weren’t convinced. Makuta, seeing this, stepped forward.

“I know that you can’t trust me. I tried to have you destroyed more times than I can count. I’ve sent creatures of darkness and destruction after you. I opposed you at every turn. I threatened the people you were sworn to protect. In fact, I’m the one who forced the Protectors to draw you out of your peaceful slumber into this terrible place. I’m the one who condemned you to the Shadow Realm to be at the mercy of the monsters that I ruled.

“But I’m sorry. I’m truly sorry for everything that I’ve done. I’m sorry for trying to destroy your homes, your families. I’m sorry for my crusade for power. The Mask of Ultimate Power corrupted me to my core. It took my worst desires and instincts and magnified them. It made me a monster. It made me a tyrant. I would take it all back if I could.

“I know that I’m not deserving of your forgiveness, nor do I want it, but I hope that you can help me restore this island to what it’s supposed to be.”

They looked at him with uncertainty. How could they believe him? How could they trust him? During their entire time on Okoto, they had faced Makuta’s adversity at every turn. He had always been their sworn enemy. Every legend they had heard had taught them that he was the root of all evil; that everything bad that had happened had been because of the Mask Hoarder’s treachery. Everything they knew, everything they believed, was in question.

The group continued to stare at him. He smiled faintly and looked down.

“Of course,” he said. “If you wish to punish me for everything that I have done, I will gladly accept anything that you see fit.”

Harvali shook her head. “That won’t be necessary.”

“If they want it, and it is the only way for them to believe that I am genuinely sorry for what I’ve done,” he replied.

At that moment, Ombra walked up to Makuta. The Creature pushed its head under the Mask Maker’s head. Smiling, he rubbed its head affectionately. The Toa watched this with surprise.

“Ombra trusts him…” Gali trailed off.

“That means…” Kopaka muttered.

Suddenly a loud noise filled the air. Turning around, they saw the Mask of Ultimate Power, which had been lying several feet away near several bushes, firing sparks of elemental energy into the air. The surface of the Mask glowed before it began to shake. The sparks caused the Mask to jump around. The group watched it with confusion. Makuta and Harvali’s eyes widened, however.

“Is that-?” Harvali gasped.

“It is,” Makuta nodded solemnly.

“What?” Vizuna readied his Elemental Flame Bow. “What is it?”

“Impossible,” he replied cryptically.

The sparks became bolts, firing more frequently and more intense. Slowly, the Mask began to rise into the air. They watched as more and more energy shot from it. Their grips on their weapons tightened, they readied for whatever was about to happen.

In a flash of light, condensed energy began to flow from the Mask towards the ground. The energy flashed in every color. It flowed and grew, seemingly becoming like a body. The torso and appendages shimmered unstably. Sparks fell from the makeshift body.

Blocks of rubble suddenly flew from around them and into the figure. It coalesced into what appeared to be armor, further defining its form. They watched as it set its feet ground. At once it bent over, like it was weak.

“What. Is that,” Pohatu growled.

“I don’t know,” Tahu said. “But whatever it is, we will defeat it, like we’ve defeated everything else.”

“Harvali. What is this thing?” Lewa asked.

“I– I mean, Ekimu, feared this might happen if the Mask was ever reforged and detached from Makuta.”

“And?” he pressed.

“It’s an imprint,” Makuta said. “An imprint created by the Mask of Ultimate Power. A remnant of my worst intentions and desires. My worst instincts. My nightmares. Everything dark within me, is manifest in that.”

The creature stood still for a moment before shooting upwards. It stood perfectly erect before it slouched forward. The multicolored eyes watching them from behind the Mask of Ultimate Power matched its form, ever-shifting, ever-changing. It twitched incessantly, its head snapping from position to position.

“I…” the creature, began to speak, its voice scratchy and broken, but unmistakably like that of Makuta’s. “I have waited… thousands and thousands of years… I waited for this moment… I wanted to become real again…”

It took a heavy step forward. Energy trailed from its shimmering body. The Okotans took a step back, while the Toa and Protectors stood their ground.

“’Become real again?’” Onua repeated, his grip on his hammer tightening.

“The first time I manifested myself was that fateful day,” it said before pointing to Makuta. “The day he wore we. The day everything changed.”

“The Great Cataclysm,” Kopaka narrowed his eyes.

“Yes…” the creature replied. “The day I was born, and the day that I died.”

It took another step forward. “Since that day, I have been planning my revenge. Since that day, for thousands of years, the fragments of my consciousness began formulating a plan.”

“A plan for what?” Lewa asked.

The creature snapped its head towards him. “A plan to destroy everything. You. The Creatures. The Okotans. Everything. Even the ground beneath our feet.”

“Why would you want to do this?” Gali clutched her trident.

“Because you are parasites, and parasites must be removed.”

“Yeah? You and who’s army?” Tahu asked, a smirk on his face.

It watched him for a moment before chuckling. The noise sounded as if someone were scrapping rocks together. It pierced their ears, causing them ti cringe slightly. Then the creature stopped, and looked up at them.

“This army.”

Makuta realized what was happening. “No!”

Waving its arm, energy flickering around its hand. Nothing happened for a moment when Makuta’s minions rose from the ground. Their eyes blazed purple, energy seemingly pluming from the slits in their Masks. They watched them for a moment before Skull Slicer and Axato keeled over in pain. Their bodies convulsed.

“What’s going on?” Nilkuu asked, looking at them.

“Oh no,” Harvali muttered.

Both warriors became still before standing up, their eyes blazing like the rest of the creatures. They drew their weapons and aimed them at the group. Growling, they took a step towards them. Shocked, the heroes readied their own weapons.

“What is this?” Tahu demanded of the creature.

Rolling its head backwards, it let out a howling laugh. It echoed across the city, sending chills down their spines. Snapping forward again, a wicked, twisted, smile was spread across the Mask of Ultimate Power.

“Through this Mask, I created these beasts,” it said. “And through this Mask, I control them all!”

The beasts began to approach them on all sides. They glowed with energy as they closed in. Skull Basher, possessed in the same way that their allies were, was among them. Together, the Toa, the Mask Makers, the Protectors, the Creatures, and the Okotans, backed together, forming a tight circle. The warriors brandished their weapons, while the others hid inside the stronghold. They watched as the army drew closer.

“It is useless to fight, Toa,” the creature taunted. “There is no escape this time. This is the end. The end of your lives.”

Tahu, watching their adversaries come closer, and seeing that they were gravely outnumbered, realized that the creature was right.

“This is the end,” he nodded, his companions looking at him. “But we will not meet our end without a fight. You can be sure of that.”

Smiling, it leaned forward, its body twitching. “Then so be it, Toa.”

Stepping forward, the creatures readied their attacks. Energy blazed all around them, daring to destroy them. The Toa could feel it, and their faces were resigned to their fate.

Then, something happened.

A barrage of blasts of energy came from the city gate and struck the army before them. The attack knocked them off-balance. Turning around, they roared their rage. The Toa, following their gaze, were shocked by what they saw.

Hundreds of Okotans from all Regions were streaming across the bridge and into the city. Many of them were carrying element-based weapons, but others also carried bows, swords, and spears. Glonor, Cesea, and the rest of the former inhabitants of the city were among them. They were also joined by Kongu and the forces of Hornfell, as well as many other villagers that they had met on their journeys. It was an incredible sight to see them standing united.

Approaching the hoard, they opened fire again, sending them stumbling backwards. The beasts roared again, but starting to charge the villagers.

The Toa were about to go help them when Narmoto stopped them.

“No!” the Protector of Fire said. “We’ll help the villagers. You take care of that beast!”

“Are you sure, Narmoto?” Gali asked.

“Yes. We can handle it. But if we’re to win the day, you need to destroy whatever that creature is,” Korgot replied.

The Toa looked at the Protectors, who had been their most constant allies during their time on Okoto. It was a solemn moment, but could not last for long. Narmoto made sure of it.

“Go! There isn’t any time to lose!” he instructed, before rushing off with the others to help the Okotans.

Left with themselves and the Creatures, the Toa and the Mask Makers looked to the creature. Its form crackled with energy, bolts of which flew in all directions. Readying their weapons, they stood to face their enemy.

“Alright, Toa,” Tahu said, stepping forward. “As one. Unite!”

Running forward, the six Toa were followed by their respective Creatures. In a brilliant flash of light, they united with the spirits, becoming one with them. Elemental energy radiating from them like heat from a fire, they charged the creature of the Mask of Ultimate Power.

Harvali was about to go join them when she saw that Makuta was standing on the sidelines.

“Makuta! We need you!” she urged him.

“I can’t,” he replied, shaking his head. “My essence is too corrupt.”

“You’ve been forgiven, my brother,” she smiled. “We need you. We need the Toa of Shadow. Our destiny is at hand.”

“I can’t,” he repeated.

“You must!” Harvali pressed. “The fate of Okoto will be decided today, and it is our duty to ensure that it is still standing after that fate is decided!”

He looked at her for a moment before sighing. “You’re right. Of course you’re right.”

“Go to the Temple of Shadow with Ombra,” she said, readying her hammer and saw shield. “Join us as soon as you can!”

She then ran off, being followed by Agil. In a blinding glare, the two of them united, Harvali once again becoming the Toa of Light. She soared into the air, flying to join the battle.

Makuta watched her go, before turning to the Creature of Shadow. It looked at him with its glowing purple eyes. He nodded.

“Duty calls,” he looked up to the Forge of the Mask Makers. Together, they made their way towards it.

---

“You will not defeat me, Toa!” the beast roared pulling its arms back as Harvali arrived. The seven Toa stood united against the beast.

“United, we can do anything,” Onua replied.

“Then die!” it thrust its arms forward. Immensely powerful blasts of energy shot from them. The Toa barely managed to jump out of the way as they came at them. The blasts cut through everything they hit. Pillars, roads, bushes, and even members of the creature’s own army were destroyed.

A moment later it stopped before lunging at the Toa. It moved incredibly fast, forcing them to recoil as it took a massive swing at them. Kopaka, Onua, and Gali were too slow and were struck, being thrown to the ground. The other four Toa tried to strike it in return, but were too knocked away. They crashed to the ground beside their brothers and sister.

“The Toa are supposed to be unstoppable,” the creature taunted. “This is pathetic! Defeating you will be easy!”

“As long as we are still breathing,” Tahu got up, as did the others. “We will not stop until you are destroyed!”

It chuckled. “A noble sentiment, Toa of Fire. But I guarantee you that I am immortal. I am stronger than any being who has ever walked this wretched island. I am death. I am life. I am god.”

“Don’t listen to it!” Harvali readied her Power Ax. “We can destroy it, together!”

Thrusting her weapon forward, she fired a beam of pure light. The blast struck the creature in the chest, causing it to stagger backwards. Seeing this, the other six joined her, firing their own energy at it. This further destabilized the beast, its form beginning to shake uncontrollably. It roared in rage, the ground trembling below them.

“It’s working!” Gali exclaimed.

“Keep it up!” Pohatu replied. “We’re not done yet!”

Energy began to flicker around them. Sparks fell from nowhere, covering them in light. The ground continued to quake, becoming more intense by the moment. More and more light glittered around them, starting to blind them.

“What’s happening?” Kopaka asked.

Suddenly a circle of energy appeared beneath the eight combatants. They looked at it for a moment before it shimmered and the ground gave out from under them. Yelling in surprise, they fell through the circle and immediately hit the ground.

Getting up, they looked around, shocked by their new surroundings.

“Where are we?” Tahu took a few steps forward.

“The Region of Earth,” Onua replied. “But how?”

“The massive amount of energy we were expelling must’ve created a rift,” Harvali speculated. “Just like how Makuta created portals to cross the island.”

“Well, at least now we’re away from the city,” Lewa said.

She shook her head. “I don’t think it’s as simple as that. That beast is incredibly unstable. If we keep fighting, we’re likely going to tear more holes in the fabric of reality.”

“And we have to keep fighting. At all costs,” Tahu looked at her.

“I know.”

Several feet away from them, the creature got to its feet. It was breathing heavily, energy blazing from its form. It looked at them with its flickering eyes, an expression of rage across the Mask of Ultimate Power. Raising its arm, it pointed a finger at them.

“What have you done?”

“You’re destroying Okoto, beast,” Tahu answered. “End this. Now.”

“I’m destroy Okoto?” it asked, confused, before wickedly smiling again. “Oh. Of course. I see now. Excellent. That is how I will destroy this island and the parasites that infest it. Thank you for showing me.”

Energy began to flicker through the air again. Readying their weapons, the Toa charged it. The light was glittering brightly before another rift opened in the air to the left the creature. Looking at it, it quickly passed through it. The Toa, just feet behind it, jumped as the portal began to close. They made it across the threshold with only seconds left, crashing onto the hot ground of the Region of Fire.

The ground shook and thunder crackled overhead. The Toa looked up at this while they got to their feet.

“That doesn’t seem good,” Kopaka remarked.

“It’s not,” Harvali replied. “The more portals it creates, the more the universe is torn. If we don’t destroy the Mask of Ultimate Power, everything, not just Okoto, will die.”

The creature was glowing brightly. Jumping forward, the seven Toa fired blasts of energy at it. They hit it in the back, sending it forward. Continuing their attack, energy blazed from them.

Suddenly, the beast whipped around, bringing its arm after it. A wave of energy flowed, striking the Toa with devastating force. It knocked them off the feet and sent them crashing to the ground. They were dazed, and unable to get up. The creature smiled as it approached them, energy trailing from it.

“You are weak, and that is why I will win.”

It drew its arms back, ready to strike.

---

Makuta quickly made his way into the Forge of the Mask Makers, followed by Ombra. They ran to the staircase and descended into the dungeons. Running past the open cells, they ran towards the back wall of the chamber. Their footsteps echoed as they went.

Eventually, they reached the wall. Unlike the other walls in the dungeon, it was covered in ornate carvings. The most prominent was of a tall figure.

He stopped in front of it, breathing deeply.

“This is it,” he said.

Ombra purred.

“You’re right. There’s no time to waste.”

Placing his hand on the carving, he watched as his hand glowed with purple energy, followed by the figure. It stayed like this for a second before the carving split and wall slid open to reveal a swirling vortex of purple light. Taking a step back, he stared into the abyss.

It had been thousands of years since he had last transformed into the Toa of Shadow. Would it accept him, after everything he had done? Harvali thought he was worthy, but how could she be sure?

“I don’t know if I can do this,” he gulped.

Makuta… a voice echoed in his head. Makuta…

“Ekimu?” he replied.

The Toa need you… Okoto needs you…

“I can’t. I’m not worthy.”

You are worthy… You’ve always been worthy…

“Even after everything? Even after I killed you?”

Yes… No one is beyond redemption… Not even you…

He fell silent.

Become the Toa of Shadow, brother… Ekimu said. Fulfill your destiny…

Makuta, taking a deep breath, nodded. He looked down at Ombra, who was looking up at him expectantly. He smiled.

“Time to go.”

Stepping forward, the two entered the twirling tunnel of light, disappeared into the glare.

---

The Okotans were increasingly overwhelmed by the creatures. Every time they knocked one down, three more seemed to take its place. The Protectors were caught in a tightly-knit cluster, while the other hundred villagers were taking on the horde. Glonor and Cesea fought back-to-back, defending each other against their enemies. The others were struggling to do the same.

“We’re outnumbered!” Jaller yelled, slamming a blade into the chest of a Lava Beast, killing it.

“There isn’t much that we can do about that!” Cesea replied, amputating a Skull Warrior’s leg.

“We have to keep fighting!” Glonor fired a barrage of ice projectiles into the crowd, knocking them back. “We don’t have choice other than dying!”

They continued fighting. The horde was closing in. Their energy was running out, as well as their ammunition. It was an uphill climb that they were not going to make.

“Well,” Nilkuu struck back a Skull Scorpio. “It was a good run that we had, wasn’t it?”

“I had fun,” Vizuna replied.

“It was an honor,” Izotor said.

“You guys are my family,” Korgot smiling, slamming her Star Drill into an Elemental Beast.

“I tolerated your company,” Kivoda smiled slightly.

“The pleasure of my life,” Narmoto nodded. “I would want to die no other way.”

They continued fighting, but were resigned to their fates. They knew that the end was near, and that there was no escape. In time, everything ends, and they accepted that this was theirs. Six Protectors, bound by duty, were about to die by it.

Or were they?

Suddenly, all around them, the horde stopped in their tracks. They glowed with a strange energy before dropping to the ground, dead. Skull Basher, Skull Slicer, Axato and the Skull Raiders were unconscious. Shocked, they looked for an explanation.

“Hang on,” Hewkii pointed ahead of him. “Is that…?”

Standing several feet away was a figure clad in black, silver, and purple armor. He carried a large armor and saw shield. His Mask of Control was like crystal, glittering with energy. Ombra, Creature of Shadow, was fused to his back.

“Makuta!” one of the villagers yelled, pointing their weapon at him.

“There is no need for adversity, my child,” he replied calmly. “I am here to help.”

“What happened to you?” Narmoto asked.

“I am the Toa of Shadow, the eighth elemental Toa. This is my destiny.”

“What happened to the horde?” Nilkuu scratched his head.

“They had darkness in their souls,” he replied. “I took it out.”

The Protector of Fire thought for a moment. “What are you going to do now?”

“Help my brothers and sisters defeat that monster, once and for all.”

“But you don’t even know where they are,” Kivoda said. “How are you going to find them?”

“They’re coming back,” Makuta answered. “I can feel it.”

---

Harvali splashed into the water, falling to the floor of the pond. Reemerging, she readied her weapons again and rejoined the fight. The other six were fighting furiously against the creature. Only moments ago had they been transported t the Region of Water, and the swampy terrain was proving to be an impediment.

Slamming his ax into the ground, Lewa glowed with energy. Suddenly a dozen vines sprouted from the swampy floor and wrapped themselves around the beast. They ensnared it, trapping it for a moment. Beside him, Kopaka and Gali fired ice and water, freezing part of the creature. Tahu and Pohatu fired flame and sand, encasing it in glass. Onua trapped its feet in earth, while Harvali blinded it with light.

“Keep going!” Tahu said. “It’s working!”

They did as they were told. They continued to trap the beast with their elemental powers. Roaring with rage, the creature struggled, but was unable to move.

“Let me free!” it growled, thrashing. “LET ME FREE!”

“You’re a threat to Okoto,” Tahu replied. “It’s our duty to stop you.”

“No…” it tried to escape. “NO!!!”

Energy flickered underneath the cocoon. Suddenly, the energy exploded outwards. It consumed them, sending large shards of glass, ice, and bits of earth and vine at them. The shockwave sent them flying backwards and into the water. Now free, the creature pulled itself up and looked at them.

“Even when you stand united, you are helpless to stand against me.”

Spreading its arms, it glowed with elemental energy again, sparks of light appeared in the air around them. Energy around them began to shake. Glowing brighter, there was a flash of light, and they all vanished.

The next thing the Toa knew was that they were on solid ground. Looking around, they saw that they had returned to the City of the Mask Makers. The creature was standing above them, walking around. Energy continued to radiate from its body. It seemed to be looking for something, but whatever it was was unknown to them.

“This island is flowing with elemental energy,” it said. “If I can tap into it, I can destroy it.”

Outstretching its hands, the ground began to glow. The earth trembled as the creature began to draw energy up from the ground and itself. The Toa got up and watched this, horror in their faces.

“What is it doing?” Gali asked.

“Absorbing the elemental power of Okoto!” Harvali exclaimed. “If it absorbs enough, it could destroy the island!”

“Then we know what we have to do,” Tahu said.

The seven Toa readied their weapons and approached the beast. However, as they were about to attack, the creature opened its mouth and unleashed a powerful blast of energy. The blast struck them and sent them crashing to the ground. It laughed and continued to siphon elemental power from the island.

“Nothing can stop me now. This island will be cleansed. Cleansed…”

“No, it won’t,” said a voice.

The creature turned when it was hit by a powerful blast of shadow. This knocked it away, severing its connection with Okoto. It stumbled backwards and fell down a flight of stairs, crashing to the ground, stunning it for a moment.

The other Toa got up and were surprised to see a figure standing several paces away. He glittered with elemental energy, his armor glinting in the light.

“Makuta?” Lewa exclaimed.

“Whoa. I was not expecting this,” Kopaka remarked.

“What have you done?”

“I have fulfilled my destiny and become the Toa of Shadow,” he answered.

Harvali was smiling broadly. “Destiny truly on our side.”

She walked up to her fellow Toa and clanked fists with him. The two stood together for a moment when the creature suddenly reemerged from below. It landed feet from them, forcing them to take several steps backwards. Drawing their weapons, they stood to face the beast. It roared at them, rage blazing in its eyes.

“More of you isn’t going to stop me, even if it is the one who gave me life.”

“I forged you out of ambitious and greed,” Makuta replied. “I was wrong to create you. You have only brought death and destruction to this people. I will atone for my sins and put this right.”

“I have transcended beyond you, O’ creator,” the creature spat. “I am what you only aspired to be. You said that you wanted to take your rightful place among the gods. Well, I have become a god. I bring life, and I bring death. I chose who lives, and who dies.”

The Toa of Shadow narrowed his eyes. “And you’ve chosen that we’re all to die, right?”

It smiled. “Yes.”

Thrusting its arm forward, a blast of elemental energy shot from it. Harvali and Makuta leaped out of the way, dodging the blast as it hit where they had been standing. They then charged the beast. Bringing up their weapons, they swung it. Using its rock armor, it blocked their attacks. They then jumped back as it swung at them, before firing blasts of light and shadow at it.

The other six Toa, who had been watching from the sidelines, looked at each other.

“Guys,” Lewa looked at them. “I don’t think that Makuta’s the bad guy.”

“He’s… on our side,” Onua said in disbelief. “He’s really on our side.”

“I can’t believe it,” Gali gasped.

“Neither can I,” Kopaka concurred.

“This day is just full of surprises,” Pohatu muttered.

Tahu stepped forward and ignited his flame swords. “If he is truly our brother, then let’s help him put an end to this!”

United, the six Toa charged forth to aid their brother and sister. Together, they fired devastating blasts of energy at the creature’s back. They hit with force, causing to fall forward. In front of it, the Toa of Light and Shadow again launched elemental blasts at it. Locked in place, it roared its dismay, struggling to free itself.

“This will not defeat me!” it growled. “This will only make me stronger!”

The Toa continued their attack. Like before, sparks of energy began to appear in the air around them. Seeing this, the Toa looked at each other.

“We’re going to open another rift!” Lewa said.

“Good,” Makuta replied. “We need to get this battle away from the city!”

“Makuta’s right,” Tahu nodded. “It’s too dangerous to stay here. We need to keep the Okotans safe.”

“We don’t have any choice,” Harvali interjected. “The rift is opening.”

Around them, everything was beginning to flicker. The energy pulsating, they watched for a moment when there was an explosion of light. A moment later they were struck by a freezing wind. Snow flew around them, reducing their visibility to almost nothing.

“The Region of Ice!” Gali exclaimed, getting her footing in the deep snow.

“Good,” Kopaka smiled. “I can work with this.”

The creature got up and growled. The Toa, once again readying their weapons, moved to charge. However, the beast stopped them, holding its hand up.

“This is becoming redundant,” it hissed. “We don’t have to keep doing this. We can… come to arrangement.”

“No. I don’t think so,” Pohatu twirled his hammers.

“Please. Do you really want to fight me for the rest of time?”

“If that’s what it takes to keep Okoto safe, then its our duty to fight you, no matter how long it takes. No matter how many of us have to die. No matter how much we have to sacrifice.”

“Enough with this,” the creature spat. “I will destroy this island, and you with it!”

The beast suddenly unleashed powerful blasts of elemental energy from its hands. The eight Toa dodged it and charged. Onua and Pohatu threw large chunks of earth and stone at it. Gali and Kopaka launched water and ice. Lewa and Harvali blasted wind and light. Tahu and Makuta, unlikely allies, combined their powers and created a cyclone of shadow fire.

These attacks threw the creature backwards. As it flew through the snow, energy flickered around them before they were consumed by another blast of light. A split second later, they were submerged in darkness. The feeling was familiar. Too familiar.

Looking up, they saw the towering buildings of the Capital City in the dark sky. Their outlines glowed with a purple light. The darkness of the Shadow Realm closed in on them.

“Oh no,” Harvali muttered.

Several paces away, the creature was outstretching its arms. A moment later, energy appeared in midair and began to flow into its body. Roaring, it began to glow with energy.

“It’s absorbing the dark energy of the Shadow Realm!” Makuta twirled his hammer.

“And that’s bad, right?” Kopaka asked.

“Very! It’s how I amassed my power during my exile here,” the Toa of Shadow replied. “If it absorbs enough and returns to our world, it will be able to wipe out Okoto!”

The beast continued to draw power from the Shadow Realm. Its body continued to glow brighter, bolts of energy flying from it. Around them, corrupted villagers and Makuta’s former minions – the Elemental Beasts, Shadow Traps, and Skull Spiders – began to gather. Their forms flickered in the light of the creature.

Laughing, it smiled as energy continued to flow into it. More and more bolts of energy shot from it as more and more power filled its body.

“Thank you for bringing me here,” it said. “This is the unlimited power I was looking for.”

“You don’t deserve that power!” Tahu yelled.

“I have waited thousands of lifetimes for this,” the creature responded. “This is my destiny!”

Readying their weapons, they charged the beast. The massive amount of elemental energy filling the air caused the Toa’s armor to glow. Regardless, they continued their charge. The light began to glitter more and more when there was another burst of light, and they appeared in a place similar, but not the same as the Shadow Realm.

“The Black Volcano!” Gali exclaimed.

“This is no better,” Makuta replied. “The Black Volcano is still part of the Shadow Realm. It’ll continue to siphon power from it!”

“Yes…” it growled, its body glowing with light again. “My destiny is at hand.”

Beneath them, the ground shook. Cracks appeared in the black floor, purple energy seeping through. They looked around as bolts of lightning flashed in the dark sky. The thunder that followed shook them to their cores.

“This is it!” Tahu said to his fellow Toa. “This is the endgame! This is why we’re here! This is our destiny!”

They nodded. Bringing their weapons up again, they turned to the beast. It was lumbering towards the glowing crystal in the center of the volcano, where Makuta had emerged weeks before. It ran its flickering hand over it, radiating with energy.

“Unlimited power…” it said.

Looking around, the creature turned to face the Toa. A smile was spread across the Mask of Ultimate Power.

“You shall not be against me any longer.”

Outstretching its hand, it glowed with energy.

“Goodbye, Toa,” it growled.

At once, a circle of light appeared beneath the eight. The light surrounded them before suddenly a portal opened beneath them and they fell through. They glimpsed the creature one last time before they once again came crashing into the City of the Mask Makers. Falling to the ground, their weapons clattered away from them.

Pushing themselves up, they saw that the beast had not come with them. A wave of dread washed over them.

“How are we going to get back to the Volcano? We need to stop it!” Kopaka got to his feet.

“There’s no way back,” Pohatu sat on a rock. “It’s over. We lost.”

“We could use the Masks of Speed again?” Gali suggested, desperate.

The ground shook again beneath them. The sky grew darker.

Harvali shook her head. “It’ll take too long.”

“Then what do we do?” Onua asked.

Behind them, the Protectors and Okotans arrived. They looked at the eight with confusion. Bingzak stepped up to them.

“Did you defeat it? Did you win?” the child said hopefully before another tremor shook the city.

The look in their faces told it all. “No. We didn’t,” Lewa answered.

“What does that mean?” Jaller asked.

“It means that Okoto is doomed, and there is nothing we can do to stop it,” Tahu stared at the ground, determined not to catch their eye.

“Well, you have to do something!” Kivoda stepped towards them. “You can’t just give up!”

Another quake hit. Anger filled the Toa of Fire. “There’s nothing that can be done! We lost! We failed! We’re not the heroes of Okoto! We failed all of you!”

The Protectors, Okotans, and the other Toa all looked in horror at the Toa. Was he right? Was there really no saving Okoto? Their friends and family were still out there on the island. Were they really doomed to die?

Suddenly, Makuta’s eyes lit up.

“There might be a way.”

They all turned to face the Toa of Shadow.

“What?” they all asked.

“We can combine our power to transport ourselves to the Black Volcano, much in the same way that the Mask of Ultimate Power does.”

“Is that even possible?” Gali asked.

He nodded. “We saw it. We experienced it. If the Mask can do it, so can we. We are the embodiment of all eight elements. We can do anything.”

“Wouldn’t it be dangerous? Wouldn’t it threaten Okoto?” Kopaka raised an eyebrow.

The ground shook again.

“It would be dangerous,” Makuta replied. “But it’s our only option.”

“We have to try,” Tahu agreed. “For Okoto. It’s our duty to protect the island.”

Pohatu got to his feet. “That leaves one question, though,” he looked at them. “What do we do when we get there? Because what we’ve been doing hasn’t really worked.”

“We’ll need to merge with our elements. Only then will we be able to destroy the Mask of Ultimate Power, once and for all,” Makuta explained.

“Why didn’t we know we could merge with our elements before?” Onua asked.

“Because to do it means that we have to give up our place on Okoto,” he said grimly.

The Toa were confused by this. “Meaning…?” Lewa trailed off.

“It means that we, and the Creatures, will return to the stars, where we all came from.”

“So we won’t be able to return to Okoto?” Gali’s voice shook slightly.

“Not for a while, and not until we’re needed again.”

Silence hung between them, and not for the first time that day.

“No!” Narmoto protested. “You can’t leave us! What if there’s danger again?”

Makuta took a deep breath. “With the destruction of the Mask of Ultimate Power, the darkness on this island will recede for a time. A long time. It won’t be dispersed forever, and when it comes crawling back, we’ll be there, ready to help you push back the dark.”

“But… after all we’ve been through,” tears formed in Korgot’s eyes.

Somberly, the Toa managed to smile. Tahu stepped towards the Protectors.

“Since we first arrived here, you were there to help us. You guided us through the island in search of Golden Masks that would help us defeat evil. You taught us and mentored us. When we were under attack, you risked your lives to protect us. You risked the lives of your people and your families to aid us when we needed it. Everything you’ve done has been to help us. It’s about time we did the same for you.”

He met Narmoto’s eyes.

“It’s time you stood on your own. It’s time you left the Toa and Mask Makers behind and forged your own destiny.”

Tears were streaking down the Protectors’ cheeks. Bingzak ran up to Harvali and hugged her. She hugged him back.

“Please, don’t go,” he cried.

Kneeling down, she tried to smile, but couldn’t.

“You’ve always been with me, Bingzak,” she said. “But everything has to end.”

The boy continued to cry. Slowly, Harvali reached behind her back and unhooked the Mask of Time from the chain. Bringing it around, she held it out for the Okotan.

“Here. You’re going to need it someday,” the Toa of Light smiled.

The boy watched it for a moment before taking it. He looked at its golden form as it shone. The Mask Maker stood back up and rejoining the seven.

Tahu smiled faintly before turning to his brothers and sisters.

“Come my friends, it’s time to go.”

Together, the eight Toa gathered in a circle. The Okotans watched from afar. Putting their weapons away, the Toa outstretched their hands towards each other. Closing their eyes, they began to concentrate. Ignoring the ground shaking beneath them, they instead focused on the raw elemental energy that flowed the island. It was powerful, they could feel it.

“Focus on the power,” Makuta said. “Tap into it. It is our path to the Black Volcano.”

They continued to focus. The energy continued to flow. A moment later their bodies began to glow with elemental energy. The light radiating from them burned like torches in the closing darkness. Around them, everything began to shimmer, growing more and more out of focus. Everything then became brighter and brighter.

In a blinding flash of light, the Toa disappeared from the City of the Mask Makers and reappeared atop of the Black Volcano. Their knees buckled as they landed. Looking around, their eyes were wide with surprise.

“We did it! We made it!” Gali exclaimed.

“I can’t believe that really worked,” Pohatu crossed his arms.

Lewa was the most shocked. “Makuta was right.”

Harvali looked to the Toa of Shadow. “Good work, brother.”

Several paces away, the creature was siphoning energy from Okoto. Hearing their arrival, ti turned around. It snarled, unable to believe what it was seeing.

“What? How are you here?”

The eight Toa readied their weapons. “Destiny has arrived,” Tahu said, one last time.

“No!” it thrust its arms forward, firing devastating blasts of energy. “I will not be defeated!”

The Toa dispersed, dodging the attack. Going wide, they formed another circle around it. Bringing up their weapons, they fired. Once again, the eight blasts of energy hit the creature from all sides. It roared again, unable to move. The Toa, knowing that this was the end, fired as much power as they could into the beast. Their weapons grew warm in their hands.

“NO! I HAVE WAITED TOO LONG TO BE FREE! I AM A GOD!”

Energy roared in their ears. Almost nothing could be heard over the sound of the raw power exiting their bodies. The creature’s body began to dissolve. Its arms and legs disappeared. It cried in anguish, its form dying. More and more of it vanished, leaving its torso for a moment before just the Mask of Ultimate Power remained. It flickered with energy, but was unaffected by their blasts.

Even with the creature gone, the ground continued to shake, and deadly bolts of energy shot through the dark sky.

“This is it!” Makuta yelled over the roar of their power. “This is the end!”

Nodding, the Toa took deep breaths, and focused. They could feel the energy of Okoto all around them, and within them. It had been there all along, and now it was all they knew. One by one, their forms ignited with raw, unhindered power. Their eyes glowed brightly as energy radiated like fire from their bodies.

Slowly, the eight Toa rose into the air. Energy continued to batter the Mask of Ultimate Power. After a moment, a crack appeared in its golden form. The Toa saw this, and continued their attack. Cracks appeared across the Forbidden Mask’s body. Raw power filled the air, glowing brightly.

“For the past,” Harvali said, merging with her element.

“For the future,” Makuta continued.

“For the Okotans,” Kopaka called out.

“For those we’ve lost,” Onua added.

“For Okoto,” Pohatu narrowed his eyes.

“For Unity,” Lewa tightened his grip on his ax.

“For Duty,” Gali looked at her brothers and sister.

“For Destiny!” Tahu finished.

The Mask of Ultimate Power shattered. Everything stood still for a second before a massive blast of absolute power erupted from the broken Mask and shot outwards. The blast consumed all of them in a blinding light, which grew brighter and brighter, brighter than anything that had ever been seen before. It shone across the land, shining light a light in the dark.

The light grew to consume the Black Volcano, continuing outwards, submerging everything. Okotans across the island watched as everything turned white.

From the glare, six beams of light shot into the sky. It cut through the cloudy sky and revealed the starry sky beyond. The six beams flew into the night before shooting outwards in different directions, creating six new stars.

Their destiny was complete.

---

Harvali stirred.

Slowly, her eyes opened. She saw that she was laying on a stone floor, one that seemed familiar but foreign at the same time. Her head ached and she felt smaller. Looking down, she saw that her form had been reverted back to her Mask Maker armor.

“What-?” she muttered when she noticed that she was not alone.

Around her lay the eight Elemental Creatures, as well as a figure she recognized as Makuta, who had also been returned to his original form.

Getting to her knees, she looked up, and her eyes widened.

“No way.”

The Capital City loomed around her, but there was something different about it. It didn’t glow with the same light it did in the Shadow Realm. In fact, it didn’t glow at all. The starry sky glittered above her, with six new stars that she had never seen burning among the cosmos.

Beside her, Makuta stirred before waking up. Going over to him, she helped him up.

“What happened?” he asked. “Where are the others?”

“I don’t know,” she replied. “We were on top of the Black Volcano and-.”

They saw Okotans beginning to gather. They looked confused and surprised.

“What happened? Where’s Ekimu? What happened to that Mask?” one of the villagers inquired.

“Ekimu? Mask?” Harvali raised an eyebrow.

“When we merged with our elements and destroyed the Mask of Ultimate Power, we must’ve expelled enough energy to draw the Capital City back into our realm,” Makuta said. “These are the villagers from the Festival of Masks! They’ve been restored!”

“So what happened to the Toa?” Harvali responded.

He looked up at the stars. “They must’ve sacrificed themselves to keep us and the Creatures here.”

“Why would they do that?”

“They must’ve thought that we were needed here to lead the Okotans.”

“Hey!” one of the villagers pressed. “What’s going on? How did we get here?”

The two Mask Makers looked at each other before getting up. The eight Creatures joined them.

“We were saved,” Harvali said. “Saved by heroes beyond our world, beyond our time. They fought against darkness and evil with light and goodness, and prevailed. They have watched over our island since the beginning. And while they may now be gone, they are watching, and waiting for a time when they’ll be needed again.”

One Okotan stepped forward. “Who are these heroes?”

Makuta and Harvali smiled.

“The Toa.”

Epilogue: Journey's End

One year later.

Narmoto, Protector of Fire, traversed the molten landscape of the Region of Fire. He held his cloak tight to himself. A gentle breeze blew through the land. He continued his trek, walking beside a river of lava. In the distance, a large settlement could be seen through the haze. The sight of it brought a smile to his face.

As he made his way towards the village, he reflected on everything that had happened in the last year.

After the blast of light consumed them, he and the other Protectors traveled to the Black Volcano. A few days later, they reached it, and found something very different. Instead of the towering mountain that brought dread to them every time they saw it, they saw the Capital City, restored to where it had been thousands of years before.

Inside the city, they found the villagers from the time of the Great Cataclysm, their corruption gone. They then found, to their further surprise, Harvali, Makuta, and the Creatures. The Toa where nowhere to be found, however.

That was when their worst fears were realized.

The Mask Makers informed them that the Toa had sacrificed themselves in order to keep them and the Creatures on Okoto. When asked why, they only said that the island must still need them. They explained that, while the Toa had left, they had sealed the cracks between their world and the Shadow Realm, saving the universe from collapsing in on itself.

Learning what had happened, they had stayed in the city for a few days, helping out with making sure that everything and everyone was all right. After that, they and the Mask Makers returned to the City of the Mask Makers. It was in a pretty bad state, but the Okotans had already gotten to work rebuilding it.

In the following days, weeks, and months, they worked tirelessly to restore their island after the damage that had been sustained. The Skull Spiders had been driven back into the wilderness with the help of Skull Slicer. The Skull Warriors had finally been laid to rest. Axato had taken his rightful place as leader of the Skull Raiders, and turned the pirates into protectors of the island. Skull Slicer and even Skull Basher joined his ranks as his lieutenants.

Glonor, Cesea, Jaller, Kongu, and Hewkii had begun organizing a network of village guards, to protect the villages while the Skull Raiders protected their borders. It was a noble undertaking, and the Protectors couldn’t have been more proud.

Several of the Okotans, including Bingzak, Arker, and Reua were looking to explore the history of the island, including planning an expedition to the Labyrinth of Control to uncover the many secrets it might hold.

Makuta, to their surprise, was the hardest working of them. He worked tirelessly to restore the island of Okoto. When asked why, he simply said that he was paying for his sins, despite Harvali’s insisting that he was forgiven.

The Elemental Creatures had returned to the Regions, to their Temples. Occasionally, they would catch sight of them, but it was rare.

Narmoto reached the entrance to the village. Crossing the threshold, he stepped onto the street. Villagers walked around him, some taking notice, some not. He continued walking. He didn’t care about being recognized. All he cared about was being reunited with his family. He had been on a mission with the other six Protectors for several weeks, and before that he had been in the Capital City aiding the continued reconstruction efforts.

Eventually, he reached the foot of the stairs that led to his hut. Looking up at it, a smile broke across his face. Walking forward, he ascended the stairs. Opening the door, he stepped into his home.

At the table in the small dining room sat the Protector’s wife, Naiya. Her head was supported by her hands, and her eyes were closed. He smiled faintly. She must’ve fallen asleep waiting for him. Taking off his cloak and setting his weapons down, he came over, pulled up a chair, and sat next to his wife.

Gently, he placed his hand on her shoulder.

“Hey,” he said, softly.

Stirring, she awoke. Looking around confused for a moment, her eyes fell on her husband. Immediately, they widened.

“Narmoto!” she exclaimed.

“Hello, Naiya,” he smiled.

The two embraced, his wife holding him close.

“I tried to wait up for you,” she said.

“You didn’t need to do that,” the Protector chuckled.

“I wanted to, also because Reuan wanted to wait up too, but I convinced him to go to bed a few hours ago.”

“Sorry that you have to wait so long,” he told his wife.

“I’m used to it,” she replied. “Duty calls. Even if I don’t like it.”

Narmoto smiled faintly again. “I’m going to be able to be home more often after the Festival of Masks ends. I promise.”

A voice came from behind them. “What’s the Festival of Masks?”

The two of them turned to see their son standing in the doorway. He had a blanket draped around his shoulders and was rubbing his eyes, obviously having just woken up from a nap. His parents smiled at each other before getting up from the table and approaching their son. Narmoto knelt down in front of Reuan and smiled.

“Hey, buddy,” he said. “I’m sorry I’m home late.”

“I love you, daddy. I’m glad you’re home,” he replied. “What’s the Festival of Masks?”

“It’s a celebration that was held on Okoto a very long time ago, back during the original age of the Mask Makers,” he explained. “It was meant to honor the Protectors for everything they had done, and giving thanks to the gods. It was a time of wonder.”

“Are you going to be honored, daddy?”

He chuckled. “Yes, but it won’t be just about us. Harvali and Makuta are going to honor the Toa and what they did for us a year ago.”

“Can I come?” Reuan asked.

Narmoto smiled. “Of course.”

The boy’s face lit up in a massive smile.

“Really? Yaaay!” he began dancing around. Both of his parents laughed.

“But first,” the Protector tried to calm his son. “You need to get some sleep. We have a few days until we leave for the City, and we’re going to need all our energy for the trip.”

“I don’t wanna,” he moaned, stomping his feet.

“I know. But we all have things that we need to do that we don’t want to,” Narmoto replied. “So, will you go to sleep for me?”

Reuan thought about it for a moment before shrugging. “Okay.”

He chuckled. “Thank you. Now go to bed.”

“Yes, daddy,” the boy replied before turning and walking to his room. They listened as the door shut.

Narmoto got up and turned to his wife, who was smiling at him.

“What?” he asked.

“I wish you could be home more often,” Naiya replied.

“After the Festival of Masks, I will be able to be home with you and Reuan more often. I promise.”

---

The two Mask Makers stood on the balcony and looked out at the City of the Mask Makers. The city was illuminated by dozens of flickering fires that burned in the night. An array of stars glittered in the sky beyond the glowing planets. Six stars stood out among the darkness.

During the final battle, the city had sustained heavy damage. It had taken them a lot of work, but they had managed to rebuild the city in time for the new Festival.

“I can’t believe everything that we’ve accomplished in a year,” Harvali said.

“I can’t believe it’s been a year,” Makuta replied.

“It seems like just yesterday that we found ourselves in the Capital City. And in a year we’ve rebuilt this city and most of that one.”

“I’m so glad we could revive such an ancient tradition.”

“Before I completely gave into envy, the Festival of Masks was the best time I spent with my brother,” he looked at his sister and smiled. “I’m glad I get to share it with you.”

She returned it. “At long last, Okoto will be healed. Once and for all.”

The statement made him look down. She noticed this.

“What’s wrong, Makuta?” Harvali asked.

He inhaled deeply. “For thousands of years, I plotted to destroy this island. I made it my mission to deepen the wounds that I inflicted on that fateful day. I sent the Skull Creatures and the Skull Spiders. I sent Umarak. I banished the Toa to the Shadow Realm. I killed Ekimu. I almost destroyed our island.”

“Makuta…” she trailed off when he kept talking.

“But now, I’m helping to rebuild my homeland. I’m repairing the very damage that I inflicted,” he sighed. “For what I’ve done, I should have been returned to the Shadow Realm, but yet I’m here. And every step of the way, you’ve been there to help me. You believed in me when no one else would, and I’m eternally grateful to you for that.”

“I couldn’t have done everything we’ve accomplished on my own. I owe just as much to you as you owe to me,” Harvali replied.

He smiled at her before suddenly keeling over in pain. She quickly rushed over to help him up.

“Makuta! What’s going on?”

The fit of pain abruptly subsided, and he managed to stand up, holding his side. He was breathing deeply.

“I think… time is catching up with me.”

Harvali understood. A grim expression crossed her face.

“Yes.”

“This day was always going to come, sister. The only thing that sustained me for thousands of years was the dark energy I was harvesting from the Shadow Realm.”

She was silent.

“Don’t worry. I’d rather live for one day in the light than forever in the darkness,” Makuta reassured her.

The Mask Maker thought about it for a moment, before nodding.

“We’ll tell the Protectors. They’ll help us find the next Toa of Shadow.”

“After the festivities are concluded, of course,” Makuta said. “This is their day.”

“Of course,” Harvali smiled faintly.

---

Narmoto stood in front of the rebuilt Arena. His cloak rustled in the wind. There was the distant rumbling of the crowds in the opposite side of the city as the Festival of Masks unfolded. After arriving, his wife and son had gone to take part in the celebration.

He continued to observe the large structure before someone behind him spoke.

“Hello, Narmoto.”

Turning, he smiled at the other Protectors as they stood before him. They were all dressed similarly and were smiling.

“Hello, my friends,” he replied.

“Why aren’t you enjoying the festivities, Narmoto?” Korgot smiled.

“I just wanted to think.”

“Think? Think about what?” Kivoda asked.

“Just everything,” he said simply.

“Try not to hold the weight of the world on your shoulders,” Vizuna chuckled. “You know that’s my job.”

The Protectors shared a laugh. Narmoto smiled faintly before returning his gaze to the Arena.

“After everything we’ve seen, and all the hurt we’ve endured through the ages, it’s amazing that we’ve been able to rebuild. We are truly blessed.”

Silence fell between them for a moment as they continued to survey the structure before them. A breeze rustled their cloaks again. The sun burned in the clear blue sky. The sounds of the city behind them seemed to drown into the background.

Two pairs of footsteps finally broke the silence. Searching for the source, they saw Harvali and Makuta approaching.

“My friends!” Harvali exclaimed. “It is so good to see you!”

The six Protectors instinctively bowed. However, Makuta shook his head.

“We’ve told you about this,” he smiled. “You bow to no one.”

They gathered themselves. “Of course. We’re sorry,” Izotor replied.

Harvali chuckled. “The traditions of the past are hard to shake. But that is why we continue to forge forward into the future.”

“Of course, Mask Maker,” the Protector of Fire nodded.

“Speaking of forging,” Makuta smiled again, glancing at his sister. “Follow us.”

Together, the eight of them left the Arena and began to travel through the city. The Okotans celebrating the Festival of Masks bustled around them. Dozens of stands, selling food, weapons, and ornaments, filled the streets. As they walked, the Protectors smiled at them. It was the Okoto that they had always wanted to see. It was the Okoto that they had fought for. And now it was here, right before them.

After a while, they broke through the crowd. Reaching the foot of the stairs, they ascended to the Forge of the Mask Makers. Entering the temple, they crossed to the spiral staircase.

In the year since the final battle, they had restored the building to its original state. The only difference, however, was a large carving of the six Toa on the large wall. The orange light of the flames illuminated its details.

They reached the forge. The large flame was blazing brightly. Looking around, they saw a table with a large cloth draped over several hidden objects. It stood out from the rest of the tables strewn around the room.

“What’s this?” Kivoda pointed at it.

The two Mask Makers smiled again. Together, they began to approach the table. Behind them, the Protectors followed. Stepping to one side of it, Makuta grasped the cloth and pulled it off to reveal six glittering Masks of Power. They appeared to resemble the Masks that the Toa had originally worn, but were a blend of gold and crystal that corresponded to each of their elemental colors.

“What are these?” Nilkuu awed at them.

“These,” Harvali began. “Are replacements for your traditional Protector Masks that were forged by Ekimu thousands of years ago before the last Festival of Masks. These are more powerful than your current Masks. Far more.”

“They look like the Toa’s Masks,” Korgot observed.

“We modeled them after theirs, yes,” Makuta replied. “They also contain some of the materials from their Golden Masks of Power.”

“Why?”

“Because,” Harvali said, “the time of the Toa is over. And while the Mask of Ultimate Power may be destroyed, there is still danger lurking the receding darkness. And with the Toa gone, it is time for new heroes to take their place.”

Makuta smiled. “That is where you come in.”

The Protectors were confused. “What?” Narmoto asked.

“It is time that you became the heroes that you were always meant to be,” Makuta explained. “For centuries, the Protectors were viewed only as elders. Guardians waiting to call the greater heroes. But now, it is time for you to be the heroes that the Okotans look up to.”

Uneasily, the six exchanged glances. Harvali saw this and stepped forward.

“The Toa will always be the ones who saved Okoto, but you will be the ones who will lead us into the new future.”

“Are you sure about this?” Vizuna inquired.

“More than anything,” the two of them replied.

They hesitated for a moment. The Mask Makers smiled.

“Come. This is your destiny.”

Finally, the six Protectors approached the table. They took their respective Masks of Power in hand. Reaching up, they detached their Masks of Power, which had been handed down for generations, and with deep breaths, attached their new Masks. At once, a surge of energy rushed through each of them. This forced them to step backwards.

After the rush subsided, they looked down at their hands. They glittered with energy.

“You now have command over your elements,” Makuta said.

The six looked at them.

“You are the heroes of Okoto now,” Harvali smiled.

---

The large crowd gathered around the stage. They watched the stage expectantly, their eyes flickering to a large object shrouded in a tarp to the right of it. An energy was in the air, one that had not been felt on the island of Okoto in a long time.

A few moments later, the two Mask Makers appeared on the stage. At once, the crowd burst into thunderous applause. The ground shook beneath them. The Mask Makers waved, smiles on their faces. As the crowd began to quiet, they started to speak.

“Thank you!” Harvali shouted.

The crowd cheered again.

“Please!” Makuta held up his hand. “Do not cheer for us! Cheer for them!”

He pointed to the opposite side of the stage, where the six Protectors were now emerging. Their news Masks of Power glittered in the sunlight. The crowd cheered again, this time even louder. The six waved to the assembled.

“Yes!” Makuta smiled. “The Protectors are now ready to become Okoto’s new defenders, ones that we can all look up to! And I couldn’t be more proud of them!”

The crowd cheered again. They continued to wave.

“Of course,” Harvali stepped forward. “We cannot forget the ones who gave it all to allow us to be here. The Toa sacrificed their place in our world in order to save us. If they had not, everything would be gone. The darkness would have won. But, instead, through unity, they did their duty, and fulfilled their destiny. And we are externally grateful to them.”

More thunderous applause.

“And to express our gratitude,” Makuta stepped forward. “We have erected this statue, so that we will always remember them!”

The large tarp suddenly gave way, falling to the ground. It fell away to reveal six towering stone figures. The crowd stood in awe at the sight of them. Sunlight reflected off their surfaces, shining like beacons. They were the six Toa, carved in the shape of their original armor as when they had first arrived on Okoto over a year prior.

“Tahu. Gali. Lewa. Pohatu. Onua. Kopaka,” Harvali said. “These six legendary heroes saved us from the darkness. They showed us the light, and gave us a future.”

The crowd roared again. As they cheered, she turned to Makuta.

“And we owe everything to them,” she said to him.

---

The campfire crackled as the eight of them sat in a circle underneath the twinkling stars. Most of the Okotans had retire for the night, but a few of them were out still celebrating the Festival. The eight of them were gathered near the foot of the stone steps.

They were laughing. “He said that he didn’t slip?” Nilkuu blurted out.

“Yeah, he did,” Izotor chuckled. “I had to do everything in my power not to laugh.”

“I can’t tell you how many times Tahu almost fell off his board while we were making our way to the volcanoes,” Narmoto leaned back.

“I’d love to hear those stories,” Korgot smiled.

“Maybe another time,” he replied.

“I can tell you that Gali was completely professional when we were traveling,” Kivoda crossed his arms.

“As was Lewa,” Vizuna nodded.

“I have some stories about Onua,” the Protector of Earth leaned forward.

“As do I about Pohatu, but he wouldn’t want me to tell them,” Nilkuu shook his head.

Another roar of laughter erupted from them.

“I wish I had known them when they first arrived,” Harvali said. “When they came, I was still trapped underneath the city.”

“They were separate and without purpose,” Narmoto replied. “They were clumsy. They fought. But, when it came to it, they came together for the good of the island. They fought evil and won.”

Korgot nodded. “They were the heroes we needed. They came when we called. We owe everything to them, and it is the pleasure of my life to have known them. They were our light in the dark.”

Silence fell as they looked up at the six stars twinkling in the night sky. Makuta shifted in his seat, and took a deep breath.

“I have something to tell you all,” the Mask Maker said.

They all looked at him.

“What is it, Makuta?” Izotor inquired.

He glanced at his sister, who was giving him a reassuring smile. He returned to the group.

“My time is… running out,” he began. “My body is starting to give way. The thousands of years that I have lived have finally caught up to me.”

The Protectors were hesitant. “What does that mean, Makuta?” Kivoda asked.

“It means that I am dying, and a new Toa of Shadow has to be found.”

“Are you sure?” Nilkuu leaned forward.

“I’ve never been more certain of anything,” Makuta nodded. “My time in this world is over.”

The Protectors were quiet as they considered these things. The two Mask Makers watched them as they exchanged glances. After a few moments, Narmoto finally looked to them.

“Then we will help you find a new Toa of Shadow,” the Protector of Fire pledged. “I promise you this.”

The other Protectors nodded their agreement. Makuta smiled.

“Thank you, my friends.”

Outside the circle, a number of Okotans were gathering. Among them were Naiya, Reuan, Glonor, Cesea, Bingzak, Jaller, Takua, Kongu, Reua, Hewkii, Hali, and Arker. The other Protector’s spouses and children were also there. They began to approach the circle.

“Ah,” Harvali smiled. “What brings you all here?”

Bingzak stepped forward from the group and approached the elders. His eyes flickered between his friend and the rest of them.

“Well,” he began. “I was wondering if you could…?”

“What, my boy?” Vizuna asked.

Makuta chuckled. “I think he wants to hear a story.”

The boy nodded. “We want to hear the story of the Toa.”

Behind him, the group nodded. Harvali smiled again.

“Take a seat, my friends.”

Shuffling, they joined the Protectors, widening the circle. Their spouses joined them while the rest of the Okotans sat around. The eight glanced at each other, clearly unsure of who was going to tell the story.

“Narmoto,” Harvali looked to him. “Would you like to tell the story?”

There was a murmuring of agreement. The other Protectors and Makuta smiled at him. Taking a deep breath, he nodded. Silence fell around them, the only sound being the crackling of the fire.

Leaning forward, he cleared his throat, and began to speak.

“Come, gathered friends, and listen again to our legend… of the BIONICLE.”

Characters

• The Toa
  • Tahu, Toa of Fire
  • Gali, Toa of Water
  • Lewa, Toa of Jungle
  • Pohatu, Toa of Stone
  • Onua, Toa of Earth
  • Kopaka, Toa of Ice
• Ekimu, the Mask Maker
• Makuta, the Mask Hoarder
• Protectors
  • Narmoto, the Protector of Fire
  • Kivoda, the Protector of Water
  • Vizuna, the Protector of Jungle
  • Nilkuu, the Protector of Stone
  • Korgot, the Protector of Earth
  • Izotor, the Protector of Ice
• Creatures
  • Agil, the Creature of Light
  • Ombra, the Creature of Shadow
  • Ikir, the Creature of Fire
  • Akida, the Creature of Water
  • Uxar, the Creature of Jungle
  • Ketar, the Creature of Stone
  • Terak, the Creature of Earth
  • Melum, the Creature of Ice
• Umarak, the Hunter
• The Shadow Horde
• Harvali
• Kulta, the Skull Grinder
• Skull Basher
• Skull Slicer
• Skull Warriors
• Axato
• Dream Snatcher
• Demon Warrior
• Soul Grinders
• Bingzak
• Takua
• Jaller
• Kongu
• Hewkii
• Reua
• Glonor
• Cesea
• Glaruu
• Arker
• Mask Snatcher
• Rock Crusher
• Morvarid
• Skull Creatures
• Skull Spiders
• Several Okotans

Gallery

Primary banner.

Alternate banner.

Alternate banner.

Reviews

"At long last, after six long years, a journey is at an end. Invader joined the wiki in November 2013 and only a few months afterward, in February 2014, he began work on the story Pushing Back the Dark. The story, at its conception, was intended as a rewrite of the 2006-7 story arcs, the first of a trilogy of stories retelling the Bionicle G1 storyline. By December of 2014, a few months after the announcement that Bionicle would be making a return, Invader switched gears, rebranding the trilogy as a retelling of the G2 storyline. Each entry of the trilogy would cover each story year. The first entry would be followed up with Lost in the Dark and Light in the Dark.
Invader began his release of Pushing Back the Dark, or the recount of the 2015 storyline in September 2015 to July 2016. Drawing its basis from the Online Animations, the tale was an epic retelling of the storyline, building upon what we had seen through them and elevating them in what was described in its spotlight as being “truly a testament of the unexplored potential of G2 and boundless dedication of its fans.” Invader followed this story with Lost in the Dark, a retelling of the 2016 storyline, publishing from November to December of 2017. Now taking his cues from the Journey to One animated series, Invader similarly reimagined everything we had seen before, and taking a few episodes of a truncated series and bringing them to new levels. It was praised in its spotlight for “expanding upon events seen in the television show whilst simultaneously enriching the wider Okotan backdrop with Invader’s own additions.”
Now, in the grand finale, Invader spins the storyline in an altogether original direction. Having left Lost in the Dark as the open-ended cliffhanger it should have been, Invader imagines the G2 storyline as it was meant to be come 2017--before the abrupt, unanticipated cancellation of the series (which ironically happened as Pushing Back the Dark was finishing its release). Basing much of his contents and inspiration on the Art of Lego Bionicle artbook released soon after, Invader knits these loose threads together in a story that is wondrously evocative of G2, encapsulating and expanding upon the themes that the original story had established. Light in the Dark sports some remarkably strong moments as well as boasting a remarkable creation myth. As Invader closes the pages on Okoto’s epic, there are more than a few surprises in store, and he delivers on the loose threads he has established in his prior entries.
The sheer commitment that it took to get through this, much less after six long years, is incredible, and it stands as one of Invader’s most remarkable achievements during his tenure here. Few have taken such deep-dives into the G2 lore (there unfortunately isn’t much there, and the fact Invader could extract so much from it is a testament to his skill), and while there is a handful of notable forays into the realm of G2 (my own was completely inspired by Invader’s work in the world). However, Invader has cut an undisputed title for himself as the foremost author in the field.
On a personal note, Invader’s been publishing content for this trilogy as long as I’ve been a member of this wiki. Crazy to see that he’s finished.
I could go on (part of me wants to see how long I could make this--seems appropriate since this took fifth place on the Long Pages knocking mine down a peg :/) but suffice to say, this story--this trilogy--is well worthy of this spotlight and thoroughly deserves its place in the annals of CBW’s featured stories."

―Light in the Dark's featured spotlight, written by ToaGonel.

Trivia

• Light in the Dark marks Invader39's third and final major story set in the Nuvaverse.
• Since BIONICLE was cancelled before the 2017 wave could be made, the story will consist of headcanons based on story concepts released by the BIONICLE team after the line's demise.
• Several concepts neglected by the 2016 story will be brought back and resolved. Specifically, the Mask of Time.
• In the Prologue, as with the previous two installments, a direct transcription of the first 2015 Online Animation, The Legend is used, and is followed by a recounting of the events of Pushing Back the Dark and Lost in the Dark.
• The character of Makuta in the story serial is based on the character of Thanos in the 2018 film, Avengers: Infinity War. He is even referred to multiple times in the story as "the mad titan".
• Several chapters of the story were named after episodes of Marvel's Agents of S.H.I.E.L.D., of which Invader39 is a big fan.
• The second generation incarnations of Takua, Jaller, Kongu, Hewkii, and Glonor were created by BobTheDoctor27.
  • Glaruu was also created by BobTheDoctor27.
• The Protectors receiving Masks of Power forged in the shape the Toa's original Masks is a nod to BionicleChicken's Timeless Heroes.
• Light in the Dark is the fifth longest page on the wiki.
  

The Dark Trilogy (v|e)
Main Story	Pushing Back the Dark | Lost in the Dark | Light in the Dark
Short Stories	Web of Shadows
Related	Lies in the Light